Beyond Imagination: Early Works

BEYOND IMAGINATION: The Early Works
BEYOND
IMAGINATION
THE EARLY WORKS

1993 – 1994
Wayne Hartman
1
This manuscript is a collection of the early works that were

expressed at Beyond Imagination starting in 1993. In
particular, it includes:
Beyond Imagination:
Foundations for Creating a New World
This is a book generated primarily in Nov-Dec 93. It
conveys the vision of what Beyond Imagination is all about.
That vision has remained essentially unchanged over the
years. Though, it seems that we are getting closer to the time
for implementation of many of the ideas presented.
Reality Creation 1010
This is a smaller book generated in a 10 day period from 26
Dec 93 through 4 Jan 94. It has been one of the most visited
works at the Beyond Imagination site over the years. I am
still amazed by what was able to come forth in such a short
period of time. It is the only work of that nature that I have
been moved to do in the decade that I have been expressing
for this stream of consciousness that spirit brings forth in my
life.
Best Quotes from Beyond Imagination Notes
This is a selection of Best Quotes from the first ten months
of Beyond Imagination Notes [Nov 93 – Aug 94]. It is
included because I am particularly partial to quotes …
especially good ones. I believe they have the power to
transform us in highly beneficial ways.
I hope these works provide you with as much pleasure and
enjoyment as they have me. Further, I hope that they
challenge you to think in new ways so that we can co-create
a new world that lives up to the promise of a new age.
In Peace, Love, and Light, Wayne
2
BEYOND IMAGINATION
FOUNDATIONS FOR CREATING A NEW WORLD
by
Wayne Ellis Hartman Jr
December 1993
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction
Ch 1: Beyond Imagination: A Prelude to the Changing

Times
Ch 2: The Role of the Individual vs Society
Ch 3: A Government for the New Age
Ch 4: Towards a New World Order
Ch 5: Spiritually Driven Economics
Ch 6: Education: We are all Teachers, Learners, Doers
Ch 7: Living in a Manner That Supports All Life
Ch 8: Manifesting Spirit in Flesh
Ch 9: Community: Realizing the Synergy of Group in a

Practical Way
Ch 10: The Art of Making It So
Ch 11: Knowing Thyself
Ch 12: When Love Conquers All: Living from the Heart
Conclusion
4
DEDICATION
This manuscript is dedicated:
to the muses, the source of all higher inspiration. It was
brought forth into this world from the depth of my soul and
being. I present it to you in the hope that it will assist in the
transition to a new age and a new world order in which
consciousness is opened so that the spirit can be more fully
expressed in flesh. We are spirit incarnated into flesh. The
time has come for us to consciously manifest our true nature.
second to Gini, my wife of six years, who has remained with
me through some interesting and difficult times, especially
over the past six months when my consciousness was testing
its limits and stretching beyond what is conventionally
considered to be sane. She has taught me much about living
in relationship with others and about unconditional Love. I
love her dearly, with all my heart and soul. She is a
wonderful lady, truly a princess.
third to my kids Foofer, Bunnie, Huggie, and Foozie. These
four Samoyeds, three of whom are dearly departed, brought
a great sense of fun, joy, and playful companionship into my
life. In addition, they taught me much about the nature of
unconditional Love and of Life and Death itself.
fourth to my friend Dennis. Golfing with him over the past
four years has been one of the few pure physical pleasures
that has occupied my body and mind on a regular basis. Had
it not been for this, I may not have been able to endure the
tedium of that phase of my life and survived until my
character could finally come alive in this Play of
Consciousness we call Life.
5
FOREWORD
The ideas presented in what follows are based on my
personal perspective on the world, one that is grounded in
both science and metaphysics. You see, my formal
background is in mathematics, science, logic, and
engineering - BSEE from USC, MSEE from Stanford, and
fifteen years of work in engineering and engineering
management in the Air Force and defense industry. My
informal background, however, is in metaphysics and more
intuitive processes of mind and spirit - twenty years of
reading, thinking, seminars, and assorted classes in various
areas of metaphysics. I have found both to be extremely
important to my happiness, my understanding, and my
ability to create and be productive in both the personal as
well as professional areas of my life and my work. Further, I
believe this balance is extremely important in enabling and
allowing individuals to truly be all that they can be.
For those of you already doing this balancing act, you know
the benefits of approaching life in this integrated and
holistic manner, you experience these benefits every day of
your life. My hope is to provide you with motivation,
understanding, and guidance that will allow you to
experience this even more, much more.
For those of you at either extreme, however, I hope to show
you what you might be missing, and provide some
motivation and guidance as to why and how you can use
techniques from the other side to improve your day to day
experience of living on this planet. Those of you whom
operate too far on the left brain or analytical side need more
knowingness and magic in your life so that you can breathe
life into your processes and thoughts. Those operating too far
on the right brain or creative/intuitive side could use more
structure and organization in your life so that you can
better give form to your ideas and dreams. We have enough
castles in the air -- we need to put foundations under them to
bring them down to Earth!
6
For, you see, whether you believe it yet or not, you are
creating your own reality - Now, at this very instant. You've
been doing so throughout your life. All I can do is show you
how to make this process more conscious -- so that you can
create more of the experiences that you prefer and less that
you don't like; and, so that cooperatively, we can create
better conditions for all beings on this planet.
Be Happy and Create Well, Wayne
7
INTRODUCTION
The Journey
In the pages that lie ahead, should you choose to follow, I
will take you on a journey into a magnificent world -- one
that you have probably never seen though you live in it every
day. For, I offer you the vision of a fellow soul, a traveler
who sees the world through a unique set of glasses. I intend
to challenge all that you believe, and more, maybe all that
you think yourself and this world of ours to be. I ask that you
suspend your judgment for awhile, and open your mind to
some different possibilities. Don't worry, I will not brainwash
you, for I hold sacred your ability to choose and believe
whatsoever you will. Whether you know it yet or not, you
have the innate ability to know the truth -- it rings within
your very soul, you cannot be deceived unless you so
choose.
Beware: this journey is hazardous to your current state of
being. Should you choose to embark, you will not be able to
return the same, for in the experience of the journey you may
be transformed in ways that will not allow you to go back to
your old pattern of existence -- but then, you probably will
not want to do so anyway, so the warning doesn't really
matter.
The Purpose
The purpose is simple: to prepare the way for entering a
new age. You see, I came to this world to teach, to inspire,
and to assist in building the foundation for a new way of
being. A large part of this foundation is a mindset, a set of
ideas, a frame of mind, a vision, an altered way of seeing
reality, or whatever else you might want to call it. I offer it
unto you in hope that you too will be moved to align your
energies in a manner that conforms to this higher vision, so
that we may truly co-create what amounts to a "Heaven on
Earth", and more, much, much more. Remember, you are
8
here to experience the joy, the wonder, and the exhilaration
of living life as spirit in flesh. You are gods incarnate, you
truly are. My intent is simply to reacquaint you with that
fact, and to do so as intimately as is possible given your
present state of awareness and evolution.
Why Now?
Because there is no other time. All of us have chosen to
incarnate at this particular now, to be a part of this great
transformation. I know it in my Heart. You do as well,
though you may not be so intimately connected with that
wonderful part of your being yet. The timing is here, it is
now, it is Now. Can you not feel it? Do you not sense it with
every breath you take? If not, so be it! You will surely know
it soon. When the circumstances are right, and you are ready,
the knowingness will be given. And when that happens, you
will be moved to act by a tremendous force within you that
knows no bounds. The flower children of the 60's foretold of
the coming of this time -- a time of peace, a time of harmony,
a time of understanding, a time of truth, and a time of Love.
It is the Age of Aquarius.
Why Me?
This question is two-fold: why me who reads, and why me
who writes. As to the first part, if you have been drawn to
this manuscript, then, in some way, you needed to be
exposed to this message. The reason is known only to your
soul -- and it will be unique for each one of you. The bottom
line is that you are ready to be a part of something, that you
have a role to play. Maybe you have sensed this already.
Maybe you've felt that there is something that you are meant
to do, to participate in -- or that you have a greater purpose
or function to fulfill. It may have been a longing that could
find no satisfaction, or just a feeling that there is something
missing in your life. Regardless of how it may have
manifest, it got you here, to this place where you are now
ready to embark upon a wonderful journey of discovery that
9
hopefully will provide you with the tools and the experiences
you need to chart your own course and live your life in a
manner that conforms to the dictates of your spirit.
Now, as to the second part … because such is what I came
here to do. I have spent the past 20 years of my life preparing
for this time, this work. It is my true love, my meaning, my
purpose for being. It is my chosen destiny to assist in
building the foundation for establishing a new way of being
that is consistent with the energy and promise of the Age of
Aquarius. My soul's purpose is Peace. Of course, I would
choose to incarnate at a time that offers the potential for
finally manifesting a true and lasting Peace on Earth. How
do I know this? I just know. The truth of it strikes the very
core of my being. All that I can offer you is myself, a bit of
my special energy and knowingness. It is up to you to do
with it what you will.
The Tools of the Trade
You already possess everything that you need to begin this
journey. You are spirit manifesting in flesh at this very
moment. The journey is simply a means of expanding the
energy channels and capacities that you already possess, and
of re-acquainting you with a part of your being that may
have not had the opportunity or resources through which to
express itself fully. Your mind, your attention, your feelings,
your inner knowingness, your beliefs, your imagination, your
natural talents and abilities, and your experiences -- these are
the only tools that will serve you on the path that lies ahead.
You may find that you are carrying a whole lot more baggage
than you really need, and, you may as a result want to lighten
your load a bit -- that is entirely up to you. However, the
passage is much easier for those who travel lightly. But then,
ease is in the experience of the beholder, as is beauty, as is
anything that truly matters in life.
The Rules of the Game
10
There is only one rule. Harm ye not one another or
yourself! All else is optional, it is up to you. Now, from a
practical standpoint, there are a few limitations that you
agreed to before you assumed physical form on Earth.
However, since there is little you can do about them, there is
really no need to discuss them here.
For those of you who prefer a positive perspective: Love ye
one another and yourself! This indeed is essential to the
entrance of the Aquarian Age.
Guidance to Live By
Before we get started with the journey, a few words of
guidance are in order. As always, you are encouraged to
follow your own inner guidance -- for it is far superior than
anything you will receive from outside. However, it doesn't
hurt to get new inputs from time to time.
• We create our own reality!
• Ideas manifest into form. Such is the nature of

reality!
• Trust the God Force within you.
• If you don't believe, maybe it's time to start.
• Be true to yourself, and always act with complete

integrity.
• Love unconditionally!
• Give your intuition voice, then pay attention to it!
• Belief is a prerequisite for sight. If you insist on

proof, you may be making things much more difficult
then they need to be!
• There is always an easy way, and you will definitely
find it.
11
• Stay flexible!
• Don't just think, don't just believe, know!
• You are eternal, immortal, universal, and infinite. Be

thou what you are!
The Challenge
The challenge is simple -- to allow spirit to more fully
manifest in flesh. On an individual level this involves
bringing one's true divinity, one's soul, down to Earth in a
practical way. It involves being the powerful creator that
you are, and owning responsibility for that which you
manifest in your life. The catch is that you must do this in the
face of some pretty tough challenges. For, drastic changes in
all areas of life will bring much turmoil. The night that lies
ahead may be very dark indeed. But, the morning will come,
and will be glorious beyond imagination -- if we will but
follow the dictates of our hearts and souls and work together
to manifest a New World Order that lives up to the promise
of the Age of Aquarius.
Each of us, as individuals, have our own sparks of light to
share. As spirit in flesh, this is our birthright. As we learn to
follow our Hearts and listen to the dictates of our souls, this
individual spark grows greater in intensity. Further, when
combined with purpose and intent, these sparks can be joined
to create beams of light that can serve to illuminate the larger
way for many. Multiple beams can serve to illuminate cities
and towns, and in large enough numbers, states, countries,
continents, and the entire Earth.
Illuminated beings operate from the Heart, the center of
Love/Wisdom in accord with their understanding of their
part in The Plan as dictated by their spirit. Because of this,
all that they do and create is blessed. Love, peace, and
harmony abound in all their interactions and organizational
structures.
12
I dream of a world united in love, peace, and harmony;
where people are equal and receive what they need
physically, emotionally, intellectually and spiritually; where
people are employed in a manner that engages their natural
abilities and talents fully for the good of both the individual
and the society; where people are happy and free; where
people are helpful to one another and consider each other as
brethren; where industry operates in harmony with nature,
righting damages caused due to excesses in the past; where
governments are efficient and honest, and truly represent the
needs and rights of the people.
Such is the world that I choose to live in. Will you do your
part? Will you expend your energies in such a manner as
necessary to co-create such a world? Only through the
cooperation of many will such a world come into being. Let
us join together to make it so!
13
CHAPTER 1
BEYOND IMAGINATION: A PRELUDE TO THE

CHANGING TIMES
We have chosen to live in some wild and exciting times. The
pace of change in all areas of life is very fast -- quickly
moving towards astronomical. The decade of the 90's will
bring more change to our world than has been experienced in
many centuries. We are riding on a wave, a wave that has
truly reached tidal proportions -- and it will dramatically
impact all areas of our lives, as we know them.
In the coming years, it will seem as if the very foundations of
our society and our world are crumbling before our eyes.
Trust your inner sensing, for this is indeed exactly what is
going on. We are already seeing this happen, right now -- the
weather, the governments, the religious institutions, the
education systems, the health care systems, the family, the
economy, the ecology of the planet -- literally all aspects of
our lives are in tremendous turmoil. All of our social systems
are facing huge problems, problems for which they have
neither the resources nor ability to address. And, it has only
just begun!
The bottom line is that we have reached a breakpoint where
the core beliefs at the foundations of most of our social
systems and organizations no longer work. They no longer
serve us! The key factor in this is that after a long period of
growth, we have reached some of the limits of our planet;
limits that cannot and will not be ignored. We have neglected
the key principle of the Tao, balance and harmony in all
things. We have forgotten that we are fellow travelers, jointly
occupying spaceship Earth. And, for that, we are paying and
will continue to pay a heavy toll. Whoever said that
ignorance is bliss, was dead wrong when it comes to issues
on a global scale.
14
The great seers of the past all foresaw this time. They saw it
as the destruction of the world, Armageddon. What they
failed to understand, however, was that out of the ashes of
the old, a new world would arise -- one that was beyond
anything that they could even imagine, for the very
foundation was so alien to them that it could not be
expressed in their visions. Our perspective, now, is much
wider than theirs, allowing us to dream of things that were
not possible in the past, and from these dreams to manifest a
world and way of being that is truly beyond imagination.
The challenges that lie ahead are monumental. But,
collectively, we have everything we need to not only face,
but to overcome these challenges and to create a better
world, in the process, for all beings who choose to remain
here. However, cooperation will have to supersede
competition as the chief motivating factor in human
endeavors. This will not be an easy transition for the
majority of those in power at this time. We are truly at the
crossroads of a new age, and it is our choices in the coming
decade that will determine the character of how that age is
expressed.
Yes, the current economic systems will fall sharply, as they
increasingly fail to meet the economic needs of those they
are meant to serve. We've already seen the fall of
communism as a viable economy, at least in the form
practiced in the former USSR -- capitalism is not far behind,
especially as practiced in the USA. As we'll see later, the
principles upon which our current economic systems are
founded are deeply flawed. They do not permit a global
economy that is fair to all, and they do not operate from a
true sense of integrity.
The current governments will fall, as well -- for they no
longer meet the needs of the governed. Here too, the cause is
that the principles upon which these governments are
founded are deeply flawed. But, we'll get to this later as well.
15
One of the major factors, however, is that we, the people
have relinquished our responsibility to govern ourselves, and
to create the appropriate circumstances and environment in
which to learn, grow, and develop to our highest potentials;
and live, work, and play in a manner that is aligned to our
spirits and ultimate happiness. We create our own reality! We
are responsible for all that we experience! There is nothing
external to blame. We are seeing and experiencing the direct
results of our own choices. Yes, each and every one of us.
There is a bright side to this as well. We have chosen to live
at a time in which the possibilities are unlimited. We can
create our world to be whatever we want it to be, collectively
-- and we can do so within as short as a decade. At no other
time in history has humanity been in such a position to so
dramatically change its experience of life so quickly. The
speed at which new ideas can manifest now is simple
awesome. Just look at the changes in Eastern Europe and the
former Soviet Union that have occurred in the past few years
alone. These are just a small sample of what lies ahead.
Now, this is unlikely to be an easy transition. But,
fortunately, the overall consciousness is ready for massive
change. This readiness, this preparedness, this openness will
be instrumental in pulling us through. However, the way is
not yet certain. The innovative ideas, principles, and social
constructs required for a true New World Order have yet to
be dreamed, imagined, created, explored, and made manifest.
As an individual, flexibility will be extremely important in
the days to come, as will intuition and knowingness. I
strongly advise that you take steps now to "know thyself", as
intimately and as accurately as is possible for you. For,
knowing your abilities, your talents, your capabilities, your
strengths and your weaknesses -- these will be extremely
important to not only your happiness, but to your very
survival as well. Further, it would benefit you to begin to
create mutual support groups around you. For, the
16
interdependence and cooperation among these groups, these
chosen "extended families", will also determine the quality
of your life during the coming times, and possibly whether
you will survive or not. Unless your selfhood is expanded to
include others, you will not make it through, I can almost
guarantee it.
Think of yourself as a traveler, an explorer, about to embark
on the most exciting and challenging adventure that you will
ever take. For, in many respects, that is exactly what you are
and what you are about to do. But, make haste, there is very
little time in which to prepare, and the only thing that you
can bring is whom that you are. It behooves you to know
just what that is. It also behooves you to know more about
the people immediately around you -- for, at some point, you
may need to rely on their abilities, skills, knowingness, and
talents as well.
Now, those of you who need security, you may want to look
deep within and find a source of security inside yourself, for
in the journey ahead it may be impossible to find it anywhere
outside. Security usually is accompanied by stability -- you
know, like the rock; and, in the midst of all the changes
ahead, such stability will be very rare, that is, if indeed it
even exists at all. You may want to experiment with ways of
remaining secure within extreme mobility. For, mobile you
will surely be, as the adventure takes you into new lands and
new worlds.
It is not necessary that you understand, or that you accept or
believe, anything that I say. I offer unto you my vision of
what stands before us. It is not my intent to argue with you,
or to convince you that I am right. This is my vision, period.
You may also want to see what some others have to say
about this. I recommend that you start with Ramtha,
Breakpoint and Beyond, Powershift, or Upcoming Changes:
The Next 20 Years. The bottom line is: accept what you will,
what feels right to you. Ultimately, all that really matters is
17
utility. If the ideas and concepts I present empower you and
enable you to act, create, and make better decisions during
these changing times, by all means, use them. If not, throw
them away and replace them with others that work for you.
Also, if I step on beliefs that you hold sacred, or go too far
into Woo-Woo land for those of you that hold your left brain
abilities in high esteem -- don't take it personally. It might
help if you retain an attitude of curiosity about why I might
have such a strange, sacrilegious, or foolish belief at all. You
can bet that if I believe it there is some reason for doing so,
and that reason is usually one of usefulness. Remember, in
both science and metaphysics (or religion), truth is generally
not the issue, beliefs do not deal with the realm of fact or
truth. What matters is utility. Does the belief serve you, or
does it not! Beliefs are tools through which we create and
experience reality, period. They do not require proof. For, if
there is already proof, there is no room for belief. Further, I
take my beliefs seriously, as long as I hold them -- but, I also
change them frequently. I'd advise you to do the same.
Remember, after all, we are here to play, beliefs are our
playground -- and reality creation is one of the best games
around.
18
CHAPTER 2
THE ROLE OF THE INDIVIDUAL VS SOCIETY

In the Aquarian Age to come, there will be a great
restructuring of the role of the individual versus society. For
peace and harmony to truly manifest throughout the world,
all people must be aware of the intricate web in which we are
all part. Further, they must realize that all other beings are
their brethren in consciousness, and that all beings together
are one whole existing on one planet, Earth. The time has
come to move from a loose collection of independent self-
centered individuals, to a true society of cooperatively
interdependent Self-realized beings. Until we do this, the
Age of Aquarius will remain only a dream; for the very
essence of this foretold age is founded on the Unity that
comes from individuals aligned with each other and acting as
one.
What is Society?
Society is a group of human beings, held together by
agreement for reasons that are mutually beneficial to the
individual members. Societies operate as a whole, as a
collective body, chiefly in ways that look out for the highest
common good of all. Members have specific roles and
responsibilities within the society. One of the best direct
analogies is with the human body itself. The cells are all
alive, independently, yet they group together and establish
roles, responsibilities, and relationships that allow a greater
whole to exist that is more than just the sum of the parts. The
cells gain from the specific roles they play because they are
allowed to be what they are more effectively. Further, they
are given a limited awareness of the whole that their efforts
aid in creating.
Similarly, when individual human beings group together to
form societies, an organization is created in which the
members are the cells. Subgroups of the members may form
19
organs through which higher level functions can than
manifest. If the relationships are loose, the body created has
limited functionality over that of any individual member
because there is little synergy. When the relationships are
close and founded on a basis of love, the body thus created
has significant functionality over that of the individuals.
When the group is small, few organs can be created so there
is limited complexity or functionality. When the group is
large, many organs can be created, resulting in highly
increased complexity and functionality.
Countries, regions, states cities, and neighborhoods could all
be considered to be societies as could teams, groups, and any
other organizations of people. For our purposes here, the
most important society is The United States of America since
it is the one established to set up the New Order for the Ages,
Novus Ordo Seclorum.
Society is more than the government, however. It also
includes all the economic and social infrastructure necessary
to provide people with what they need.
The Contract Between Individuals and Society
Currently, we do not sign a contract with society. All that is
asked of us is that we abide by the laws of the land. If we do
so, we are free to go about our own business as we will. If
not, and if we are caught, we pay the applicable penalty
which may include restriction of our freedom. Society does
not owe us anything, nor does it expect anything from us. If
we become extremely needy, society may help via some
social program. We pay taxes to provide some basic common
services such as security, roads, law enforcement, and
various social programs.
The economic system part of society has no overall contracts
with us either. It does not guarantee us jobs, as evidenced by
the current high levels of unemployment. When we do find
jobs, we are either hired by the month, the hour or the piece.
20
The job is worth what the employer is willing to pay and the
employee is willing to take. The contract is for the employee
to put in time and effort in return for wages. In many cases,
there is no guarantee of continued employment by the
employer, and the employee is expected to provide two
weeks notice for termination. The bottom line is that getting
work and keeping work is up to the individual. One
exception is that unions are established to enable individuals
to bargain collectively.
From this, it is obvious that at very basic levels, our society
is still functioning as a very loose collection of individuals.
Only basic services are provided by the government, and the
free market economy is driven by profits, not by supplying
the needs of individuals. As a result, we see massive
problems all over the country in nearly every area of life:
education, health care, crime, employment, etc. We've grown
past the point where individuals or small groups can take
care of themselves. Modern life has too much complexity for
that. However, even though our lives have grown much more
complex, our infrastructures and organizations within society
have not evolved to meet the changing needs. We still have
no real contract with society. This has to change, and soon --
or, our problems will literally bury us.
Pure communism offers a contract of cooperative
interdependence between and among its constituent citizenry.
It says:
• From each in accord with their abilities.
• To each in accord with their needs.
Unfortunately, this has never been offered on the planet in a

manner where its conditions could be upheld. The USSR did
not set up an economy and social structure that offered
appropriate jobs that used the unique abilities of individuals
and clearly did not give the people what they needed. If it
had fulfilled these conditions, nothing in the world could
21
have made it fall. Part of why it failed is that it may not yet
be practical to create such a union between individuals
within a society. However, it may be useful to come up with
an adaptation that might work. We can get some ideas of
how this might be done by looking at cooperative
interdependence as exemplified in the human body and in
nature.
The human body is clearly set up in a cooperatively
interdependent manner. Individual cells do not have to worry
about whether their needs will be met. Various body systems
take care of getting food, air and fluids into the body. Other
systems break the raw materials down. Other systems ensure
that the proper nutrients are distributed where they are
needed. Still others ensure waste is carried away. Systems
cooperate to ensure that the needs of each individual are met.
In return, the cell is only asked to do what it was designed to
do, to function cooperatively in accord with it's abilities,
taking directions from higher levels of organization as
needed for the beneficial operation of the whole.
Nature itself operates in this same manner. Each individual
organism is adapted to perform a unique function in its
particular environment perfectly. It's simply amazing to see
the beauty and diversity that arises from each being
operating in this manner. Further, throughout the natural
world, each individual is asked only to do those tasks for
which it was designed in exchange for getting what it needs
to exist. It is allowed to take whatever it needs for as long as
it lives, but it may be taken itself to be consumed by another
at any time. The end result is a system of incredible richness,
wonder, and natural beauty.
In the Aquarian Age, this type of contract will be essential.
But, it is not a contract between individuals and the
government. It is a collective contract between individuals
as equals choosing to create a new type of society between,
22
among, and around them. The basic contract must be as
stated before:
• From each in accord with their abilities.
• To each in accord with their needs.
for this involves the very essence of elegance. It succinctly

ensures that each gives in the most effective way possible
while ensuring that they get what they need in return. It
couldn't be stated any simpler or more clearly.
However, for this to work we need a few terms defined -- in
particular, abilities and needs. In addition, we need to be
clear about how the from each and to each parts of the
contract are to be executed. We'll leave both of these things
until a bit later in the chapter. Also, it is interesting to note
that cooperative interdependence by itself says nothing about
the nature of the economic system that might be employed.
Questions of Private and Public Good
Before we go much further, we need to explore issues related
to private and public good. We would prefer to preserve
individual privacy and private good, yet the public good is
equally important. Private good involves ensuring that each
individual is provided a means for getting that individual's
needs met. Needs are more than food, clothing, and shelter
however. Needs encompass all areas of an individuals well-
being: physical, emotional, mental, and spiritual. Many of
the problems we see in this country today stem from the lack
of any responsibility on the part of society for various
aspects of these needs. For the most part, meeting one's
needs is an individual responsibility. The national
government was only given responsibility for overall
security, laws and justice, international relations, and things
that impacted the whole country. State and regional
governments were given similar responsibilities for more
limited areas, plus education. In very few cases are there any
23
specific responsibilities for ensuring that individual needs are
met. In fact, in most cases, individual rights and freedoms
are specifically called out simply to ensure that the
government doesn't overstep it's bounds.
In general, what is for the public good, has higher priority
than private good, by the sheer power of numbers. Majority
rules is the name of the game, except in the rare exception
when specific guaranteed individual rights are involved. The
current governmental structure does not ensure the common
good is maintained either. Political power, and the sway of
industry- backed lobbyists ensure that many decisions are
made in a manner that is not necessarily for the largest public
good, but instead is for the good of a few companies and a
few specific localities.
The economic system within society provides the primary
means by which individuals exchange their labor for the
goods and services that they need. It does not guarantee
anything, it simply provides an opportunity. For most of the
history of the United States, this has been an unequal
opportunity. The medical system is a key example of where
the system does not work. The costs of care have risen
unceasingly over the last few decades, making many people
unable to afford medical care or even the cost of medical
insurance. In addition, though we have high productivity and
per capita income, we still have people that are homeless and
starving; and, we have many people below the poverty level.
One key reason for this is that we don't look after each other
very well. All the focus on the individual has placed nearly
all responsibility there as well. The limited infrastructure set
up by the government doesn't ensure that individuals receive
what is needed to discover and develop their talents and
abilities. Further, even if this does happen, the economy
doesn't ensure that there will be a job within the area in
which one lives that can use those talents and abilities.
24
Emotional needs are rarely addressed at all, unless they
become large enough problems to require psychological
help. School is focused on educating the mind, primarily the
logical left brain. It pays little attention to emotions or to the
intuitive right brain modalities of thinking and knowing.
Spiritual needs are a matter left to the churches or to the
individual. An individual is free to believe and practice in
any way that individual chooses, so long as the method of
practice does not break any laws. For most people, this
involves being indoctrinated into the religion of their parents
as kids. As adults, many people leave religion altogether. As
the momentum behind the New Age builds, metaphysics
presents people with various spiritual principles and ideas
related to the nature of reality creation. Out of this core
springs forth much of the information on which a foundation
for the coming Age of Aquarius can be built.
On Freedom and the Pursuit of Happiness
The Declaration of Independence includes these powerful
words:
"We hold these truths to be self-evident; that all men are
created equal, that they are endowed by their creator with
certain inalienable rights, that among these are life,
liberty, and the pursuit of happiness."
How self-evident are these truths, and how faithful has our
government been in ensuring that these truths were upheld?
Let's take them one by one. The first truth is "that all men are
created equal". Interesting wording. This does not say that
they are born equal, for surely they are not. This also does
not say that they are equal, for this is not true either. The
differences are glaringly obvious, in abilities, in talents, in
wealth, in intelligence ... and in a host of other areas. The
words specifically refer to the initial act of creation only. As
souls we are equal. While the wording specifically says man,
that was a problem of the times. In truth, all humans are
25
created equal. This equality applies primarily to what
humans can potentially become, literally children of the
creator who in turn co-create their reality. Note that this
statement says nothing about the nature of the creator itself.
In particular, it does not state that this creator is God. My
understanding is that there is God, Goddess, All That Is, in
that order. God is the One. Goddess, Divine Source,
expresses the two nature, duality. Goddess expressing in line
with the Will of God created All That Is. We as souls are part
of All That Is.
The next few statements deal with inalienable rights.
Inalienable means that these rights cannot be taken away by
anyone or transferred to anyone, PERIOD.
The first of the inalienable rights is life. How can this be?
Everybody dies eventually. The key is that death is not the
end of life, only a transition. This is true of sleep as well.
Sleep is not considered to be the death of waking conscious
only a transition that we go through each night, to awaken
when we arise in the morning. Our Founding Fathers were
some of the brightest men on the planet -- most of them were
involved in various mystery schools such as Freemasonry.
You can bet they knew what they were building and that they
picked their words very carefully. Remember, they were
founding a New Order of the Ages, carrying out a task of
great importance to the entire world.
So, the only meaning there can be for this is that we were
created in a manner that allows us to live forever. Since
bodies are born and die, the essence that is being referred to
must be our true natures, outside of our form in time and
space. We are in truth infinite beings in potential, created in
the image of our creator, endowed with the potential to learn
and grow and become co-creators with our own creator.
The second inalienable right is liberty. But, what is liberty?
Are any of us truly free in this existence? One definition of
freedom is the ability to access and act upon information.
26
Another definition would have us be able to do that which
we want to do. National security severely constrains the first.
Economic and legal considerations severely constrain the
second. Again, this is neither self-evident nor inalienable. To
get to the real meaning we must again resort to metaphysics.
As souls, we are free to do as we will, and further, we have
access to all information and are free to act upon it in any
manner we choose. The bottom line is equal access and equal
right to free choice. The only limitations we experience are
those we create for ourselves.
The third inalienable right is the pursuit of happiness.
Again, looking around, it is not clear that all people in the
country, or worse yet, on Earth, have the right to pursue
happiness. I guess some people might find happiness in the
midst of poverty and squalor, but clearly they do not have a
very good opportunity to pursue happiness. The ways and
means should be easier.
For the Aquarian Age, the goal is to allow spirit to be
enfleshed as fully as possible on this planet. As spirit-in-flesh
living in this world, the rights called out by our founding
fathers become our birthright and the objective becomes to
live in a manner consistent with these self-evident truths.
Society's chief task then becomes one of creating the
environment that allows this to be realized in flesh by all
individuals on Earth, HERE and NOW.
The Rights and Responsibilities of the Individual
Before we get to rights and responsibilities, let's first
consider what an individual needs in this day and age. Also,
we need to discuss the difference between wants and needs.
To begin with, needs come in four areas: physical, emotional,
intellectual, and spiritual.
• Physical needs are such things as food, clothing,
shelter, and health care.
27
• Emotional needs are such things as relationships,
safety, job-satisfaction, happiness.
• Intellectual needs are right and left brain education,
creative expression, challenging work.
• Spiritual needs are ethics, meditation, self-
realization, samadhi.
In addition, such things as play, rest, and recreation may
involve two or more areas at once.
Needs are those things which an individual must have to be
able to function effectively. Wants are those things which an
individual desires that are above and beyond what is needed
to function effectively. A form of transportation may be
needed. A car may be the most effective form for providing
the transportation under the specific conditions. A new
Mercedes or BMW however is clearly a want, not a need.
Need satisfies function. Want satisfies function + other
tangible and intangible desires. As another example, a
college education may be required to prepare a person for a
particular job in line with that persons talents. Wanting to go
to an Ivy League college to get that education is above and
beyond the need. The bottom line is that society should be
concerned about ensuring that needs are met where possible.
If individuals want more than this, it should be up to them to
do something extra to earn the privilege.
Where possible that extra should be in terms of doing
something valuable for society, either by making themselves
more valuable to society through additional effort, or by
providing additional service to society above and beyond
that required in their contract.
The primary right of an individual is to have ones needs met,
through entitlement as a child, and through being provided
with a satisfying means for providing one's service in
28
exchange for the things and services or money needed to
procure the things and services that one needs.
1. Each individual has the right to nutritious food
throughout their life. Whenever, for any reason, they
cannot afford it, it should be provided for free.
2. Each individual has the right to sufficient clothing.
This should be clean, comfortable, fashionable, and
warm.
3. Each individual has the right to housing. This should
be safe, clean, warm, functional, and aesthetically
pleasing. As an adult, the housing should be provided
so that it is close to work yet close to family and
friends as well. In general, the environment should be
conducive to providing a lifestyle that allows an
individual to be happy or at least pursue happiness.
4. Each individual has the right to health care. This
should be free and readily available. It should be
holistic, treating body, mind, and spirit; and should
include a blend of what works best from the East and
the West.
5. Each individual has the right to education. This
should be tailored to maximize the development of
the individuals unique gifts and talent. Education
should include left and right brain components and
should include basic spiritual instruction as well.
Further, education should continue throughout the
individuals life.
6. Each individual has the right to be employed in a
manner that allows that individual's unique skills and
talents to be used in a way that is satisfying to the
individual and in a way that is in alignment with that
individuals purpose. Employment should pay an
amount that allows the individuals basic needs to be
29
met plus includes a discretionary income to cover
other needs and wants. Where possible, individuals
should be allowed to work at home or in their own
local neighborhoods.
Rights should always be followed by responsibilities.
Since the rights we've listed are extensive, we would expect
the responsibilities to be so as well.
1. Each individual is responsible to treat others with
kindness and compassion and to avoid hurting them
where possible.
2. Each individual is responsible for exercising
discipline in their life by keeping their needs within
bounds set by society and exerting reasonable control
over their wants.
3. Each individual in school or training is responsible
for enthusiastically and steadfastly applying energies
to studies so that lessons can be learned effectively
and efficiently. In addition these individuals shall
devote at least 20 hours per week to community
service.
4. Each individual not on training status is responsible
for applying their energies and talents enthusiastically
to achieve their purpose and to benefit society. Each
individual shall on average apply 60 hours per week
to some combination of working at an assigned job,
developing their skills and talents, and providing
service to others.
5. Each individual shall abide by the laws of the society,
living in peace and harmony with others at all times.
Any grievances or disagreements shall be brought to
mediators for resolution.
The Rights and Responsibilities of Society
30
Once again, before we discuss the rights and responsibilities
of Society, it is useful to understand the needs or society as
distinguished from the needs of individuals.
The needs of Society are:
• Love: Mystics, Saints, Humanitarians, Light Workers
• Wisdom: Philosophers, Poets, Wise Ones
• Peace: Peaceful Warriors, Peace Officers
• Harmony: Musicians, Decorators
• Beauty: Artists, Designers, Evaluators
• Elegance: Efficiency Experts, Effectiveness Experts,

Evaluators
• Inspiration: Master Poets, Master Artists, Priests
• Tolerance: Counselors, Evaluators
• Justice: Judges, Mediators, Arbiters
• Government: Executives, Diplomats, Negotiators,

Planners, Administrators
• Economy: Economists, Executives, Leaders,
Managers, Planners, Laborers
• Education: Teachers, Facilitators, Evaluators,
Psychic Workers
• Housing: Architects, Construction Workers,
Maintenance Workers
• Environment: Master Ecologists, Architects,
Planners, Ecologists
• Transportation: Engineers, Designers, Maintainers,
Transportation Workers
31
• Health: Food Workers, Nutritionists, Health Care
Practitioners, Doctors, Mental Health Practitioners
The top seven needs deal primarily with the emotional and
spiritual basis for society. The next two deal with the means
for resolving disputes and maintaining balance. The final
seven needs deal primarily with the physical and mental
basis, including the infrastructure.
The whole purpose of a society is to enable individuals
acting together to do more than they could do as individuals
alone. When two or more people are united in this manner
there is an added synergy that allows energy to flow through
the union to do its works. For a society of many, this
additional energy is phenomenal -- creating changes and
efficiencies of effort that are wondrous to behold. However,
we have not yet seen a society of many constructed in this
manner on a grand scale. Individuals have been reluctant to
constrict their freedom in a manner necessary for entering
into a binding contract with one another. Contracts are
typically relegated to business matters only. On rare
occasions groups of individuals have bonded together to
jointly pursue their greater good. Here, we are talking about
doing this on a scale of an entire country or the whole world.
Such an enterprise has never been undertaken.
The goal is to create a new entity, a body that is composed of
whole individuals instead of just cells. The result of such a
creation is a physical body for cosmic consciousness itself.
No one body would be sufficient for allowing its physical
expression. It is only a large group of individuals united and
aligned in the proper manner that creates a suitable physical
vehicle. The entire group would be partitioned into smaller
groups or organs, each responsible for its assigned function.
Further, individuals would have their assigned functions
within the various organs, systems, or parts of the body
infrastructure.
32
One of the key requirements, however, is that each person
does the very thing that person was designed to do. This is
revealed in the person's purpose. A core group of beings
already know their purpose. It is that group that will start the
revelation necessary to build the global body -- the ONE.
The birth of this body will mark the beginning the Aquarian
Age.
Given this new understanding, what are Society's needs?
1. To get a sufficient number of individuals aligned and
working harmoniously together to provide a form that
allows cosmic consciousness to express physically.
2. To enlarge the society over time so that the new
entity may gain in consciousness and eventually
encompass the entire planet.
3. To stop acting in a manner that does damage to the
environment and to correct damage done to the
environment by man's actions.
4. To operate in Peace and Harmony.
In return, what are Society's responsibilities?
1. To assure that the needs of each individual are met.
2. To provide each individual with challenging and
meaningful work that employs that individual's
talents and abilities.
3. To assist in creating an environment in which all
individuals are allowed to experience their
inalienable rights to life, liberty, and the pursuit of
happiness in flesh as true equals.
Declaration of Cooperative Interdependence
We hold these truths to be self evident: that all souls are
created equal, that we must through determined action create
33
the conditions that allow souls to be fully expressed in flesh,
that cosmic consciousness must be expressed in a physical
vehicle to enable souls to be fully expressed in flesh, that
individuals form the cells of the physical vehicle required by
cosmic consciousness, and that only by establishing a
cooperatively interdependent society will cosmic
consciousness have the vehicle it needs to be embodied on
Earth.
Further we freely choose to declare our cooperative
interdependence to allow for the creation of this physical
vehicle for cosmic consciousness to be put into motion. To
achieve this end, we establish the following contract between
and among us:
• From each individual according to that
individual's purpose and abilities,
• to each individual according to that individual's
needs and desires.
• Always we act in peace and harmony, and as true
brethren.
We are all One People
We realize that we are all one people, that whatever happens
to any one of us happens to all of us. We choose to treat one
another with dignity and respect, and to assist and help one
another when in need. Further, we choose to live in peace
and harmony, resolving any and all conflicts among us in
ways that are peaceful and just. We call to cosmic
consciousness to assist and guide in our endeavor so that the
vehicle for the expression of the ONE can be created in the
most effective and expeditious manner possible so that the
Age of Aquarius can be brought forth with the least turmoil
and suffering to our fellow beings.
34
CHAPTER 3
A GOVERNMENT FOR THE NEW AGE

In the long term, the desire is that there is one society in
which everyone interacts peaceably and harmoniously, and
individuals are fully responsible for creation of their own
reality. In such a case there is no need for government to
restrict or enforce anything. However, the ideal world may
take awhile to bring about. In the meantime, it is useful for
government to take care of a few of the overall needs of
society.
The Keeper of the Peace
The primary role for government in the early part of the
transition to the Aquarian Age is as the keeper of the peace.
Peace is one of the critical factors necessary for the Aquarian
Age to come forth at all. Keeping peace requires focusing on
just that, keeping peace. One does not keep peace through
arms and hostile aggression. That only encourages or
sanctions such aggression as a solution. Peace abides in a
different domain, one where harmony and understanding are
key features. The government has many political and
economic means at its disposal for getting its objectives
accomplished. We're already seeing this in some of the trade
negotiations. In the next few years, these will turn out to be
more powerful than anything else. So long as the world
revolves around money, economic power will mean
something. At some point however, there will be a major
transition in which economies are forced to bow to spirit.
The ecological movement is only the start of this trend.
Of course, we also need to help ensure that the world's
nations disarm as quickly as is reasonable and safe. Nuclear
weapons are of the greatest concern because of their vast
potential for destruction. It could take awhile to convince
world leaders that they can indeed trust each other enough to
start doing this to a greater degree. Unfortunately, there is
35
little basis for trust established between nations. Individual
countries act much like individual beings, focused primarily
on self-interest. Occasionally, we see groups of countries
band together to achieve a strengthened resolve on an issue
such as the Gulf War or a unification of power in some area
such as an economic alliance.
The United Nations is set up to be a worldwide society of
nations. If the members truly embraced the concept of one
world, reality could change in a heartbeat. However, there
are major differences among developed and developing
nations that need to be resolved before any real progress will
be made. The truth "created equal", in particular, is one that
will have to be addressed and resolved because the economic
conditions of different nations are so vastly different. At
some point, the issue of fairness and balance rears its head --
and it becomes obvious that the developed nations consume
far more than their fair share when compared to other
nations.
There must and will be a true society of nations as an
immediate predecessor to a united world of no nations. In
the not too distant future, we will be negotiating with other
worlds. By some accounts, various governments have
already entered into treaties and negotiations with aliens
from other worlds. This is only allowed to a limited degree.
Worlds that are truly civilized are ONE. They have resolved
any differences they had on their own planets prior to being
allowed to develop the technology to leave. The same
spiritual laws operate throughout the cosmos. We will have
to unite our planet before our space program can truly
blossom. After all, we can't be putting our garbage into the
space environment like we've done everywhere else. We
need to learn the lesson from nature that all other creatures
learn:
36
• when you get out of balance with your environment,
nature takes the necessary steps to bring things back
into balance -- whatever they might be.
Overpopulation and pollution are the two major areas where
we need to learn this lesson quickly, but we'll talk about this
more in another section.
When we have solved some of our problems and unified our
planet, it will be time to boldly go beyond and meet with
some of the emissaries from other worlds who are watching
us as we go through this critical evolutionary step in the
growth of our world, the Earth. It is because this transition is
such a rare step that consciousnesses from other parts of our
universe are here to watch and in some cases assist. It is not
such a large deal to keep Peace with other worlds, for there is
already an Alliance of Worlds that our world will be able to
join once we make it ONE.
But, this is still a ways off. Let's deal for awhile with more
practical issues of what government needs to be in the next
few years and what changes need to start happening now.
Why Government?
Government is needed because the people within society
need an infrastructure that will take care of some common
needs that they can't take care of by themselves on an
individual basis.
Currently these needs involve things such as:
• national defense
• health
• welfare
• education (K-12), also consider college and

university
37
• laws and their enforcement
• administration of public lands and facilities
• regulation of industry.
Many of the laws safeguard the public against harm from

various products or services that are provided by businesses
in the private sector. Heavy regulation is required because
businesses within a capitalist economy are motivated
primarily by profit -- hence, they cannot be trusted to ensure
they build safe products or services on their own.
From an efficiency perspective, this is very wasteful of
resources. It wouldn't be required if companies were
trustworthy enough to take whatever steps were necessary to
ensure that whatever product or service they were creating
was safe. Competition is the key culprit, however, since the
economics of the marketplace forces them to compete on a
price basis as well, and this they can't do if it costs too much
to make the product in the first place.
Environmental protection regulation is another key area. In
most industries, pollution control is a cost of doing business
only because the government requires it. On their own,
businesses would not have considered damage to the
environment in their profit calculations hence would not
have judged any pollution controls to be worth the cost.
So long as we have a capitalistic economy that is driven by
profit and competition, businesses can't be trusted. They are
motivated to build whatever products they can sell and make
a profit on; regardless of any assessment of true value,
worth, or need for the product. Further, there is a large
problem of lobbyists with heavy financial backing being paid
to influence the legislators on matters related to particular
industries or areas of business.
Government by and for the People
38
Government should be by and for the people. It's not clear
that this is the case at present. Because there is no real
contract in the society, government does those functions that
are defined in the Constitution and the laws of the land. Most
of the legislators are lawyers -- clearly not a reasonable
representation of the people. Most legislators and high level
politicians are wealthy -- again, not a reasonable
representation of the people. Further, the legal language of
proposed laws is very difficult for the layman to understand,
making it tough to decide how to vote on many issues.
It is not clear how it is decided what the people need. Having
an initiative process that allows any initiative get to the
ballot and then voting on it to see if the people want it seems
to be a very out of date way of doing things.
One major way to improve things would be to start defining
an agenda for change. This would require examining what
the major problems are and taking a holistic approach toward
defining changes needed to address these problems as a
group. In some instances, problems might be isolated; but,
my overall feeling is that most of these problems are related:
• Schools - Poor education results.
• Crime - People don't feel safe.
• Health Care - Many don't have it + costs too much.
• Welfare/Homeless - Too costly/Too many homeless.
• Jobs/Unemployed - Pay too low/Too few jobs.
• Economy - Serves owners, not workers hence not

SOCIETY.
From this set, a key area of concern is lack of security. The
main problem is that society does not have any contracts that
make us safe or in any way ensure that all individuals will be
able to have enough to get their needs met. Short of
39
developing such a contract, all that can be done is to apply
more bandaids. The real problem is caused because we don't
have an economic system that we as a society are committed
to ensure works for all of the individuals in the country. We
haven't made the determination that every family is worth
whatever it takes to get that family’s needs met. Orders of
magnitude difference in worth don't make any sense,
regardless of the nature of the work! People are people. They
all have so many hours per week. Differences in skills and
abilities don't justify great differences in compensation --
especially when many of those differences were biological to
begin with.
If we started to address issues like this, we could truly get
people involved. Further, if the vote were done via an
electronically connected public, the masses would truly be
able to speak. The legislators would then have a directive
from the people for massive change.
For most of the problems, the best approach is to find the
best and the brightest people with interest in the problem to
work it.
However, the group must include innovative thinkers that
can bring in new ideas for massive change. The key factor in
each of these problems is that massive change has resulted in
systems that are unable to meet the new needs in a balanced
way. There have to be answers that don't require a massive
influx of money.
The greatest resource any country has is its people. We must
care for these great resources, every one of them. Each is
unique, and we can't afford to waste the potential fruits of a
lifetime of output from anyone. Maybe the pendulum has
swung too far toward individual liberty. We've become so lax
spiritually that we have no moral basis to society. Perhaps
our forefathers were wrong about the separation of church
and state. That may have been OK when nearly everyone had
40
a strong religious life as well. In this day and age that is not
the case, however.
It seems that right functioning of society requires a spiritual
component. If the religious community cannot provide this
effectively, then maybe it's time for the state to step in. The
bottom line is that society cannot function effectively
without a strong moral basis. If this is not being taught in the
home or in any religious setting that children are exposed to,
then there is something critical missing in the very
foundation of peoples beliefs about how they live among
others. This must be remedied before problems can be
addressed effectively.
Actually, what I'm talking about here is the re-creation of a
society, not a government. Our problems are really society
problems; and, it is not clear that the government is
empowered to address or to fix these problems. Our
founding fathers left a provision for this in our constitution.
Maybe the time has come for a new constitutional
convention, one that is empowered to create a new form of
government for a society different in many ways from that of
our forefathers. It's been over two centuries since they met.
Perhaps it's time to once again arrange a meeting of some of
the best minds in the country.
As before, they too should come with a firm metaphysical
background, perhaps from some of the same mystery schools
but from others as well. In any event, they should have
strong intuitions and right brain skills and should definitely
include women. The answers will not come from a collection
of lawyers. Rather, it should come from an assortment of
individuals of various economic stations and various jobs.
After all, reading is not such a rare skill these days -- even
though it may be rarely practiced. Access to the proper
materials is not confined to the wealthy, but stretches to any
who have the dedication and interest to search. Many good
metaphysical books have appeared in the last 30 years. The
41
increasingly rapid rate of change has only really manifest in
the last 50 years with the greatest part of that in the last 20
years. The key people needed to make this work successfully
will have focused much of their energies over the past 20-30
years toward knowing their self and will have begun to apply
their knowledge for the betterment of society, either in
physical terms or in terms of visions of what society could be
in the future.
Yes, it is time for such a convention. However, it is not clear
that people are convinced that massive social change is the
only solution to the major problems we face; nor is it likely
that they would give a group such as this the responsibility
for determining the course of such change. Further, we are
talking about change at a level where no current organization
has responsibility. What we are attempting to create is a
social constitution, not a governmental one. Though such a
social constitution will define a much clearer agenda for the
government as well. Fixing key problems, however, will
involve an economic agenda as well -- and this will require
enlisting the cooperation of those who control the companies
in many areas as well as those individuals who control the
world's wealth. Then again, perhaps it is the way they've
made decisions and exercised their power that helped to get
us into these problems in the first place; so, it may be time to
relieve these individuals of their power and give it back to
officials selected and empowered by the people. Because the
government serves the people, regulatory legislation may be
sufficient to encourage cooperation. Where this doesn't work,
it may be necessary to use market pressure as well. We'll deal
with the economy in a later chapter, however.
Challenges of Government in the New Age
The challenges of government in the new age are no different
than the challenges of any group of organization that is faced
with dealing with massive change on a variety of levels.
However, government is seeing the brunt of this change first,
42
forcing it to lead the way. In the following, we'll address
some of the key challenges and suggest ways of overcoming
them.
Lack of an Equal Enemy, What Do We Do Now?
With the former Soviet Union crumbled, we no longer have
an enemy that is equal to us. The Cold War is over; it should
no longer guide our behavior and decisions. For nearly 50
years one of the key factors driving our priorities for funding
was the issue of national security. While this is still
important, it is nowhere near as important as it had been for
so long. Military power is no longer a major consideration.
Yes, there are still nuclear arms to consider. These should
come under treaty agreements quickly, and where possible
these weapons should be eliminated to get rid of the threat
they impose. Policies from the top down should be
reexamined and modified as required to conform with the
present state of the world. Every major defense system
should be reexamined to determine if it is truly needed.
Military forces should be scaled back to essential minimums.
Similarly government bureaucracies should undergo the
same scrutiny. Those that oversee defense work or that were
involved in all the intelligence aspects related to evaluating
enemy capabilities should be scaled back as well.
Economic Wars Replace Conventional War
This is a tougher area to deal with. In general, we have a
laissez faire attitude toward business in this country. Free
enterprise and the American Dream are idealized and nearly
worshiped. We are not really prepared to treat business as
war as the Japanese and some of our other competitors.
However, we do have one powerful weapon -- our market for
goods and services.
With a population of over 250 million highly affluent
consumers, we are in a position to make or break economies
of other nations.
43
Conventional wars may break out here or there, but
increasingly these will not be necessary as a way for settling
arguments or disagreements. At some point, the people of the
world need to realize that aggression towards others is
unacceptable behavior that will not be tolerated by the
United Nations. Initially, force may be needed to teach this
lesson; but, that is not the most effective way in the long run.
People need to see the positive benefits of cooperation and
belonging to a new world order. This requires that they be
treated fairly and respected as well.
It is not clear that we want to engage in economic wars
either. Prior to entering free trade agreements that allow us to
compete in other markets, we should probably take a hard
look at the costs, benefits, and consequences of such
activities. We need to decide what place economics has in
our society and whether we truly want to open our market to
the world. At some point, we need to realize that an economy
must reach some sort of balance in order to prevent various
types of problems. We need to make sure that whatever
strategy we adopt allows for a state of balance. This is an
issue for the United Nations as well. Somehow, a world
economy needs to be achieved that is fair to the member
nations. This will definitely require some payment or
compensation for past sins, so to speak. Developed nations
have taken advantage of developing nations for a long time.
Such behavior can no longer be tolerated. Interactions must
be conducted fairly and equitably. This requires more than
just getting both parties to agree to the terms of a contract.
Another consideration is that we may not truly be in a
position to compete, not because our workers are not good
enough, but because they are not hungry enough and do not
realize the true will and motivation of our competition. Also,
we need to examine whether such competition is really good
for society. There is some value to competition, but there is
also a cost. It is not yet clear under what circumstances the
benefits exceed the cost.
44
Moving Towards a New World Order
Because the population has grown to a level where planetary
limits have been reached, nations are no longer isolated from
one another. In many areas, such as ecology, what one nation
does impacts its neighbors at the very least, and in some
cases may impact the entire world. It is becoming
increasingly important for the United Nations to step up as a
new united world order. One of the key roles for government
in the next few years is to decide and get agreement on what
role we as a country are to play in this new order. It is
important that we cooperate and work in good faith, doing as
much as we can to ensure that all nations get a fair deal in
whatever negotiations and agreements take place. To prepare
for this, we need to set ourself up as a prototype for the new
world -- adjusting our government in a manner that aligns us
with the principles to be established in the new age.
Our forefathers set us on a course for setting the foundation
for a New Order of the Ages. We have not completed that
foundation yet, or we would not have all of the problems we
currently face. It is time we get our best and brightest
together to decide what kind of an order is needed and what
it will take to bring it about. If a transition plan is already in
the works, it should be made known. If it does not exist, then
it should be the highest priority task for the government.
Actually, it should be the highest priority task for the society,
and it should not be assumed that those in the government at
the present time are the right people for the task. In fact, it
may be that key individuals from other countries should be
invited to participate. This country is to create the prototype
for a world order as part of our destiny, but this is a prototype
for a world order -- so, the best and brightest social thinkers
on the planet should be convened.
Keeping a High Wage Society Employed
This gets back to the economy issue again. Unfortunately,
one of the assumptions of our present economy is that
45
consumers must pay full price for services and goods and the
price is set by whatever the market will bear. We have no
concepts about fair prices or a real worth of goods or
services. An hour worth of time is worth $4 to $1,000,000
plus depending on what is done. In other countries, this can
be far less. On average, the wage is about $10-15 per hour.
The bulk of the spectrum is from minimum wage $6 to $60,
an order of magnitude difference. The higher wages typically
require increased education and responsibility.
With defense and government downsizing, large numbers of
relatively well-paid professionals are finding themselves out
of work with no similar jobs in industry available to employ
them. The private sector has no plan for growth, since most
of it is based on the market sector and with no real growth in
wages and no increase in market, there is no room for
additional goods and services unless they can compete with
other products or services. Because of this we see
unemployment up to nearly 10% in California, with no
improvement projected in the future.
The fact that our wages are high also makes it more difficult
to compete against other countries, especially for doing any
work requiring manual labor. Our education problems have
resulted in lower math and science skills and fewer graduates
with technical degrees making it tough to compete in high
technology work. Further, many people decide on what to
study based on the income level and job potential of the
degree they pursue. Under more ideal conditions, people
would pursue what they are best at -- and be employed to use
their skills and talents, thus resulting in high motivation,
satisfaction, and performance. When people are motivated
primarily by money, great inefficiencies enter the system.
The classic way for government to impact employment is to
generate legislation that opens markets, encourages growth,
or removes restrictions thus allowing industry new
opportunities. It is not clear that such actions will work in the
46
current environment. Industry thinks on too short of a time
scale in this country. Also, the profit motivation, and greed
cause inefficiencies that prevent a greater overall economic
priority.
Becoming Leaner and More Effective
Doing more with less. TQM is rampant. Al Gore's recent
Report on Reinventing Government goes a long way toward
understanding this and defining specific steps to make it so.
The bottom line is that we can empower workers to do more
so that the overall job is done better with fewer people.
Bureaucratic red-tape can be reduced and government
employees can deliver quality services that are focused on
the customers needs.
Along with this, it may be useful to redefine what
government does as well. The services provided by
government should be in line with what the people truly
need. It is not yet clear how best to determine what
government should do. The best way I can think of is to
derive the functions for government from the assessment of
what the New Order of the Ages will be.
Transitioning from Defense to Commercial Work
The government is already encouraging contractors to think
about how to transform Defense related work into
commercial work. Several contractors have actually found
commercial applications for parts of their work and even
developed and sold products. In general, however, it is
unlikely that this will work on a large scale. There just don't
appear to be enough customers, and defense contractors are
not used to having to compete in the commercial world.
If the role of government were suitably scoped, there is no
reason that such talents as those of designing weapons could
not be employed toward peaceful ends of working out
solutions to some of societies problems. In particular, they
47
could work on machines that make various tasks and
activities more efficient. They could also work on basic
technology required for longer term social change that is too
far in the future for commercial companies to address. Much
of the lasting benefits from defense work come from pushing
technology beyond the state of the art and being asked to do
things that cannot currently be done. This same attitude
could be applied to the needs and services provided within a
society as well. In particular, prototype communities could
be built to determine how best to establish infrastructures
that empower people to work and play effectively, and be
happy. This is not that different from setting up environments
and infrastructures that allow people to fight effectively.
Constraints are different, and the general environment is
more free, but the basic problem deals with optimizing
variables under a set of constraints. Similar thinking is
required to solve the two problems.
Flexibility: The Key to Dealing with Massive Change
Stay flexible! That's about the only way to deal with massive
change. Trust that we have the raw material to deal with
anything. After all, we have a destiny to achieve. We were
the nation set up to lead the world through the transition to a
new age. Our Founding Fathers knew what was in store.
They were there at the first birth. We now are at the threshold
of a second birth. God guides our endeavors, however. We
have what it takes to get us through. And, we will get
through it. How we do so, and what we experience in the
transition are dependent on our choices and actions in the
coming years. It can be easy or difficult. Literally, it is up to
us.
One thing is certain, there will be massive change. The
current problems in our country and in our world have to be
addressed by more then bandaids. Those that can be
corrected need to be fixed. For those that can't, we need to
recognize what we did that caused the problem and then take
48
responsibility and act in whatever manner possible to right
the situation.
We are on a roller coaster ride, it's best to sit back and enjoy
it. We will be safe through it all. It may get scary at times,
but that is only temporary. The focus should be on the
society in which we want to live. That is the final
destination. However, to get there we must first define what
it is. We need the dream of what that society is to be. It is
from the dream that it will be made so. Such is the nature of
reality creation.
The major driver for the government through all this should
be to stay focused on what the people need and to provide
whatever services are required effectively and efficiently.
The key is to put the customer first and do whatever it takes
to provide quality services. This will help ensure that the
people get what they truly need. Specific organizations
should be restructured whenever necessary to allow them to
provide their services better.
Personal Choices and Options
You have a brain and a voice. Let your government know
what is right and what is wrong at every level in which you
interact with it. Don't tolerate mediocre service, demand to
be treated with respect and provided with the quality services
that you are paying for through your taxes. These people are
employed by you to serve you. They are not slaves, however.
They deserve to be treated with respect as professionals as
well. Are there services that are not provided that could help
many people. If so, write down your ideas and send them to
your congressperson. Also, share your ideas with others and
have them do the same.
On a social level, look at the society that you are part of on a
local level. Is it as supportive as you would like? If not, how
would you change it? Who would you live around? What
49
kind of a contract would you establish for the mutual benefit
of your local society?
Everything in our experience is a reflection of a part of
ourself back to us. The best way to handle problems is to fix
them in the source, not in the reflection. Think about how
what you believe and what you do result in what you see,
and take responsibility for your part in it. No, you did not
create it all, but, you participated in its creation in some
manner. Trust your inner self to move you in the way that is
proper for the time and circumstance. Follow the promptings
of your soul -- do what comes from your heart. We,
collectively, create our reality. At the moment, we're doing a
less than spectacular job, but that can all be fixed in a
heartbeat. All it takes is alignment, realizing that there is a
whole that we are in the process of creating that is much
greater than any one of us. That creative unity can do far
more than any of us could hope to achieve. However, unity
requires a submission of the individual will, to the higher
will of the entire entity. Note, I specifically did not say
"common" will. This is not a matter of democracy. The entity
created through uniting the group will be One -- it will be the
collective "We", yet more than that at the same time. The
synergy factor comes into play in these situations, and a new
level of consciousness is allowed to enter the world in
physical form. Further evolution will be guided by the
expression of this new consciousness.
What One Individual Can Do!
Each individual can only do whatever their personal vision,
abilities, and talents allow them to do. As a minimum, each
should do whatever their inner voice directs them to do:
• If you see a hungry person and are moved by it, give
the person some food. I've noticed several outside of
grocery stores lately. It's a simple thing to buy an
additional piece of fruit or loaf of bread. If many of
50
us did this there wouldn't be any hungry people
around.
• If you see a homeless person and are moved to help,
do what you can. Advise them as to where the nearest
shelter is, take them there, or take them into your
own home if such feels right to you. You might also
write a letter to the local government voicing what
you feel about the situation and telling them what you
want to be done about it.
• If you see a jobless person and are moved to help,
find some work they can do in exchange for getting
some of their basic needs met. Food, shelter, and
clothing require funds to acquire -- and a significant
amount of funds at that.
No, you aren't responsible for any of these situations of
others. However, you are responsible to act as your soul
dictates when you find that these situations confront you
directly. They wouldn't have entered your experience if there
wasn't some reason they needed to be there. There are no
accidents. We see that which we need to see.
As to the future, dream of what could be, beyond limitation,
beyond imagination. Focus on those areas that are most
interesting to you and imagine the new world as clearly as
you can, knowing that the intensity of your imagination will
help to make it so. Think on as global of a level as is possible
for you, then act locally in a manner consistent with you
vision. "Think global, act local". Try it! It definitely works.
You are not a powerless individual in the face of a huge
government bureaucracy. You are a part owner that pays for
the entire government to work for us. It's not us against them,
it's us helping us. The U.S. is really us.
51
CHAPTER 4
TOWARDS A NEW WORLD ORDER

The coming years will move us closer and closer towards a
new world order that embraces the entire planet. This order
was set in motion by our founding fathers in accord with
God's Plan for the evolution of consciousness on this
world. It took over two hundred years from that beginning
in 1776 to reach a state where we are ready to embark on
an even greater journey. The United States is a nation of
immigrants who come from all corners of the globe. This is
as it was meant to be, for only out of such a nation can the
tolerance for diversity arise that is needed to give rise to a
United World. It is time for all to learn of the great power
that comes from uniting together for a common enterprise.
Synergy is a magic form of spiritual energy that arises in
all such endeavors. Such is what makes villages, cities,
states, and countries hold together for ages. Such is what
makes some small groups able to accomplish what more
loosely coupled larger groups have failed to achieve.
The Global Family
At some level, we are all one -- however, it may be awhile
before we fully realize it. At a more understandable level we
are the Family of Man. We are one family that spans the
globe, or at least the inhabitable parts thereof. We don't act
much like a family, however. We clearly don't treat each
other with respect as brethren. At a spiritual level we are all
spirits expressed in flesh. We all possess divine sparks of our
creator. We are gods in becoming, all of us -- yet we don't act
like it most of the time. There is a saying in India, "namaste";
it means "I bow to the spirit within you". Such a nice saying,
and so true. It would serve the entire Family of Man very
well if we we're to treat one another with the respect that
such an utterance demands. We would see troubles,
problems, and disagreements disappear in a heartbeat.
52
Clearly we live on a single globe, spaceship Earth. On many
fronts, we are truly seeing how close we really are to one
another. Our backyards have reached the fences of our
neighbors, and there is no place else to grow. One thing
seems clear. United we stand on this planet as brethren, or
united we shall fall. Many common problems now impact all
of us, because they impact the very support systems of the
planet itself. Throughout nature, life is precariously
balanced. Systems operate in very tight tolerances in very
narrow bands. The cooperation of a vast network ensures that
each being gets what it needs to exist. There is some
adaptability, but it is generally within well-understood
regions. Man is the only animal that behaves counter to the
natural order. We believe it is right to adapt our environment
to our liking without much consideration of the impacts to
other beings, be they human or not.
We are the only intelligent beings who allow our numbers to
grow virtually unchecked only to die of thirst, hunger, or
disease of some type. It is time to educate our brethren that
such is not the way. There are alternatives and choices, but
these are not necessarily available to everyone. Part of the
problem is that we typically do not establish responsibilities
for one another. Our focus in the West has been personal
responsibility. The rise of the individual and the fall of the
family happened concurrently. We've lost our sense of
balance in the process. Family at one time was the place in
which we experienced community. Extended families were
common in this country until the past 40 years or so.
Churches extended this even more with groups of families
coming together and caring for each other when necessary.
At that time, this country was a much nicer and safer place to
live primarily because of a shared set of social values. We
now have two generations of individuals without this
common background.
It will be tough to extend our hands to members of our
global family without this background. Somehow, within the
53
next few years, the pendulum must shift from this excessive
focus on the individual to the creation of groups or families
of individuals cooperatively interdependent on one another.
We see the need for this even in our gangs. Where kids face
tough conditions and lack a family or social environment that
can help, they create their own social structures operating
under whatever rules they see as necessary for their survival.
Unless society provides them with an alternative, we literally
give them no choice. We create our reality both by what we
do and what we don't do. When we allow conditions to exist
and persist that allow the needs of individuals to be
neglected, we all suffer. How long will we sit back and do
nothing?
This applies on a global scale as well. This is not a survival
of the fittest scenario, when the strong can overcome the
weak. As humans, we are above the basic laws of nature. We
are divine creature -- at least in potential. We were created
equal, every one of us. We are one family of human beings,
one global family. Such is reality. It is time to wake up and
start acting like the equal brethren that we truly are.
Dealing with Questions of Equality
Being created equal puts an interesting twist on everything.
The issue of equality will be one of the toughest things for
the builders of the new world order to address and resolve. It
will require developed and developing nations to come to
balance with each other. Balance involves more than
agreement, it involves equitable and fair treatment not only
in the present, but to compensate for past history as well.
This will be a very touchy issue. The developed nations are
used to a standard of living that will not work for all the
world. It is very hard to see how this is fair, though many in
the developed nations would believe it to be their right. The
question is one of entitlement to resources. This brings up
the greater issue of ownership and entitlement to any types
of property at all. The American Indians were right after all,
54
owning of land is not consistent with nature. One has right to
use, but not to own. With the right to use, comes the
responsibility of stewardship. Is it fair then to consider that
one is entitled to do what one wants with any natural
resources on the land that one occupies? My heart answers
no. Society should be responsible for the fair distribution of
resources. This society should extend beyond the boundaries
of countries. All inhabitants of the planet have a right to its
abundance and its resources. However, here too, rights have
their corresponding responsibilities. All people have the
responsibility to treat the Earth with respect, and to treat their
brethren with respect as well. Growing in population at high
rates when the living conditions of the society are barely
tolerable to begin with is not fulfilling this responsibility.
However, churches that create belief systems that cause some
of this behavior are equally to blame and should be held
accountable. It's no wonder that religion is such a mockery of
spirituality these days.
With the intermeshing of individual will, economics, the
church, and the state one thing is certain; the problems will
be difficult to unravel. At some point, we need to step up to
the fact that we are one world of equals -- nothing else
matters. What got us to our present state of differences has
no import. What matters is how we get to where we need to
be, ONE WORLD. We can only act HERE and NOW. That
is the only point that truly matters. Also, it will be difficult
getting the world to agree to equality if we haven't first got
our own country to that point. This is the old problem of the
haves and the have nots. The haves want to keep what they
have. Somehow, there has to be a way of giving everyone
what they need.
This may require careful education of people concerning
what they need.
Priorities for a New World
55
• Health is the number one priority. On it rides
everything else. The body is the temple for the spirit.
It must be kept in the best health possible to give
spirit the optimum vehicle through which to do its
works. Along with this goes whatever is necessary to
optimize the health care systems and wipe out
various diseases.
• Population control is a close second. The planet
cannot accommodate what we currently have let
alone any additional bodies. Birth control should be
mandatory throughout the planet.
Both the religious and educational systems should
teach of our responsibility to the planet and to society
of not bringing in more bodies than the Earth and
society can handle.
• Education is number three. This should be free, and
should provide each being with what it needs to
develop its talents and abilities so that it can achieve
its purpose. Each individual comes with a purpose.
Counselors should be employed to identify the
specific needs of each individual. Since education is
the most important element of any society, it should
be given the greatest resources and effort. Nothing
should be spared. People are society's greatest
resource. Their education is critical to their effective
functioning.
• Economic reform is the fourth priority. Resources
must be treated as the property of all -- not something
owned that can be bought and sold. Those who
require resources for the production of goods should
in turn ensure that the society receives appropriate
compensation or benefits for those resources. This
might be by paying a fair price, by conducting
business in a better manner, or by producing specific
goods that society desires. In addition, a fair and
56
equitable way of establishing compensation for
individuals should be generated. Everyone must be
part of the system, perhaps using some sort of
voucher system where individual accounts are
credited whenever they do work that benefits society
and debited when they use services of society. Many
types of work benefit society. It may be best,
however, to establish a set price per hour as the value
of all work, especially if society foots the bill for any
education required.
• Ecology is number five, though numbers two and
four impact it as well. We have to quit destroying the
natural systems on our planet and do whatever we
can to restore the damage that has already been done.
This involves educating people and structuring
economies so that there is no economic incentive to
do further damage. In addition, it requires resources
to study, experiment, and find solutions for some of
the present ecological problems. We'll explore this
more in the next section.
Stewardship of the Planet
One of mankind's key responsibilities is to be the stewards of
this planet. We were given dominion of the animal and
vegetable kingdoms because we were the sons and daughters
of All That Is. Stewardship, however, brings a strong element
of responsibility as well. We are to care for these kingdoms
and treat them with reverence and respect. For the most part,
we have neglected our responsibility and used our dominion
to take whatever we wanted without regard for the
consequences. Further, we have grown our own population
to levels that many believe are beyond the abilities of the
resources of the Earth to handle. We made our choices, now
we have to live with the consequences -- whether we like
them or not. For some systems, however, it may not be too
late. We need to do whatever we can to right the damage
57
we've done. At the very least, we should stop practices that
result in further damage as quickly as possible. We are
responsible for our actions, all of us. Further, it is not enough
to do things at home in our own country. We need to make
sure that others have strong reasons and motivation for
taking responsible action as well. Much that affects our local
ecosystem affects that of the whole planet. There is a web of
life that is intricately woven. It does not separate itself into
pieces rather it operates as a whole -- much as we should
operate as a society.
The polluted oceans and seas, the polluted skies and
depletion of the ozone layer, the dying trees and cutting
down of the rainforests, the many endangered species, acid
rain and the pollution of our groundwater -- all of these are
due to our own neglect of our responsibility as caretakers.
We've allowed our greed to influence our decisions and we
idly sit by and watch as many a developing nation makes the
same foolish decisions that we did. This is stupid, no
criminal! The United Nations should ensure that we as a
body of nations are smart and learn from our mistakes.
Further, we should not encourage and support nations who
make such decisions.
First Steps
The United Nations already exists and there is talk of a New
World Order. If this new order is to be a body of countries,
then it is time for countries to start growing up and behaving
responsibly toward one another. The basic way to implement
this is by deciding on how countries are expected to behave
toward one another under the new order, to educate countries
on what is expected of them, and then to monitor behavior
and reward or punish it as appropriate. Many countries still
act as children and should be treated accordingly. Those
countries that have reached adult phase should know better,
so their punishment for violating the rules should be all the
more severe.
58
So long as we have national boundaries, and ownership of
resources within those boundaries, it will be difficult to deal
with issues of wealth and equality. Basically, the wealth of
many nations is determined to a large degree by the natural
resources that they sit on. This is mitigated somewhat by the
technology and industry of each nation's people as well. This
has to change.
Many ecological problems are driven by economic
incentives that developed nations can impact by changing
their import practices. In addition, if nations are asked not to
cut their forests for the sake of the global ecology, then these
same nations should be offered economic incentives in
exchange. It is not fair that the developed nations could
engage in the same economic practices years ago that they
forbid of nations now.
At some point, it becomes necessary to get rid of national
boundaries and national rights as well. The bottom line is
that We are ONE people, UNITED EARTH. We are equal
members of one whole and separation into countries only
gets in the way. The body organizes by function, not by
nation. Similarly, the ONE body of humans should somehow
organize and operate by function as well. With our
technology, however, we can easily link parts that are
geographically separated so that they function together.
The best path for growth may be one led by the United
States. If we can unite as one and dissolve state governments
in the process, this can set a precedent for dissolving lower
level autonomous governments. What works for the country
could be the prototype for what works for the world. This
requires a definite rethinking of a lot of issues. The United
States is really a relatively loose federation of states agreeing
to support a common entity to take care of their common
needs in particular areas. The United Nations is the same
thing except that the individual member nations give up even
less of their individual power to the whole. In both cases,
59
how much power is given to the common body is an issue of
trust in a higher authority versus individual autonomy. This
same battle occurs in the case of the individual versus
society.
The overall VISION is to build a world where people are
much more elegantly applied to meet the needs of humanity
for goods and services in a manner that also allows us to
meet our obligation as stewards of the Earth. People will get
more of their needs met sooner and will enjoy what the do
because it is in line with their talents and abilities. Further no
ones talents and abilities will be wasted. People will
cooperate in activities and lessons learned will be made
available to others to prevent making mistakes over and over.
Overall, humanity will progress quickly and souls will be as
fully enfleshed as is possible at this time on this planet.
Under these conditions, there is no telling what can be
accomplished how quickly.
60
CHAPTER 5
SPIRITUALLY DRIVEN ECONOMICS

As you probably know by now, this is one of my hot areas.
Nothing gets to me more than waste, inefficiency, ugliness,
and lack of spirituality; and, economics more than any
other area suffers from this. The bottom line is that the
economic system should support we the society much better
than it does. There are some basic flaws that need to be
exposed and fixed. The economy should serve and facilitate
our lives not govern them. Jobs should be tailored to people
not the other way around.
Spiritual Economy 101
For a more complete coverage of issues related to Wealth, I
encourage you to read Unlimited Wealth by Paul Zane Pilzer.
It's outstanding. The views that follow are my own, however,
not necessarily taken from others. My largest complaint is
that the way economics is practiced is for the most part
devoid of spirituality. This is largely because of flaws at the
very basis of free enterprise and free market economies. The
key to economics is how to get dollars now to make more
dollars later, profits! In particular, in a free market, the value
of a good or service is whatever the market will bear. The
cost of labor is whatever the laborers and the employers can
agree on since these are services provided by the laborer to
the employer.
Where services are rare or special, the price generally goes
up, in some cases astronomically. What is overlooked, is that
we the people end up paying for it all in the long run -- the
goods, the services, the costs of everything -- we the
consumers pay all the bills. Unlike the case of the
government, however, we have little control over the owners
and companies that make up the bulk of the private sector
economy. The only vote most people have is with their
pocketbooks -- to buy or not to buy. And, of course, the
61
encouragement has been to buy and buy big. As a result, we
have one of the biggest consumer societies in the world.
Other countries from around the world work extremely hard
to get into and establish a sustaining base in our market and
until recently, we received their goods gladly.
If humans are created equal, however, then their labor should
be relatively equal as well. One should not receive better
compensation than another simply because skills or talents
are different. A job is a job, requiring an individuals focus for
a determined length of time.
Money as the Medium for Exchange of Goods and Services
Money is simply a medium for exchanging goods and
services. This prevents having to barter with a number of
different individuals for the goods and services that one
needs. It would be very useful to evolve to a credit/debit
account per person where credits would accrue for any goods
and services provided and debits would be deducted for any
goods and services consumed. This could be done in a
manner that allowed some borrowing, but such cases should
be monitored by appropriate counselors who can ensure that
the appropriate help, education, or other services is provided,
if required. At some point, people should be responsible for
policing themselves so that they acquire what they need and
put in a fair amount of service in exchange. Until people are
trustworthy, however, they will need such a credit/debit
monitoring system to help in curbing their needs for goods
and services. After individuals have reached heightened
levels of spirituality, the credit/debit account would only
need to apply to goods or services that were not freely
provided in their immediate community.
What goods and services are to be available deserves
discussion. We're used to a free market that allows an ever
increasing array of goods and services to be available. It is
not clear however that this array has any guidance or control
other than the questions of whether a suitable portion of the
62
population will buy it. We further blur the situation by
allowing advertisers to hit a suggestible, sometimes gullible
public with a barrage of commercials that affect the
individuals on several levels. This is not a fair way for
advertisers to operate. It is legal, yes. However, it is not
ethical when one is using a variety of psychological
techniques that the individuals have not been trained to
counter.
It seems that there should be some sort of economic
guidance panel that represents the people and serves as a
central point for evaluation of new goods and services. Prior
to putting such goods out on the open market, test
evaluations should be done to ensure these are worth
committing resources to. If it is decided that particular
products or services are of benefit to society, then the scale
of distribution should be decided as well -- limited-
competitive, unlimited-competitive, limited-needed,
unlimited-needed. In general, goods/services that address
wants should compete against other such goods/services
while goods/services that address needs should have
societies full backing to ensure that they are built or done in
a manner that is integrated and optimum. The desire is to get
the best product/service to those who need it in the most
efficient manner.
Economy as the Medium for Employing People
The economy is the medium for employing people so that
they can exchange their skills and services for the money the
need to buy the goods and services they need. Because
everybody must have their needs met, it is only rational that
everyone should be employed. What all these people might
be doing will be addressed later. The bottom line is that there
is enough work in society for everyone to be doing
something that is useful and beneficial.
If the private sector cannot provide sufficient jobs then the
public sector can. If necessary, a completely public sector
63
economy could work so long as the goods and services
needed by society were understood and were produced or
provided by appropriate public sector agencies and plants.
Further, if people were treated as the owners of the plants
they work at, there would be much better quality assurance
and motivation than typically occurs in the private sector.
It is useful to consider the economy in a few sectors: a
private sector that addresses wants, a private sector that
addresses needs, and a public sector that addresses needs. At
some point, as the society evolves, needs and wants should
become one. When spirit is fully enfleshed, whatever it
desires is a need for its further expression.
People Should be Paid Whatever is Required to Meet Their
Needs
The bottom line is that the social contract is to provide
individuals with what they need in exchange for them giving
society the best that they have to offer. Since money gives
people the freedom to buy what they need, they should be
given a sufficient amount to meet their needs. In the present
economy, this also gives them the freedom to buy what they
want at the cost of one or more of their needs. Until people
are educated properly, this will need to be treated as a
teaching area as well. People must learn the difference
between wants and needs. At the same time -- during some
transition period they should have the opportunity to earn
additional income as well that allows them to satisfy
emotional attachments to wants. It will be useful to monitor
consumption and provide appropriate guidance while this
retraining is on-going. After all, much of the training that got
people into this position to begin with was do to action or
lack of action on the part of government anyway.
People Work Best When They Like What They're Doing
Each person on the planet came with a purpose and a unique
set of abilities and talents for achieving that purpose. The
64
greatest benefit to society comes from effective execution of
The Plan. This involves preparing and training the individual
in whatever way is needed to actualize their innate abilities
and talents and then employing the individual in an activity
that uses those skills in a manner that leads toward
fulfillment of the individual's purpose. It may take awhile for
the proper timing to unfold. However, during any interim
periods work should allow the individual to hone and further
develop their skills while doing their assigned tasks. The
bottom line is that people should be employed effectively,
and they will be most effective when they enjoy what they
do.
We may need to reconsider the way we design work. We
need to get away from assembly line kind of labor where we
employ large numbers of people to do relatively simple tasks
over and over again. This is not the kind of work fit for
humans to do. Machines have advanced enough to employ
them for such tasks. Similarly, bureaucracy where paperwork
is done in a similar manner should be eliminated as well. The
key consideration is to use people where you truly need
people. Use the right tool for the job.
If It's Worth Doing, It's Worth Doing Well
Everything that is done should be done well. After all, the
resulting goods and services are meant to be consumed by
us, the society. Whatever is done for society should be the
best that one can do. If everyone is committed to doing this,
the entire society benefits immensely with goods and
services that are the best in the world for addressing the
needs of society. Further there is an added benefit. If we are
truly building a new society that addresses all of the
physical, emotional, mental, and spiritual needs of
individuals; we will be producing a variety of new goods and
services for which there will be no world competitors,
though there will potentially be a large world market. The
bottom line is that there is a great benefit in thinking
65
forward, and creating new goods and services of value - - we
don't necessarily have to compete at things that others can
do, we can use our unique innovation and creativity to do
new things and to come up with better ways to do the old.
Doing something well should be assessed at the holistic level
for the society as well. Our works should agree with whom
and what we are, spirit expressed in flesh.
It is Value, Not Cost That Is Important
Value is what something is worth. It may have little or
nothing to do with what it costs, though in general, cost and
worth should be related. Value is determined by what
something does for the consumer or purchaser. Market value
in the past has been defined as what the market (consumers)
were willing to pay.
For society, needs must be met on a mass scale, so
economies of scale can be taken advantage of to allow
needed goods and services to reach a large part of the public
at true cost. In general, cost involves materials, facilities,
labor, and distribution. The effort and resources that go into
the entire system should be proportional to the value of the
goods and services that come out. In particular, goods and
services of high value should also be of high quality.
Tradeoffs need to be made to determine what level of output
is acceptable for society. The bottom line is that we only
have so much resources so we have to optimize overall value
to cost ratios.
Anything Creative is of Value to Society
As spirits, we are here to express ourselves creatively.
Anything creative thus has value to society. Whatever we
express as individuals, we express as a whole as well.
Creativity must be actively encouraged. However, it can be
guided as well into channels or avenues that are sanctioned
by the society. Remember, mavericks have their value, also.
66
We need freethinkers who can come up with ideas that are
bold and new. We don't necessarily have to like them, but we
must respect the originality of the creator. Creativity,
anywhere, is the expression of spirit.
All great societies of the past have valued creativity --
primarily in the artists and architects, but also in literature
and other realms as well. One of the grand achievements of
our unprecedented individual freedom is a collective
creativity that astounds many of our rival economic
competitors. They have looked to us for years for new ideas
on many fronts. However, that same emphasis on individual
freedom has prevented us from effectively working in groups
to bring our ideas to the competitive market.
The Japanese in particular have exploited this weakness,
sending some of their best and brightest to the best American
Universities to study the latest research, then bringing it back
to apply it to the latest consumer products. They are masters
at this, nearly magicians in bringing ideas into reality as
products. This too requires a creativity of a slightly different
sort, an applied creativity that is as important as coming up
with the original idea.
Many People Work Better As Teams
True individualists are rare in this world. Some people have
the individual discipline, skills and talents, and motivation to
work alone; but most people work better with others around
them. Working as teams allow these people to mutually
benefit from each others talents and skills, allowing the team
to get things done that none of the individuals may do alone.
Further, if the team sets goals at the team and individual
levels, then strong motivation is provided for getting various
part of the job or task done. This works not only in the
workplace, but in school as well, where students may learn
as much from their fellow students as from class. In many
job areas, this also allows each individual to have a variety
of tasks -- reducing repetition and boredom. Further,
67
individual creativity is engaged to be on the lookout for ways
to improve anything about the tasks or the resulting products.
The net result is that synergy can arise in teams that truly
work together to achieve something. This synergy benefits
the whole endeavor, resulting in a great benefit to society as
well.
Market Economies Are Wasteful by Their Very Nature
Market economies are wasteful of resources. They can't help
it. Cost is the key factor. If resources are relatively cheap, it
doesn't pay to do anything to conserve them. It only pays to
worry about factors that impact profit. If waste reaches a
point where there is sufficient potential for doing something
to significantly reduce cost -- only then is it important. If
labor is being done in a foreign country where wages are
cheap than the waste involves human labor as well, since
tasks aren't optimized to reduce the labor involved as they
might have been.
Another area of waste is in the way goods are built and used
over time. From a manufacturers standpoint, the key task is
to produce and sell. For a consumer, the task is to acquire
and get value from a product. One key factor is turnover. If
everyone buys a stereo once in a lifetime, the stereo
manufacturers have a limited market compared to if they buy
one every five years or so. Manufacturers thus have an
incentive for designing in obsolescence into their products.
Each product that wears out or breaks after some warranty
duration becomes a potential new sell. Similarly, there is an
incentive for adding new features or making design changes
to encourage buyers to replace older items with newer ones.
A third area of waste is duplication of products. Many
companies create products that are very similar to each other.
These products then have to compete for our attention and
our dollars. Supposedly, this results in lower cost to us.
However, to compete, advertising is required that allows
68
each product, or at least each brand name, to get into our
awareness. In addition, the size of each production run is less
because several different similar products must be produced.
Both of these factors result in increased cost.
Much of this is tolerated only because the consumer never
has any real say in the process. The economy from a free
market standpoint provides a means for owners, investors,
and entrepreneurs to profit by producing and selling goods
and services to a body of people that have the means to
acquire such goods and services because they are employed
either by the government, by themselves, or by the private
sector owners. Part of the success of free enterprise came
when employees became paid well enough to acquire the
goods that they produced, thus increasing the potential
market for these goods.
Unfortunately, there have been relatively few controls on
advertising -- so, many things can be sold via association of
those things with other things to which good feelings are
already attached. Very little advertising is intellectual. If it
were, it would have little effect on the general public. What
moves us are the things that make us feel good, whatever
that might be for each of us. Typically, we don't receive any
training in this area, so the techniques of the advertisers go
unnoticed even though they control much of our buying
behavior.
The Use of Competition to Foster Innovation
Competition does have its utility as well. In particular,
competition can motivate competitors, driving them to do
more than they would have without the additional challenge.
However, in the current environment, the losers suffer
economically. Society wins in all such endeavors however, if
the lessons learned from the competitors are shared. It is
beneficial to know what works and what doesn't. Further, the
individuals involved grow from their participation hence are
more valuable for the next project. People should be
69
encouraged to group into strong teams with a breadth of
knowledge, experience, and skills that allows them to do a
wide range of work. Work that needs to be done or problems
that need to be solved should be broadcast so that groups can
apply for the jobs they are well suited for. Evaluations should
be done on a regular basis to provide feedback and to assure
appropriate resources are being applied to the job or
problem.
Competition also fosters innovation; by getting different
groups to tackle the job or problem in different ways,
different approaches yield different solutions. This is
extremely helpful to finding not just a solution, but a good
solution. Sharing of partial progress can benefit the entire
process as well, preventing wasted effort in doing things that
have already been done. The bottom line is to enjoy the
process -- and to engage people's talents and abilities as fully
as possible in the process. The end results do not matter. To a
large degree they are determined by the Plan. What matters is
that effort is applied to whatever is felt must be done by the
society. We must act in accord with our beliefs as a society.
Through consistent action in accord with our hearts the Plan
will unfold in all of it's magnificence. The goal is to do
always what is right, regardless of what the consequences
may be.
Feedback as Incentive to Guide Creative Expression
While all creative expression is valuable, some may be more
valuable to society than others. Feedback can be used as an
incentive to guide creative expression of individuals to be
more in-line with what the public likes or wants, especially
in those areas that are consumer oriented. However,
mavericks and lone wolfs are useful as well, and these will
express as their souls dictate -- sometimes regardless of what
others might think. As the society becomes freed to engage
in more artistic and creative endeavors, more and more effort
will be applied toward using this creative effort to move
70
people emotionally, intellectually, and spiritually. Also, it
will be found that teams of people can be even more
effective than individuals in inspiring and amusing others.
Laughter is a necessary ingredient for the health and
wellbeing of everyone. Play and fun is important as well.
Society is interested in anything that works, especially those
techniques that work well. Elegance is a prime directive for
spirit. It often appears to the mind as beauty, but a beauty
that comes from being designed in a perfect fashion for ones
function.
There is Plenty of Work for All to Do
In a society, there is always plenty of work for everyone to
do. It's only a matter of declaring it to be so and making it a
priority in our lives. There are always problems to be solved,
areas that can be improved, new services that can be
provided, and a host of things that people could be doing.
These provide the perfect opportunity for consuming any
available labor. There is no good reason why anyone who
wants to work should be unable to find employment so long
as society is plagued by major problems. This is particularly
important since employment is how society provides
individuals with the means for meeting their needs. One way
or another, society pays for those who are unemployed to get
at least their basic needs met -- whether through
unemployment insurance, charity, or increased crime. Why
not address this problem up front, and guarantee employment
to everyone that needs a job? My sense is that this will be far
cheaper in the long run and will also help to ensure that
several problems get addressed in the near term that would
otherwise have had to wait. Al Gore's report on Reinventing
Government already identified how government should work
-- so the raw pattern for structuring people into responsible
and empowered teams is already in place. It's up to "We, the
People" to decide what it is that we want government to do
for us. It seems the first priority is providing those services
that allow all of us to do more and do whatever we do better.
71
This is a problem/challenge that is of the greatest
importance. The bottom line is that if everyone does more
and does it better, society wins in a very big way. In addition,
the processes and methods we develop will give us a clear
advantage against our competitors, an advantage that can be
used to spread our prototype of cooperatively interdependent
community around the globe.
In the current economic system, we are far from employing
everyone. This is primarily because society does not yet
consider it to be society's duty to ensure that all of its
members are employed. This is our choice -- it can change in
a heartbeat. All we have to do is establish another arm of the
society or government that finds more effective ways to
build communities where all individuals are employed in
meeting the needs of one another. Living in such
communities would not require thousands of dollars per
month per family, hence might be cheaper than the cost of
keeping these people on the streets. We'll get to this in more
detail in a later chapter.
Everyone Can Do Something of Value
Each person has unique gifts and talents that can be used to
do something of value to society in some way. Individuals
are literally born with these abilities -- and all come with a
purpose for which these abilities are necessary. It is society's
responsibility to ensure that the individual is given the proper
training to actualize these gifts and talents in a way that
benefits both the individual and society. Every person is
important. We cannot afford to waste the abilities and talents
of anyone. Everyone is special and unique. Each has
something to offer that no other person can offer. We must
respect the uniqueness and sacredness of each individual and
realize how much society loses whenever these special
talents go unused.
Society Can Always Use More Services
72
People can always come up with additional services that
society can use, especially if they have been taught to value
and use their creative abilities. It is important to establish
some metric for the usefulness of something, however.
Where the benefit is obvious and the number of people
affected is large, this is easy to calculate. In other cases, may
not be so clear. It may be up to individuals or teams of
people to do preliminary work upfront on their own time to
show the potential of an idea prior to any strong backing or
funding from society. In such cases, where useful
knowledge, products, or services result; the people involved
should be rewarded for their initiative and dedicated work.
Wherever possible, society should encourage the
investigation of new ideas -- providing relevant guidance and
information where possible to prevent duplication or waste
of effort.
People Should Only Do Work That Requires Their Skills
People can be happy in any work that can be done with
dignity. Anything that is worthy of human labor can be
treated in this manner. Dignity is an attitude that the doer of
the work takes on in response to seeing the work treated with
respect. In the near term, there may be many tasks that
people must do because alternatives are simply too costly.
This will change as effort is applied to come up with ways to
do these tasks more elegantly.
Over the longer term, however, people should only do work
that truly requires the abilities and talents of people or work
that allows them to achieve some level of joy in
accomplishment. More and more, we'll see tasks that can be
accomplished with love. Where possible, future work should
be designed to accommodate people and should be optimized
for them. Unless absolutely required for some good reason,
people should not be expected to do work that was not
human engineered to provide the appropriate environment
for people to do that work effectively and elegantly.
73
The Right Job for Every Individual
Individuals should have the opportunity to select jobs that
are of their liking provided they have done their best in
developing their talents. Where possible, it is good to have
people like their work -- but this is not possible for society to
guarantee because it is up to the individual to set the attitude
within which they do their work. In general, work should be
aligned with skills and talents. However, there still may be
tasks that no one really likes. Where possible these should be
assigned as punishment or should be shared in a manner that
spreads the burden between many. A third alternative would
be to reward people who chose the added burden. The
overall goal should be to automate such tasks so that they
can be accomplished by machines rather than by people.
For special people with rare gifts and talents, extra effort
should be taken to ensure such gifts are employed for the
maximum benefit of society. Similarly, many other
individuals may be able to do many things. What they should
do is whatever they are most interested in that provides an
opportunity for their growth and their happiness. Where
possible, work should be fun and interesting. Further, it
should be challenging to the individual in some way.
Society benefits from enhanced productivity when people are
assigned to jobs for which they are well suited. This provides
maximum opportunity for job satisfaction and also for
challenge and productivity. Everyone wins when people
work better, smarter, and more effectively.
The Art of Maximizing Return On Investment
The bottom line in economics is always some sort of return
on investment. At the top level the investment is the capital
of the investors, the labor of people, and the resources
needed to produce products and services. The return is profit
to investors, wages to people, and goods and services to
whoever desires to consume them. The current system
74
focuses only on the profit that is returned on the capital
invested. This is a very shortsighted focus; it is definitely not
in society's best interest.
Society's return is in people earning the wages by which they
can buy the goods and services they need and want. For this
to work, several things must happen:
• The goods and services generated must be sufficient
to meet the needs of people and at least some of the
wants of people as well.
• People must receive adequate wages, after taxes, to
buy the things and services they need. It is even
better if they can buy some of the things and services
they want. A different way to state this is that prices
must be such that whatever is required to meet needs
is affordable to all people. Of course, since
individuals differ, their levels of needs are different.
If income is not sufficient to meet needs, society will
have to supplement income earned or otherwise
provide for any lack.
• All people that want to work should be employed.
Actually, all people should be employed or should
work in some manner, whether this be in the private
sector, in the government, or as a volunteer
associated with an agency or organization that
provides service. Where possible, people should be
employed in a manner so that they can support
meeting their own needs. Otherwise, society will
have to meet their needs in other ways.
People are a very valuable resource that should not be
wasted. Non-renewable resources should not be consumed
unless they have to be. Decisions to use such resources
should be made by the government in society's best interest;
and then, only after carefully weighing the cost versus the
75
benefits of whatever goods are generated. Environmental
factors should be considered as well.
Balance: The Key to Long Term Survival
The needs of society must be met. This requires some level
of consumption of resources and interaction with various
ecosystems. In addition, some of the wants of society must
be met to satisfy higher level drives such as the pursuit of
happiness. It does not matter that such things may not be
required for happiness. Wants in themselves are part of the
learning cycle and can move people to take whatever actions
are necessary to meet the wants. Individuals have a hard time
distinguishing between needs and wants so some level of
accommodating wants must be incorporated into the
economic system. Balance is the key, however. As a society,
we need to keep our consumption in check to ensure that we
don't needlessly waste resources or put any part of the Earths
environment in jeopardy. We need to do things in better
ways, to ensure that we don't harm the environment. If that
means that it takes longer to get something, or that it costs a
little bit more -- so be it. This may be a small price to pay in
the long term versus what the alternative might have given
us.
We need to do things in a manner that is not going to
detrimentally impact society now or in the future. We
probably should consider things in terms of at least five
generations, if not ten. Though, with the rate things are
changing, it's hard to think even five years ahead. We don't
have to let technology or science push us in ways that we are
not ready for. Technology has come a long way in the past 50
years, much further than the mass thinking has moved. It is
not clear that we are ready to accommodate more gadgets.
Hell, we haven't really assessed the impact of present ones.
All around we see signs of systems out of balance, pushed
beyond their means to cope. At some point, this has to stop.
We have to catch our breath, see where we are, evaluate if
76
this is really where we want to be, and then do whatever it
takes to alter our course in the direction of more balance.
This does not mean we have to be fixed and rigid, we can be
moving in a balanced manner as well. But, balance there
must be. Without it, our very survival comes into question. In
fact, it's not clear that we haven't overdone it already and
passed limits that we or our Earth cannot recover from, no
matter what we do. However, even if that were the case, it's
better to operate from right knowledge and take our actions
accordingly.
Fostering the Pursuit of Happiness
To pursue happiness, we have to have some clue of why we
are here in the first place. Happiness is a feeling-state of
being. It comes to us as a result of how we interpret what is
going on within and around us. For most of us, happiness is
temporary and fleeting -- and we never quite get a handle on
what causes it. The bottom line is that feeling-states are
choices that we make at some level, but the choice must be
consistent with our beliefs about happiness. The easiest way
to pursue happiness is by (1) finding out what we love to do
and doing it, and (2) getting to know ourselves as demanded
by all metaphysical teachings.
Ever Increasing Job Satisfaction
If we develop our abilities and talents and constantly pursue
work that uses these talents in creative and challenging ways,
we give ourselves a good shot towards pursuing happiness.
This should allow for ever increasing job satisfaction -- and
since our job occupies a large fraction of our time, job
satisfaction can lead to a greater degree of life satisfaction.
This doesn't guarantee happiness, nothing does; but, at least
it allows for it.
Creativity and Commitment to Purpose
77
The natural urge of the soul is to be creative. So, if we find
ways to express our innate creativity, whatever that might be,
we will be expressing more of whom that we truly are.
Further, if we can find our purpose for being and commit to
that purpose, we will find that our life falls into place and
things happen beautifully with a naturalness that is awesome
to behold. In this state of being, happiness is a by-product. It
is the sign that verifies that we are on the right path. The
pursuit of happiness then becomes a pursuit of purpose in
our lives. The times of happiness we encounter along the
way will tell us when we were engaging our true talents and
allowing our soul to be more fully enfleshed.
Multiple Concurrent Jobs in Varied Areas of Life
Each of us has multiple concurrent jobs, only some for which
we are paid. We have a job that we do to support ourselves
and our families, if any. Our primary job, however, is to learn
about ourselves. We also have jobs of providing service to
others in society. These others may be family, friends, or
strangers. Since we have many skills and talents, we need a
diversity of outlets for employing these skills and talents; no
one outlet is enough. Where possible, it is best to find outlets
that provide some service or benefit to others. However,
solitary pursuits are perfectly fine as well if they help to
make one happy.
78
CHAPTER 6
EDUCATION: WE ARE ALL TEACHERS, LEARNERS,

DOERS
Education is the most important activity in any society. It is
required by everyone, and should be actively encouraged
and pursued for the entire lifetime of each individual.
Further, it should be tailored to individual needs and
should be provided free of charge. Many problems in
society are the direct result of neglect in this area. A sick
education system is a sure sign that the society must either
change or die.
Education is the primary means through which knowledge,
skills, and wisdom are shared among people in the society.
Education has three facets: teaching, learning, and doing.
As young children, we are primarily learners and doers. But,
for the rest of our lives, we are always in the midst of all
three facets at the same time -- learning some things,
teaching some things, and practicing or doing some things.
Education is the means through which society discharges its
responsibility to each individual of providing that individual
with whatever is needed to develop the individual's unique
skills and talents. Of course, the individual has a
responsibility in this as well for education doesn't happen
unless the individual learner is an active participant.
Education is also the means through which society imparts to
its members the values necessary for society to function
harmoniously.
All four areas of an individual's life (physical, mental,
emotional, and spiritual) must be covered by the education
process, but there should be no set curriculum that everyone
must go through except at a very rudimentary level. One
exception is the spiritual area, where everyone needs a basic
understanding of who and what they are, and what society
expects from them. Nearly everything else should be tailored
79
to meet the individual's needs and interests. People learn
most effectively when they are interested in what they are
learning. Until they are self-motivated to learn something, it
is not worth wasting the effort to teach them.
Some of the kinds of things that education should cover in
each of the four major areas include:
• physical: motor skills, balance, coordination,
physiology, nutrition, massage, hand work
• mental:
o left: logic, memory, facts, cause/effect, math,

science, technology
o right: spatial orientation, intuition,
abstraction, creativity
• emotional: feelings, moods, psyche
• spiritual: morals, values, right behavior, nature of

being
Specifically what should be covered in each of the areas is
left to the experts. However, some useful guidance can and
will be provided for some of these areas.
As a society, we cannot afford to fail in our duty to educate.
However, we must realize that this is more than simply to
educate our youth through grades K-12. Education is, or
should be, a lifelong endeavor for every individual on the
planet. Education has three main roles (1) teaching
individuals how to learn, (2) imparting skills and
information, (3) creating environments for skill using by
individuals and in groups where appropriate.
Because our world is changing so rapidly, facts have limited
utility. Knowing how to learn has become extremely
important. The individual must learn constantly just to keep
80
up with changes both on the work and the home fronts.
Learning is now becoming a way of life, as it should be. The
education system will have to adapt and grow to
accommodate the need. However, more of the same will not
satisfy the need. The current system simply was not designed
to meet the educational needs of today. It is time for massive
change.
For one thing, we need some of the best and brightest minds
in the country involved in education. We can't necessarily
afford to take them from current tasks, but we may be able to
employ some of their time in a productive manner. One way
of doing this is as sort of a labor tax, where every individual
is required to provide a percentage of their time for the
education of others. The education infrastructure should
determine how to use that time for the greatest benefit to
society.
On Subjects: Reading, Writing, and Arithmetic ...
Basic motor skills should come first, followed by basic
communication skills. Reading, Speaking, and Writing come
second to mature the basic communications skills. Basic
number skills come third along with basic skills for
interacting with others, and basic creative or artistic skills.
Early activities should all involve a high degree of play.
Individuals should be allowed to progress at their own pace
and no set requirements should be imposed on the level to be
achieved. Each individual is unique, and should be treated as
so.
Once basic skills are learned to whatever level each
individual is capable of, the focus should be on teaching
different techniques for learning and helping each individual
to find and develop those techniques that are best for them.
We shouldn't teach in ways that force individuals to use
ineffective means for learning. Teaching and learning are two
components of the same process, they are not independent
81
activities. We don't want to waste the students time and risk
frustration. It's too easy for frustration to turn to disinterest.
A few subjects such as Rights, Liberties, Responsibilities,
Social Values, Great Thoughts, and Lifestyles should be
required so that individuals have a common basis for living
in society. Nearly everything else should be elective based on
the individuals interest and ability.
The Role of the Professional Teacher
The role of the professional teacher should be primarily one
of evaluator, organizer, facilitator, counselor, and guide. It is
the teacher's duty to help each student find and develop their
abilities and talents in line with their interests. This requires
helping each student to find out how they learn best and to
uncover what they are naturally interested in by exploring
various topics and skills and seeing how they do with them.
Success and failure is unimportant. Curiosity and willingness
to try new things are of greater value -- even then, there is
nothing wrong with an individual who finds an area they like
and pursues it to great depth. Interest will naturally take the
student to wherever they need to go. When done in the right
manner, learning is one of the most exciting activities that
there is. Children naturally like this state of being. It's only
when they are taught in a manner that is unsuited to them or
uninteresting to them that problems arise.
This is far from the case now. In many instances, the role of
teacher has been reduced to that of babysitter and
disciplinarian. Simply keeping order in the classroom has
become a major task, nearly an impossible one in some
neighborhoods. School is not the sanctuary of learning that it
should be. As a result, we all suffer from a variety of
problems that plague society today. Not all of this is due to
education, but a great deal of it is. This is not to blame
teachers -- they are doing the best they can within the way
the education system is set up. The major problem is that the
world has changed so rapidly. This has changed the nature of
82
the input to the process, the student who no longer has the
same moral and social training happening at home. Further,
the expected output is not clear either. There is no real
understanding of what skills are required to be a good,
happy, and productive member of society anymore.
The structure of schools have to change in drastic ways to
even begin to make things better. However, the first step is to
define what we really want education (K-12) to do in society.
Then the best and brightest educational thinkers should come
in and design whatever process is right for making it happen.
Human beings can do whatever is necessary to overcome
human problems. All it takes is focus and resolve
accompanied by a willingness to apply the best people to the
task. The best people are those with the skills, talent, and
commitment necessary to get the job done. Whatever society
focuses on we will get. It all comes down to focus, resources,
and resolve to do whatever it takes to do it right.
Educating the Individual as an Individual
Each individual is an individual and should be treated as
such. Means, averages, and norms do not have any place in a
system that is helping each individual to develop to whatever
that individual's potential is. It doesn't matter how one person
compares to another in the education process. It simply does
not matter. What is important is that each individual receive
exactly what is beneficial for their highest growth. This
should include some challenge and competition for
stimulation but this must not be overdone to the point of
driving individuals and potentially burning them out. The
learning pace should be moderate to fast, however, learning
should always be fun -- always!
To educate the individual in this manner, more resources
have to be applied to finding, testing and evaluating the
talents and skills of individuals. The individuals themselves
should be actively engaged in supporting this process by
reporting on what they are learning and what is fun or easy
83
for them vs what is more difficult. Difficult may be OK if the
individual is motivated by the challenge. Difficult is not OK
when it is overwhelming or starts leading to disinterest.
The chief motivation for learning should come from
counselors and individuals getting together to define overall
goals for particular periods of time such as monthly,
quarterly, and yearly. The two together should agree upon
what is to studied and learned during these times.
Substitutions should be allowed at any time based on the
agreement of counselor and individual. Meetings and
assessments should be frequent. The goal is to facilitate the
learning process for each individual by assuring that the right
resources, tasks, and activities are assigned at the most
optimal times within the overall constraints of the education
system. For many tasks, individuals may be guided by
facilitators, but they will be on their own to do the work until
they have questions. Much skill getting will come from
personalized interaction with computers. Similarly, much
factual information can be acquired in the same way.
Demonstrations and enactments may be useful as well, either
in movies or live. Skill using may take place in individual
activities or, more likely, in groups where many people can
use their skills together simultaneously.
It is extremely important that individuals learn group
interaction skills as well. In the times ahead, these skills are
critical to the very functioning of society and will be
essential to individual survival as well. Individuals will have
different preferences and methods for functioning in groups.
These must be respected. However, society is at a stage
where we are learning to find our connections with one
another so that we can become whole -- one. This places a
responsibility on each individual to find their place within
the puzzle and operate harmoniously. There is only one web
of life, and we are all within that web -- not caught in it like
a bug in a spiders web, but a strand of it that is tied to other
strands.
84
Equal Emphasis on Right and Left Brain
In the Aquarian Age, each individual will need to function
from their whole brain. This includes both the left and right
components in equal measure. Individual differences may
result in specific preferences, but each individual has two
sides of their brain, both of which are meant to be utilized in
this existence. Failure to operate in a manner that applies
both sides results in lower effectiveness and efficiency than
would be present when operating wholly. The individual
operates at less than their optimum and society loses as well.
The present education system has an extreme overemphasis
on left brain activities: thinking and logic, facts, causal
relationships, mathematics, science. Yes, these are useful in
the current world. They are not essential to life, however.
Many people are fine and happy without these things playing
a major role in their lives. Right brain skills are becoming
more and more important. Creativity, spatial relationships,
and intuition are all important to operating at peak levels of
performance. They are essential to a cooperatively
interdependent society that is focused on peace and harmony.
Art, music, dance, architecture, contemplation, meditation,
yoga, and any creative activities provide avenues for the use
of the right brain. Using the right brain is the best way to
develop it. The more one uses it, the better it becomes.
Several of the skills require some level of trust as well.
Metaphysics provides an abundance of techniques that can
be used in this area. I suspect that, by now, psychology has
many as well.
Individual versus Group Activities
The individual should be exposed to a variety of situations
that are representative of what that individual is likely to face
in life. Being confined to a group of one's peers in age is
clearly not representative of life.
85
Individual activities include such things as computer aided
instruction, reading, writing, computer programming,
problem solving, some sports, art, meditation. They all
require some type of individual focus or concentration to
accomplish.
Group activities allow one to do one's task in relationship to
others doing theirs. They provide an opportunity for working
on interpersonal skills and for experiencing an environment
similar to what one finds in the world. Group activities
include team sports, plays, historical reenactments, and
various group projects. Group projects should allow
individuals to use their skills to do something that
contributes to the whole. The main focus should be on
getting people to work together effectively while maintaining
an atmosphere in which each person is treated with respect.
The Teacher Appears When the Student is Ready
There is a principle in metaphysics that states:
• When the student is ready, the master will appear.
We need to make a similar pledge in our educational system.

Namely, that whenever there is a student ready to learn, then
society will find and provide the teacher necessary for the
student to learn. Actually, we may want to provide the
resources required which may or may not include a physical
teacher. In learning related to know thyself, this should
always be provided.
For other learning that an individual may desire, society
needs to weigh the benefit to be gained from this training
against the resources required. When individuals are
operating as spirit enfleshed, they will not ask for things or
be strongly motivated to learn anything that is not in line
with their purpose or the higher expression of their gifts and
talents -- so, in general, all requests for training should be
fulfilled upon assessment of the student truly being ready.
86
Learning as a Way of Life
Learning should be a way of life. Each individuals main job
on the planet is always to learn. This is true in every lifetime
we ever experience. Know Thyself! Such is the prime
directive to all of us. Since we can never complete this task,
it is with us for our entire lifetime. Given that this is so, it
only makes sense that the education system within society
should accommodate this need of every individual to learn
from the time they are born until the time they die.
People should be encouraged to learn whatever they want to
learn whether for work, hobby, or just plain fun. Further,
they should be given the opportunity to learn as well. The
education system should facilitate this process by providing
classes in a variety of areas of particular interest and benefit
to society as a whole. In addition, educational facilities
should be available for people on their own to conduct
classes of various types for others. These may be on anything
that private individuals are willing to teach that one or more
students want to learn.
Individuals should be given opportunities for job growth
commensurate with their skills, abilities, and interests. This
may require additional training or retraining to get the
individual to the level of competence required for the new
job. Counselors should monitor individuals to identify the
appropriate timing for these opportunities.
On the metaphysical side, a series of trainings and initiations
should be established that take people to various levels of
understanding of self. Many of these activities have been
done in secret societies for many thousands of years.
However, now we face the need for many to be trained
relatively quickly so that all of society, not just a select few,
is prepared for entering the Aquarian Age.
Teachers, Learners and Doers
87
We are all teachers, learners, and doers. I believe Richard
Bach said that in Illusions. He was right. We all help others
to learn, learn ourselves, and use what we've learned. It's a
natural part of living. We do all three all the time for all of
our lives. We may be particular about how or what we teach,
learn, or do. But, since we're all different, that's to be
expected.
All individuals should take it as their solemn duty to pass on
their knowledge to at least one other person. That means
everything that one knows. The goal is to ensure that
knowledge is enfleshed to the highest degree possible, and
that nothing is lost when it becomes time for an individual to
pass on for whatever reason. In addition, whenever it is felt
to be useful to pass on skill or knowledge to more than one
person the need should be made known so that the right
individuals can be identified for the training.
For society to function well, everyone must participate in the
education process both as learners and as teachers. Sharing
knowledge and helping others gain skills and develop natural
abilities is an obligation that each individual takes on to
some degree. People are the most important resource in
society. Self-actualized people are of extreme benefit to
society. The more such beings we have, the greater the
overall level of abundance, peace, and happiness for all.
Spiritual education is especially important since we want all
major decisions made for the good of all concerned.
It is in doing that the results of education are brought to
society. When people are using their highest skills and talents
in their work, society benefits in amazing ways -- especially
if individual creativity is activated. The creations of people
who love what they do are works with Heart -- works of
Love, the closest we can get to creating works of spirit or
god. The inspiration of such works can move the planet in
ways that are simply beyond imagination.
88
Just imagine the difference there would be in the world if
everyone were more productive and spent a significant part
of their free time learning new things and helping to teach
others. This does not necessarily have to cost anything. What
it requires is a commitment to service that starts with
education, the most critical function in society. Each
individual must accept their responsibility in fixing the
current educational problems. Paying one's taxes and
allowing the present system to continue to struggle is not
doing one's part. Paying more taxes won't fix the problem
either. What is needed is a decision by the people that makes
this problem of a high enough priority that individuals will
provide the time and ideas needed to come up with an
educational system that meets the demands of society in the
world today. We, collectively, must do whatever it takes to
fix things by figuring out how we can act locally to fix local
problems, and allow others doing the same to fix their
problems. The government can make sure that the best ideas
get shared across the country. Also, the government can
restructure the infrastructure so that it conforms with the best
methods for teaching and learning at this time in this country.
Overall, we want a lot more people involved in the education
process. The people that do things best are prime candidates
to serve as examples to others. They may or may not have
the skills to teach what they do. Here is where it is useful to
mix education professionals with masters of various skills to
come up with optimal strategies and materials for teaching.
Much research has already been done in this area. It is only a
matter of applying it to the skills that society needs and finds
important. With greater use of video, we can give many
access to the masters.
Suggestions Based on my Personal Experience
Read! I cannot emphasize this strongly enough. Reading has
been one of the main pleasures in my life. It is also one of
my chief sources of acquiring information. Further, it is one
89
of few activities that really require one to think and use one's
imagination. The high bandwidth of video makes watching
television and movies primarily a non-thinking experience
that is all consuming to the senses and emotions. This has its
value, but not when taken to excess. Television has primarily
become a means for escaping from reality. Books can be that
also. However, when books do this, at least they require
one's imagination to be actively engaged, thus allowing the
right brain to be exercised. Read because that is one of the
only ways to access particular information necessary to your
development as a whole being -- especially as a spiritual one.
Most of the books I've read are nonfiction, though you may
think them far from such if you choose to read them. On the
following pages I provide a recommended reading list that
includes the creme of the creme from the books that I have
read. The emphasis is primarily on books that have a
metaphysical content, since that is the area that most touches
the soul and the nature of reality creation. The greatest
religious texts of the world have not been included, primarily
because it is too hard to divorce such texts from the religious
organizations that thrive around them. I'd prefer to stay away
from religion. My belief is that the spiritual path by necessity
must be a personal one and I refuse to have any intermediary
between me and my maker. No one has granted to the church
any right or authority in spiritual matters. Individuals may
give their personal authority to such institutions as they
choose, but such is neither my choice nor my
recommendation to others. For society to function at its
optimum, each individual must operate as a spiritual being in
flesh. This can only happen when each individual has a
spiritual foundation established as part of that individuals
education. Education can only be responsible for part of this.
For the most part, education can only set the stage and
provide the right resources to facilitate learning. The
individual must do the rest by applying their focus, attention,
and abilities to the task of learning.
90
From my personal experience, for education past the eighth
grade, most of what is learned is determined by how
individuals apply themselves. I found that over 90% of what
I learned in high school and in college, I learned outside of
the classroom, or even the school setting. Most of the
material to be learned came from books, and it was up to me
to apply myself to the tasks at hand. Instructors and tutors
may have been available in college, but I never used them.
Even more interesting, is that all of the material that I have
found most important to my development as a spiritual being
in flesh came from outside of any formal education system.
None of it came from, or was recommended by, any person
or material associated with the educational institutions that
I've attended.
This is not surprising, however, since until the early 1980's,
many of these books were only to be found under the Occult
heading -- not a place frequented by folks who didn't want to
be considered weird. In the mid-80's, this softened to New
Age due to the heightened prominence of the work of many
associated with using the right brains to find more sane ways
of living. Now, Metaphysics is accepted as a large body of
knowledge that deals with things beyond physics. Though
much of it is still highly right brain oriented, the systems are
complex enough that they lend themselves to left brain
activities as well. A number of basic principles have been
applied in various ways to various activities resulting in a
great increase in self-help, alternative medicine, etc ...
If I had to label what I am, metaphysician is as good as any
other label. The bottom line is that we are all spirits
expressing ourselves in flesh. Metaphysics comes closer than
anything else that I have ever encountered to describing the
nature of how this expression happens. The following books
and tapes are the best place I have found to get this
understanding. You may want to complement this with some
live seminars. Tony Robbins and Stuart Wilde have
91
outstanding ones that I have personally attended. However, I
recommend you start with the books. The value of the
personal experience is greatly increased if you have the right
preparation, and the best preparation is what you do for
yourself.
RECOMMENDED READING LIST

The following books should be on everyone's must read list.
They are in my top 5 percent category. Those highlighted I
would consider to be in the top 1 percent of books that I
have ever read in terms of overall impact on my beliefs and
my life. This makes them, in my opinion, among the best
books on the planet.
• Thea Alexander: 2150 A.D.
• Richard Bach
o Jonathan Livingston Seagull
o Illusions: The Adventures of a Reluctant

Messiah
o The Bridge Across Forever
o One
• Paolo Coelho: The Alchemist
• Marilyn Ferguson: The Aquarian Conspiracy
• Emmet Fox: The Sermon on the Mount
• F. Scott Fitzgerald: The Rubaiyat of Omar Khayyam
• Willis Harmon: Global Mind Change
• Vernon Howard: The Mystic Masters Speak
92
• J.Z. Knight: RAMTHA (the white book)
• George Land: Breakpoint and Beyond
• Dan Millman:
o The Way of the Peaceful Warrior
o The Sacred Journey of the Peaceful Warrior
• Ruth Montgomery:
o Aliens Among Us
o Threshold to Tomorrow
o Strangers Among Us
• M. Scott Peck:
o The Road Less Traveled
o A Different Drum
• Paul Zane Pilzer: Unlimited Wealth
• Robert Pirzig: Zen and the Art of Motorcycle

Maintenance
• Plato:
o Dialogues
o The Republic
• Joya Pope:
o The World According to Michael
o Upcoming Changes: The Next 20 Years
• T. Lobsang Rampa: The Third Eye
93
• John-Roger and Peter McWilliams:
o Life 101
o You Can't Afford the Luxury of a Negative

Thought
o Do It: Let's Get Off Our Buts
o Wealth 101
• Anthony Robbins:
o Unlimited Power
o Awaken the Giant Within
• John Robbins: Diet for a New America
• Jane Roberts:
o Seth Speaks: The Eternal Validity of the Soul
o The Nature of Personal Reality
o The Nature of the Psyche
o The Nature of Mass Events
o Dreams, Evolution, and Value Fulfillment (I

and II)
• Alvin Toffler:
o Future Shock
o The Third Wave
o Powershift
• Paul Twitchell:
o The Tiger's Eye

94
o The Far Country
• Huston Smith: The Religions of Man
• Stuart Wilde:
o Miracles
o The Force
o The Quickening
o The Trick to Money is Having Some
• Gary Zukav: The Seat of the Soul
Books have been my companions and best friends for

much of my life. I hope these books bring as much joy and
wisdom into your life as they have into mine. I want to
personally thank these great authors for providing such
inspiration into the lives of so many. They have given
wonderful gifts from consciousness to consciousness!
RECOMMENDED VIDEOS
I've found that videos can convey a whole lot more
information in a much shorter time frame than books can,
and can convey it in a manner that encompasses the whole
being. Books require far more imagination on the part of the
reader. In addition, for videos with the actual people
involved, one gets the benefit of a sense of their presence.
Much communication happens through the body and
emotions that can only be seen and heard. I highly
recommend all of the following. They have moved me deeply.
• The Agony and the Ecstasy
95
• ** Ben Hur
• ** Beautiful Dreamers
• Chariots of Fire
• ** Dead Poet's Society
• Dr Zhivago
• Fahrenheit 451
• The Far Country
• ** Gandhi
• Gorillas in the Mist
• ** Gurdjieff: Meetings with Remarkable Men
• Heart of Tibet [Dalai Lama]
• ** C.J.Jung: Seasons of the Heart
• ** Krishnamurti: Within a Still Mind
• The Mahabharata (three tapes)
• Medicine Man
• Mountains of the Moon
• Nostradamus
• Ramakrishna
• Rising Sun
• Romero
• ** The Secret of Nikola Tesla
• ** The Ten Commandments
96
• ** Wind
• ** It's a Wonderful Life
Of the 100's of movies I've watched in my life, these are the

very best. The ones with double asterisks are my personal
favorites, they literally touched my soul.
97
CHAPTER 7
LIVING IN A MANNER THAT SUPPORTS ALL LIFE

Now that we've concluded with some preliminary material,
we can get to a matter of much more import. How can we
as individuals live in a manner that truly supports all life.
For such is what is necessary for the world as we know it to
shift to a new way of being that is based on harmony and
that results in cooperative interdependence and PEACE.
The truth of the matter is that we either live in such a
manner or we die, for our present ways of living destroys
the very web of life that sustains our being on this Earth.
Individual's Living in Support of All Life
So, given the complexity of present life, what's an individual
to do? The basic answer is simple: just act from one's heart,
help where you can, and try not to hurt anything if you don't
have to.
The next step is to do this in all one's decisions and
interactions. One of the biggest factors in getting this to work
is to operate from the perspective Think Globally, Act
Locally. As individuals, we have great power if we act
locally in a concerted manner. If this is done throughout the
country, the force for change is great indeed -- and the entire
country will be transformed into whatever global vision
prompted the local action to begin with.
The easiest way to do this is to think in terms of WIN/WIN
in all of our interactions with other life forms. Make sure that
they benefit whenever we benefit. At the very least, think in
terms of maintaining a balance or equilibrium so that
whatever we do of damage has its counterbalancing benefit.
It helps if we address this on a case by case basis for the
various areas of life that we interact with. These include,
mineral life, plant life, animal life, and human life.
98
Supporting Mineral Life
I know, some of you don't think of the mineral kingdom as
containing life as we know it. However, this represents all
resources that are inorganic. The bottom line is that they
deserve to be treated with respect as does any life. These
resources exist and they are part of nature -- so they're part of
the web of life. This is especially true when we consider that
without these minerals, our form of life would not exist --
nor would most others.
One area where we can have effect is in resource
consumption and recycling. When we recycle resources,
fewer need to be taken from nature to meet our needs. The
Earth has sufficient resources to meet our needs if we are
careful about what and how we consume and if we take the
effort to recycle what we can.
Some minerals and crystals are precious in and of their own.
In many cases, these are the minerals that most reflect and
transmute light. In this era of transforming frequencies, it
will be found that crystals are important components for a
variety of new light transforming devices important as
consciousness itself transforms on this planet.
Supporting Plant Life
Plants are an integral part of the web. The are required to
regulate the level of carbon dioxide on the planet, and are a
major food source for many animals as well as humans. They
also have a psychological effect as well and are a welcome
addition in many human habitats. Plants also provide the
majority of pharmacological substances on the planet.
The way we support plant life is by treating it with the
respect it deserves. We don't take actions that destroy plants
if we can avoid them. If we take plants into our home, we
care for them to ensure they get what they need. Further, we
can regularly appreciate the incredible beauty of the natural
99
world with all it's diversity and by happy for the abundance
that it gives to us.
On a larger scale, we reduce our pollution output so that
plant life is not harmed by the resultant products of our
waste. We take action to repair damage we have already
done; planting trees and cleaning rivers where we can. Also,
we make consumption decisions that reduce the number of
trees that are cut down for wood and paper products. It is
time we act as the caretakers and stewards of life that we
were designated to be by our Creator(s).
Supporting Animal Life
Animals are a very special form of life. They are our friends,
companions, and teachers. They are part of nature, revealing
to us great truths about the nature of life itself; not only
theirs, but ours as well. Wild animals should be respected by
giving them the natural habitats they need in order to exist.
They have as much right to live on this Earth as we do. We
can no longer tolerate the damage to animals or to their
habitats that result in extinction. Each animal is precious,
evolved by nature to its particular state of being. What we do
to our brothers the animals, we do to ourselves. Their
suffering and extinction are a sign of our decay as a society.
A decay due to lack of respect and lack of responsibility for
our actions. It is a very poor steward who allows that for
which he is charged to care for to die. Very poor, indeed.
Domestic animals are even closer to us. They serve as
mirrors that reflect back to us wisdom about ourselves. They
should be loved and cared for with all our hearts. They have
chosen to serve us and share their special consciousness with
us. Whether the time is brief or long, there can be a special
relationship established. Typically, this does not result in
master/servant. The animals have an independence of their
own, especially cats, but many dogs as well. They deserve
our kindness, attention, and playfulness. Further, it's our
responsibility to look after them and see that their needs are
100
met. Of course, not just physical needs, but emotional ones
as well. I haven't tuned into the mental or spiritual sides of
animals yet, so I don't know what, if any, needs they have on
those levels or how they might be addressed.
Supporting Human Life and Community
Finally, we get to deal with how humans treat humans. As
you might guess, this is an important topic for living in the
Aquarian Age. To start with we should remember the
statement namaste, "I bow to the spirit within you". Further,
we should use it regularly, with everyone we meet or interact
with. This sets a tone of respect and reverence that should be
present at all times in interactions among humans.
Do unto others and you would have others do unto you.
The Golden Rule, this too is a basis for human interaction
taught by all major religions on the planet.
Help whomever you are moved to help in whatever ways
you are moved to provide that help. If you follow your
intuition and the voice of spirit inside you, you will know
when you have an obligation to help and when you do not.
One cannot help everyone in need. Let your brother or sister
help those whom you cannot. One is only expected to do
one's share. Each member of the community must do the
same thereby making the load lighter for all. Of course, one
can take on more if that be one's chosen task. Some choose
the road of Mother Theresa, but it is a tough road to follow
unless you are specifically suited to it.
Note: One should not limit one's help to the "needy". Anyone
in society can use appropriate help at various times. In
particular, these times may provide perfect opportunities for
education as well. Watch for where your special skills and
talents can be of use, and provide them where you can. The
benefit to society will be great, especially if many do this.
You will feel great as well. Also, the society will be a much
nicer place in which to live. How wonderful it would be if
101
we could be thankful for rather than fearful of strangers.
Even better, if there were no strangers at all, only brethren
and kindred spirits. How wonderful, indeed.
Find others whom you can teach or train. Regardless of age,
all adults should make time to teach what they know best to
others. This should be treated as a sacred responsibility that
they have to assure that their knowledge and unique skills
are passed on to others. Since education is one of the highest
priorities of society, it falls as a duty to everyone to support it
in a personal way. This will only work if everyone does their
part and does it well. Each individual is only asked to do this
in a way that is comfortable and then only for those areas or
things that they do or know best. Collectively, we have all
the talents required for society to function well. All that is
necessary is to share of ourselves with those who can benefit
greatly from that sharing. What we share and how we do it
are personal choices based on personal preferences.
Treat everyone with equality. Our true nature is as spirit,
where equality is everpresent. That should be reflected here
on this plane as well. However, it is recognized that it may
take awhile to achieve this in physical terms. So be it.
Realization will proceed at whatever pace is appropriate. At
the very least, on a personal basis, we should treat people
with dignity and respect. In our laws we should move
towards equality as quickly as we can. Differences between
people do not impact whether they are equal in the eyes of
society. Equal does not mean that each can do what any other
can do. We can all be equal members of society and still have
our individual roles and responsibilities that are based on
individual skills and talents. A person at 1, 10, 18, 40 and 80
years is the same person hence is equal to itself despite the
fact that it has different abilities and knowledge at those
different ages. People of different skills and talents can be
likened in the same way to beings at different ages, only in
this case, not physical ages but soul ages. One cannot tell
anything about soul age from physical age, however. Nor can
102
one tell anything about soul age from position or station in
society. Rather, the distinction comes in how one lives, what
one believes, and how one treats others.
Construct transactions as WIN/WIN whenever possible. This
ensures that transactions are fair and equitable. This also
requires that selfish motivation be eliminated or at least
minimized. WIN/WIN transactions should consider all four
levels of being: physical, emotional, intellectual, and
spiritual. It is not necessary that all be included, but all four
should be considered to ensure that nothing detriment results
at any level.
Business interactions between people should be structured as
WIN/WIN contracts that are for the highest good of all
concerned including the parts of society that are impacted by
the results of these interactions.
Prisoners and others who have violated the rights of others
fall into a special category. By their actions they have
demonstrated that they are not ready to live in society.
Hence, they should be placed in an environment that does
not have the freedoms of society. The level of restriction
should be commensurate with the lack of responsibility that
was demonstrated. Regardless of the level, a system should
be set up that allows varying levels of rights and associated
responsibilities. If responsibilities are not met or rights of
others are violated, the penalty is further restriction of rights.
As one shows that one can respect the rights of others and
meet one's responsibilities, increased rights and level of
freedom should result. Training should focus on getting
individuals to fully understand rights and responsibilities and
their obligation to society.
Community Living in Support of All Life
In addition to individual responsibilities, there is a
community or society aspect to living in support of all life as
well. This higher level aspect arises because groups or
103
organizations are entities of their own with associated
behavior that also has its impacts.
Adding an Environmental Component to Economics
One of the biggest areas detrimental to life is the area of
economics. Currently, economic equations on which
decisions are made fail to account for ecological factors. Al
Gore discusses this in his book Earth in the Balance. This
must be remedied to assure that environmental damage is
properly weighed and accounted for. We need to make sure
that business decisions are made in a manner that truly
benefits society from a holistic standpoint. More and more,
we need to make sure our business decisions are sound from
the standpoint of their impact on the entire Earth and its
people. Here too, what we do to others we ultimately do to
ourselves.
Economics impacts our lives in many ways. When it is
operating from sound principles, much about how our world
functions will be able to operate soundly as well. Economics
is one of the quickest ways to implement a value system in
society. It's simple, just penalize harmful choices and reward
beneficial ones.
Free choice can remain intact, but making bad choices more
costly to consumers than good ones will quickly train people
in accepted modes of consumption. Further, after a while, the
bad choices can be eliminated as choices altogether.
As an example, meat consumption has been shown to be
extremely wasteful of resources. If meat prices were to
increase to a value more in line with the actual costs
involved, while at the same time vegetarian or lower-in-meat
alternatives were added, peoples decisions about eating meat
would change quickly. If a hamburger cost $4 versus a
veggieburger at $2, people would choose the veggieburgers
as long as they tasted good. If we put the resources to it, this
country should be able to make great veggieburgers and
104
many other foods that would be nutritious and tasty. Further,
it seems that the nutrition we need should be provided in the
foods that society is encouraged to eat. Otherwise, we suffer
from health problems and poorer production.
In the long run, this may require establishing price controls
on any items that have negative ecological impact. Actually,
on anything that has negative societal impact. This is one
way society could exert its power over the economy. All it
takes is proper regulation motivated by the right reasons. Of
course, the lobbyists will not like this at all. But it's high time
they did some real work for awhile instead of taking care of
their special interests. We can't allow special interests to
direct what gets done. We must hold firm to the eightfold
path, and, in particular, the commandment of Right Action.
In our economy we have free choice, but this choice is
constrained by the goods available on the market and by our
willingness to pay more for better features or higher quality.
Most people aren't very willing to pay for what are regarded
as extras unless they are convinced they need them because
of advertising, peer pressure, or plain competition with
others. For the most part, we do not determine what products
come to market. This is decided by people who are
concerned about the bottom line of whether we will buy
sufficient quantities to make the items profitable. What
utility the item has to the consumer and its worth to society
are seldom questioned. Further, there will be no incentive to
even ask these questions unless they are forced on these
companies by a public that demands better. As consumers,
we have great power, but only if we band together in large
enough numbers to make a difference to the companies who
make their living from us. If we stop buying items,
companies have no choice but to listen. If we tell them to do
things in better ways and put our buying power behind our
voice, you can bet that they will act in accord with our
demands and wishes. Tuna and dolphins is a case in point.
Now we have dolphin safe tuna. However, companies are
105
slow to act on their own, especially if their competitors are
acting in the same manner and there is a cost. In these cases,
it is up to us to change the behavior of a whole industry. We
can do this in other areas as well, but, it takes commitment
and a united effort. Further, somebody has to do the research
and analysis to be able to decide what issues are in the best
interest of society.
Overall, we need to take a hard look at the goods we
consume, their prices, and the true costs of producing the
goods. From this, it will be obvious that some of the goods
on the market cause more damage than they are worth, while
others are clearly life-supporting. Those goods that have
negative impact to life or to society should either be
eliminated or taxed heavily so that their impacts can be
mitigated and balanced through other actions.
Cooperative Interdependent Living
At some point, we need to make the leap to cooperative
interdependent living. We are interdependent whether we
like it or not. Very few individuals are able to survive in
isolation. The struggle is just too hard. We live in a web of
interdependencies, one that cannot be unwoven. It makes life
a lot easier overall, because work is partitioned in a manner
that allows each to do their tasks yet the collective
accomplishes all the tasks that need to be done. This is what
creates society to begin with. The burden on each individual
is less because of the sharing and partitioning of labor.
Actually, interdependency takes this a step further by
recognizing this essential quality of the way we interact, and
expressing it in a more positive way. There is a struggle
between independence, dependence, and interdependence. In
independence, we are free and have no commitment between
us. In dependence, their is an overriding relation between the
parties where at least one must rely on the other for
something. This gives one a position of superiority over the
other. Sometimes this digresses further to co-dependence
106
where both parties become dependent and support the
dependence of each other. Interdependence brings this to a
whole different level where we choose to recognize that as a
society we exist as a whole with parts that are interdependent
on other parts. It's not that one individual is dependent on
one or more individuals, but that each of us participates in
and is dependent on the collective whole.
We want to take this even further however, and choose to do
this in a cooperative manner. There is nothing wrong with
advocating change when we feel like it will benefit society.
Cooperation involves working together in harmony. It
involves being kind to one another, understanding one
another, and acting peacefully toward each other.
Cooperative interdependence says that we are on the planet
together, we being the entire world, and that we need to grow
up and act like we truly are on the same spaceship -- all of
us, for that is what our planet is, a ship moving through
space. All people must be treated with respect as equals. It is
not enough to do this for our country alone, because other
countries could jeopardize our future through their actions.
What affects the part also affects the whole. At some point
this needs to be a worldwide activity. And time is running
out. Global unity is goal that has been talked about. The time
is soon coming when we must make it real or we may perish.
WIN/WIN Transactions Whenever Possible
One way we can support other human life is by conducting
all of our transaction truthfully in a manner that is fair and
equitable to all parties involved. This is tough to do unless
distracting motivations such as desire, attachment, and greed
are eliminated or at least minimized. Also, fair is usually
considered to apply to a point of view. However, there is a
higher sense of fairness that is impartial and understands
what is required to achieve balance. Those people who
naturally recognize this should be trained and used to assist
in structuring transactions. All transactions over some
107
amount should require involvement of these specialists to
ensure people are not taken advantage of by others who
might be inclined to do so. Our transactions as a society
should be done in this way as well.
There is no honor in treating one another unfairly or in a way
that lacks balance. In our negotiations as a society, we should
not be trying to get the best deal for ourselves. We should use
our clout in a manner that ensures not only that our deals are
fair, but that those of other countries who wish to deal with
us are fair as well. We should be an example for the world of
right action and right behavior for any nations that are to be
part of the New World Order.
This requires some far-reaching thinking, however. Terms of
contracts between parties at the present time are negotiated
until both all parties come to agreement. This does not
guarantee that the resulting contract is fair and equitable, it
only guarantees that the parties accepted the final terms
whether they were equitable or not. The principal of karma
teaches that we are responsible for our actions in creating
any imbalance, regardless of whether the other side accepted
that imbalance. It is better to accomplish our actions in the
right manner to begin with, and avoid having to right any
imbalances latter. The objective both as a individual and as a
society, is to act in a manner that minimizes the creation of
new karma but we will get into that later.
108
CHAPTER 8
MANIFESTING SPIRIT IN FLESH

Everything written thus far and to be written in this book
has this as a central theme. How do we restructure
ourselves, our lives, and our society so that spirit can be
more fully expressed in flesh? This is the one question that
I personally came to answer, or at least to work on to
whatever degree I am able. Finding ways to do this on a
global scale is why I am here, my personal purpose.
However, I am learning too, so the best I can offer is
whatever I can bring forth of the Vision being revealed to
me. I make no claims as to its absolute correctness. I only
offer to express as best I can what I know and what I
believe to be true. The proof comes only through
experience and many of the things that I state have yet to
be tried in our world. My inner sense is that much of it has
worked elsewhere, or has been worked out by
Consciousness. However, I won't know for sure what is
right until I can see the pattern that results in practice and
compare it with a pattern in my head.
To some degree we are all manifesting spirit in flesh at all
times. Spirit is what gives us that special force called life.
For most people, however, spirit is just a small spark within
them. It's always there, but is barely there -- hence has a very
limited expression. At the other extreme, we have souls like
Mahatma Gandhi, who allowed that spark within them to
grow into a very large flame allowing his presence to affect a
great many people in very beneficial ways. At the very
extreme, we have true spiritual masters such as Jesus, and
Buddha. These beings were truly enlightened ones in flesh.
They offer shining examples of what we may all become.
The Aquarian Age beckons, but we cannot enter it until we
find the way to allow our sparks to grow and enlarge within
us. This can only happen in an environment of truth, an
environment where information is the property of all; not
109
hidden, suppressed, or otherwise kept in secret from others.
As the saying goes: the truth shall set you free. Without truth,
there can be no true freedom. Freedom requires the ability to
access information and act upon that information. This alone
would crumble the present economic systems and
governments. Truth and free information take away any
competitive edge over one's competitors. Taking away the
various levels of classification of information does the same
thing for governments. It's time to grow up and stop playing
such childish games. After all, we're here for a momentous
occasion in the history of consciousness -- one that beings
from many worlds are here to watch. Yet, most of us don't
have a clue as to what is going on. This has to change, and
soon. The Age of Aquarius is just around the corner.
Literally, it's only a slight shift away, if only we would have
the spiritual eyes to see.
So, how does one get spiritual sight. It all starts with insight,
seeing inside oneself, paying attention to the true you that is
observing all of this and trying to offer guidance if only we
would listen. Some talk about an inner voice or an inner
knowingness. Some see spiritual guides of various types.
Some have hunches or intuition about things. The key in
bringing out any of this is quiet time, without distractions,
when we can get in touch with who we really are. We are not
our bodies, nor our emotions, nor our minds. We are beyond
all of these. We are spirits who brought these things into
being so that we could play a role within physical reality that
would allow us to learn something we needed to know about
ourselves. It's all a play of light where consciousness creates
and learns of itself through its creations.
However, before we can go beyond something, we must be
comfortable within it. We must learn how we manifest our
bodies; for it is our beliefs, choices, and actions that sculpt
this body that is the vehicle through which we express
physically. Similarly, it is our beliefs, choices, actions, and
110
interpretations that determine how we feel about ourselves
and the events in our world.
Our body, including our brain, is the temple through which
we express spirit. It is the only flesh there is in which to
house whatever part of our soul can be expressed through
this form. At the very least, it must be treated with respect.
One doesn't desecrate temples, so we shouldn't desecrate our
bodies in any way either. There are no standards or ideals
which apply to everybody in this area. It is up to each
individual to find out and know what is right for them.
Health of body and mind are key indications that one is
operating within an acceptable range. The right thing is to do
what feels right for you, without harming yourself or others
in any way. Perfect health or perfect shape is not important.
As soul is able to more fully enter into the body, it will have
the innate wisdom to create the conditions that are most
appropriate.
Society has a large role to play in this because it teaches us
most of what we believe in this area. Food producers and
advertising have a responsibility here as well. They should
not be training or encouraging us to consume products that
desecrate the temple. This is a crime for religious temples.
Why should such desecration not also be a crime for the
most intimate spiritual temples, our bodies?
Few of us get any real training in the area of dealing with
emotions. That is, unless we are emotionally disturbed or
have major emotional problems. Much of mental health
really deals with emotional health and the ability to deal in a
sane way with various emotions. This is compounded by the
fact that people feel and deal with emotions differently. For
the most part, emotions tell us something about how we are
interpreting actions or events in our world. They are feelings
that correspond to a tone or frequency. They should cause us
to look at our own beliefs and how they lead to the particular
interpretation. To avoid problems, however, there must be
111
suitable outlets for emotions that prevent too many from
being repressed. Feeling an emotion doesn't have to be a
prolonged activity; that is, unless it's enjoyable. There is
nothing wrong with feeling something, realizing it quickly,
and moving on to the next feeling. It's useful to notice the
states that one goes through and the states that one stays in.
The object is to stay in states you like, states that are
beneficial, and much as you can; and to pass through
disempowering or disagreeable states more quickly. One
must not take this too far, to avoiding these kinds of states
altogether. After all, these states have their uses as well.
Our schools primarily focus on training the mind, and then
mainly the left brain. However, they do a very poor job
overall. The right brain is the most important component to
spirit being enfleshed. Logic and rationality have their uses.
We have whole systems of science and technology set up
primarily on what the left brain has produced. What most
people fail to see, however, is that it wasn't all logic and
rationality. In nearly every great scientist, there was a strong
intuitive and creative side that was an integral part of genius.
Further, nearly all great discoveries and advances came from
an insight or aha that only the right brain could generate.
The brain is extremely complex. Functionally it has
capabilities far vaster than any machines we can even think
of. It's not clear that the brain will ever be able to understand
itself. However, it can try and in doing so get some type of
picture of how it works. In the west, our thoughts about the
mind go back to the early Greeks. Socrates and Plato shaped
much of the direction that western thought was to follow for
many centuries. We're still influenced by these great men and
their thoughts, over twenty centuries later.
Note: Unlike our own machines, the brain comes with no
operations manual. As far as I know, there is no users guide.
Each of us is unique -- especially in this area. For the most
part, we are on our own to discover what it can do and how
112
to control it to do these things in pursuit of the aims and
goals that we set.
Many people have come up with insights about how the
brain works that are applicable to the general population. I
don't like to repeat what others have done nor do I tend to
remember specifics so I'd prefer to state only those things I
have figured out myself or that have somehow become part
of my belief system.
There is a part of the brain that is responsible for self-
actualizing. We are designed for a purpose, and this part
knows what we must do to fulfill that purpose. The reward
for achieving this is great joy, happiness and fulfillment. In
most people, this part never activates because the
prerequisite conditions are never met. At least, such has been
the case for a long time. In the Aquarian Age, this will
change so that self- actualization comes to everyone. Part of
the challenge of society is how to structure itself so that self-
actualized people can work effectively using their talents for
what they as individuals came to express.
Maslow defined a hierarchy of needs of individuals. It's a
good one that makes a lot of sense but I don't remember it
and don't care to look it up. It deals more with the kinds of
needs that we address earlier in Chapter 2. Some mechanism
in the brain enforces that hierarchy so that individual actions
are in line with meeting the needs hierarchy. However, we're
at a level of development as a society, where all of the basic
needs should be met for everyone as a matter of society's
responsibility to its individuals. If we can't sign up to this,
there is simply no hope.
The brain is where our map of reality is created, along with
all the rules for interpreting the meaning of events or
circumstances that we experience. In addition, it is where
many of our programmed actions and responses are stored.
However, it is not clear exactly what constitutes reality.
Much of what we experience is inner, thoughts and emotions
113
that convey meaning. Much like a robot, our only outer
connections are through sensors that sense the world and
effectors that take physical action in the world. To a large
degree, we sit as this program inside that is observing ourself
and the information from our sensors regarding both the
world and the effects of our actions. Some of the information
we observe is information about the physical world, but
much of it is information about information. To a large
degree, we are nothing but generators, receivers, and
processors of information. One of the key aspects of the
processing is assigning appropriate meaning. A second key
aspect is in how we focus the processing.
Our free will comes in how we assign meaning, and how we
focus the processing. At least it appears that we have control
over these two things. Perhaps it is more correct to say that
we can gain control over these two things. The goal is to
allow spirit to program or at least influence the programming
of these areas. As we grow from baby to adult, much of this
programming is established by society in the form of values
and beliefs about reality that we pick up from our family,
friends, teachers, and others in the larger social environment
as we are growing up. Very little freedom remains with the
individual, primarily because there is no training given in
how the mind functions, so most people don't know that they
operate from a program. The program is not bad overall, it
provides an effective means for running the machine. What
is bad, is not realizing that we are the programmers -- and
not being given the training necessary to allow us to gain in
proficiency at this activity. On second thought, as with
computers, it may be that only some have the natural skills
and talents to be self-programming. Another group has the
talents and skills to do this programming for others. Nature is
efficient at things like this. Why have all do something that
could more easily be done by a smaller group as a
specialized service.
114
Per the consensus society, reality creation is left to God or to
nothing. Reality interpretation is black and white -- there is
only one reality, anything else that might be perceived is
simply illusion. This is far too limited and rigid for
something as complex and as flexible as consciousness to
live within! This is not an acceptable view of reality creation
for those who would be co-creators in the Aquarian Age.
The fact is that each of us truly does create our own reality.
We are the consciousness within the box and we experience
by focusing and defocusing our attention, by interpreting
information that we focus on, and by planning and
stimulating action in the world either by generating
information or by physical action. It is not clear how much
consciousness resides in the mind. However, all of physical
consciousness is expressed within the mind. The ego part of
consciousness is most closely tied to maintaining the
physical connection with the world. The mind is larger than
the ego. Getting beyond ego is a major step for physical
consciousness. However, the ego is not fixed, so there is
always an ego to get beyond. To some degree, this is how
consciousness grows. The ego, the "I", is the present aware
physical consciousness, the primary interpreter of reality for
the physical being. It contains the will, and is empowered to
focus attention and take action -- being the controller for the
physical interface so to speak. For spirit to be more fully
expressed in flesh, the functions of other parts of the brain
need to be accepted by the ego as valid sources of
information and trustworthy interpreters of reality.
Each time the ego changes, it goes through a transition
similar to death. What it was ceases to be, and it is now
something new.
For those on a spiritual path, this happens many times. In
some cases, this is experienced as a rebirth -- be it religious
or in a social sense. Drastic changes are very jarring and may
require some time or therapy to come to grips with. Drugs
115
and sudden events may trigger ego changes as well. Ego
changes are a natural part of spiritual emergence. As we
come closer and closer to the time of transition, we'll see
more and more of these changes occurring throughout the
country -- then, throughout the world. In particular, key
world leaders will have such experiences to prepare them for
the changes they will see in the world, and for the new type
of actions that will provide the only real solutions. As I've
said before, in some areas we have no choice, the play will
unfold as written in accord with the Plan. For this to happen,
players with the key roles have to undergo the necessary
character development. The specifics are left to choice and
free will, but the basics are already planned.
When we chose this existence, and the potential parts we
might have, a good deal of our free will was executed. Once
the part was selected our job was to be a good actor and play
the role as best we could.
At some point, the truth of reality creation must be
understood. This requires more than realizing that one can
decide on something and take action to make it so. What is
necessary, is coming to grips with the idea that we create it
all; that everything in our reality is our construction, by
ourselves and jointly with others. The mechanisms for this
are all within what we presently understand. All the pieces
are there. Between what science has done regarding
understanding the physical world outside of us and what
metaphysics has done to understand the inner world, all that
is necessary for conscious transformation is known.
However, a vehicle was required to make this understanding
physical -- to really get it into flesh. The truth is that we have
always created our reality. That's why it is our reality. The
mechanism has not been understood very well, but it has
been there all along. I'll deal with the techniques for reality
creation in a future chapter. However, it's important to
understand how this relates to expressing spirit in flesh to
ever greater degrees.
116
The Nature of Spirit
I'm rapidly reaching the conclusion that spirit expresses as
consciousness. Consciousness is without form, it is thought
stuff, ideas, vibrations, frequencies. Form is the same kind of
stuff only denser and operating at different frequencies. The
part of consciousness that is physical is split into
approximately three divisions: a conscious mind, a
subconscious mind, and a superconscious mind each of
which operate at different frequencies and in different ways.
All of these parts of the mind are fed by frequency
connections that transfer information.
• The conscious mind is associated with the ego. It
stores information and beliefs about reality based on
the direction and conclusions of the ego. It operates
logically with little to no connection to the right brain
unless the individual has natural talents that rely on
the right brain. The ego, as the will, can program the
conscious mind to do things through goals and
objectives, values, and beliefs. It also is the primary
experiencer of reality. However, the ego's major
growth comes through death experiences.
• The subconscious mind is associated with the
emotions. It processes information about events,
interpretations, feelings, and decisions or choices. It
reveals important and meaningful information
through dreams that is intended to be healing or
helpful to the personality. When dreams aren't
listened to they become more intense, and keep doing
so until the message gets across. The subconscious
has other modes of expression through art, writing,
and various other methods.
• The superconscious mind is a higher connection to
spirit. It observes everything and ensures that karma
is balanced. It works behind the scenes to write the
play and draw to each individual that which they
117
need for their highest growth. This is the mechanism
for ensuring that each individual gets what they need.
This mechanism operates behind the scenes. It looks
at what the individual believes, and what karma is
outstanding, and decides what events would offer the
greatest growth. These events get put into the script.
Actually, it may be simpler than this. If all
possibilities are actualized in consciousness, then all
that is needed is to guide the individual to choices
that are for the highest growth. This may be
conscious or subconscious depending on how well
the individual has developed listening skills. The
inner voice or intuition are typical vehicles through
which this part is expressed.
The ego has responsibility for keeping the body aligned with
physical reality. Ultimately the ego is the physical awareness
of the self. The main task in getting spirit more fully
expressed is to get the ego to expand its identity by
incorporating other aspects of physical consciousness into its
framework of being. This requires recognizing that these
parts exist, learning how to listen, taking the time to listen,
learning how to translate and understand inner information,
learning to trust inner information and consider it in making
decisions, and learning to trust and rely on inner guidance as
direction from spirit. It takes strong motivation for an
individual to do this. To a large degree it requires renouncing
much of the outside world and instead focusing on the inner
world. For most people, attachment to the outer world is too
strong to permit this shift of focus.
It is not clear that everyone needs this shift. Those beings
who are to be the equivalent of the brain for cosmic
consciousness will need a high level of understanding in this
area. It is through their evolved consciousnesses that their
link to cosmic consciousness will occur physically. It is not
clear how many will be required, but whoever they are, they
are becoming aware that they have a role to play and that
118
they must prepare for the part. In some cases, multiple
potential players may be auditioning for the same part. Free
will is a major factor. Development is never forced, it is
always chosen. One cannot tell exactly when lessons will be
learned. Consciousness enacts all possibilities. Particular
individuals are confined to the role their ego is associated
with. A life is made up of choices taken and realizations
made. What truly matters in life is what one realizes [Real I
-zes]. The objective is to get the ego to realize that it is truly
spirit and that most of what it sees as reality [Real I -ty] is
nothing but its own creation.
We usually say that the ego is the "I". Manifesting spirit in
flesh involves evolving the "I" to the "Real I". Some say this
"Real I" is centered between the eyebrows, at the place of the
third eye or where the pineal gland is. This seems like a
balanced place that would be appropriate. The chakras have
something to do with this as well. I, personally, am not
versed enough in such subjects to know nor interested
enough to find out on my own. My focus is on the
functionality at the high level, not on the details. What I have
concluded, however, is that the organs are already in place
within the body for spirit to be more fully enfleshed -- in
fact, many are already operating. The problem is a lack of
conscious awareness, and a failure to tune in to the subtle
frequencies at which these organs operate.
As an example of spirit operating in flesh, consider the
action of speaking. The ego lives solely in the moment. It
may think about past or future, but it must do so in the
present. When one begins to speak, the words form
instantaneous in the moment. Unless the speech is
memorized, there is no conscious knowledge in the moment
of the words to be spoken -- yet they come out smoothly and
effortlessly as if on cue. Something is driving the specific
words however. If its not the conscious mind than what is it?
I've been astonished at some of the ideas that came out of my
mouth. They were new to me, as if I was hearing and
119
thinking them for the very first time. Something inside me
knew enough to make my mouth move properly. My
conclusion was that our consciousness is much more
complex and powerful than we can comprehend. Only part
of it exists within time and space. The grander part of it
exists in some eternal HERE and NOW.
When you think about it, we truly only exist where we can
act and make choices. The only place and time that meets
this condition is here and now. The moment is our only point
of power in physical reality. The ego only exists here and
now, and ceases to exist for about a third of each day during
sleep. It's interesting that we allow the ego as much authority
as we do. It seems obvious that our sleeping reality is just as
real as our waking one. The fact that one is twice the length
of the other has no bearing on its relative importance.
The scientific world view only considers the world of the
senses to be reality. Many individuals trained in the western
world have been taught that this is true. Little to no attention
is paid to the inner reality of spirit. This must change for the
Age of Aquarius to begin. A large body of people must start
acting and sensing in the inner world just as they do in the
outer. This does not mean doing one to the exclusion of the
other, that is why both the East and West have failed to
achieve balance and harmony in the lives of people. What is
required is a balance between inner and outer. If one
achieves spirituality by renouncing the outer world for the
inner, one has not made the spirituality physical in a practical
way. Also, it will only last so long as one has the discipline
to maintain the inner focus. If one achieves prosperity
through will, without spiritual insight, the prosperity will
eventually consume itself or the society will suffer from
great problems. The founding fathers of the United States
realized this when they put the all seeing eye of God atop the
pyramid in the Great Seal. Balance demands the use of the
inner to guide the outer. Consciousness already does this to a
120
great degree, but behind the scenes. It's only the ego, the
aware part of consciousness, that is lacking.
The Vision
It has been estimated that we only use 10-15% of our brains,
and this only by the greatest minds among us. The reason for
this is because our brains were sized for handling a given
amount of spirit expressed in flesh. Most of us have not
developed ourselves enough to turn on large parts of this
potential due to how we create and interpret our reality and
where we have placed our efforts and attention. As children,
we may have used much more than this. However, much of it
atrophies when we stop seeing the world through the eyes of
a child and start seeing it in the accepted adult way. Perhaps
this is why Jesus said the we must be as little children to
enter the Kingdom of Heaven. We need to once again use
parts of our brain that allowed us to see the world and reality
in a whole different way.
It's time for all of us to start living up to our potential and
realize that we came explicitly to bring through as much of
our spiritual essence as is possibly at this time on this planet,
and further that we came to fulfill a particular function or
role within a larger whole that is the collective society in
which we live. As a group, we came with a larger goal of
creating a vehicle in which cosmic consciousness can more
fully express in flesh, not necessarily as an individual, but as
a group that is operating harmoniously in a cooperatively
interdependent manner.
This country, the United States, is to be the example and
prototype for the establishment of a New World Order that
would encompass the entire world. This would allow the
Earth's consciousness to manifest more fully as well. We've
talked about this before. The Founding Fathers in 1776 knew
that this was true. They knew they were starting a bold new
experiment that could lead to the conditions under which
consciousness could manifest more fully.
121
Shifts of consciousness of this magnitude are required to
enter the Aquarian Age. They also involve massive change in
nearly all aspects of human life. These changes will come.
The play has already been written. However, we still have
choices to make as to how we will play out the end game.
The current state is our present world with all its problems.
The future state is a nearly ideal world of peace and harmony
where we all have much greater freedom and powers of
expression and creation. What is yet to be decided is how the
transition occurs and who plays what roles. Then too, this
may already be decided as well. For all we know, there is
only one basic play written for us to enact, and the actors
roles have already been cast. Perhaps the only choice we
have is how we experience the rollercoaster ride. Some
people may be terrified, others may be indifferent, others
may be thrilled. It's all a matter of perception and
interpretation.
The Play of Light and Dark
We can't complete this topic without discussing the play of
light and dark. Spirit is Light. We are all light. Everything is
light or vibration. This is confirmed by science. Creation
happened with the Word, an emanation of vibration from
God. We are vibrations much further down the spectrum --
but our nature is still as light. Even matter is light. Einstein
got it right.
We are also in a play of light and dark, awareness and
ignorance.
This is the game that consciousness plays, in a playground
that is constructed of light and mirrors. This playground is
our very world, and the meaning that we give to it. There is
no darkness in and of itself, for all is light. However, there
are shadows where the light appears to be diminished.
Because awareness is the paramount feature in this realm, the
battle of good versus evil comes into play as well. It's more
than a battle of awareness versus ignorance. That would be
122
too easy. The real battle zone is the gray area where people
of different levels of awareness use their skills and powers
for and against one another. Very powerful and
knowledgeable people may arise who have no connection to
heart and spirit. These offer a challenge to the forces of light,
and a warning cry that the time has come to unite and get on
with the dance of spirit.
There is a question regarding how much of the play is
written versus how much can be altered. It really makes no
difference. It should have no impact on the way one lives
ones life. The bottom line is that even if it is written, unless
we have special skills we have no way of reading it ahead of
time. Even if we have those special skills, what can be
accessed and whether what is accessed is true or false are
part of the play as well. The Play is always here and now. It
is not in some future that could possibly be, though at the
same time it makes up that very future.
We are souls in flesh now. Though, we are limited in our
conscious expression by our conscious awareness and ego.
As our awareness of our true nature grows, we rise in
consciousness to become the spiritual beings we truly are,
and that all are meant to be in accord with the Plan. The Plan
is what drives the play, it's the major theme behind
everything. It's the overall purpose that drives our purposes
as individuals. The Plan must be executed. Such is the
directive of spirit. Free will may enter to choose various
things within the Play, but the Play always conforms with the
Plan.
123
CHAPTER 9
COMMUNITY: REALIZING THE SYNERGY OF

GROUP IN A PRACTICAL WAY
Community is where people live; where they work, learn,
play, and otherwise interact with one another. This is also
where many derive their meaning in life in terms of the
role they play within this larger whole. Because my own
nature has been so solitary, I'm in a position to understand
what is missing from my own experience and from my
observation of others. I've often wondered about what
credentials I had for playing the role of designer of
communities for the Aquarian Age. I can only conclude
that it comes either from past lives or from other realms.
But, I know this is what I do, so let's get on with it.
Community involves how people live and function in groups.
One of the main reasons we do things in groups is because it
is more effective than doing the same things individually.
The increase in effectiveness is primarily a cost
consideration, and sometimes a time consideration. A second
reason for living in groups is to enable tasks to be done on a
large scale that might not have otherwise been done. A third
reason is to facilitate social interactions between people for a
variety of reasons. A fourth reason for living in groups is that
it facilitates getting the needs of every individual met. A fifth
reason, the greatest of all, is that it allows a synergy to be
created that enables the expression of higher levels of spirit
needed to bring forth the ideas and principles that will allow
spirit to be more fully enfleshed in preparation of the coming
Age of Aquarius. The bottom line is that it is more elegant
for individuals to function in unison with one another -- and
the universe naturally evolves toward more and more
complexity and more and more elegance to accompany the
complexity.
Sizes and Location of Communities
124
Our present communities are cities and towns, or
neighborhoods within such organizations. There typically is
no social reason for various boundaries. Sometimes there are
ethnic groupings within particular areas, but this does not
constitute an acceptable reason for creating a division. For
the most part, people do not know very many of their
neighbors because the location of lodging was chosen based
on availability, general neighborhood considerations, and
cost. Specific neighbors are basically strangers who happen
to live close to you. The frequency with which people move
has a lot to do with the current situation. When a person or
family stayed in the same small town or small area within a
larger city all of their life, there was time to establish
friendships and relationships -- especially before TV became
so prominent. Many people don't get out as much to socialize
and interact with each other anymore. Now, the pace of life
is hectic, and many people move every few years. Even
those that remain in the same place seem relatively isolated
because the place changes so much around them. Much of
our need for safety is centered around our homes and the
immediate areas around them. I was going to say
neighborhoods, but it is not clear that the areas around most
of us constitute true neighborhoods where people act in a
neighborly manner toward one another.
It is not clear that we are meant to live in structures as large
as cities. The very size and density of such large places are
beyond comprehension. There is not enough space for our
auras and energy fields to keep their distance from one
another. People are simply packed too tightly together. Large
cities are the result of carrying a growth principle too far.
Yes, economies come from doing things on a large scale.
However, there are also principles that limit growth. These
show up as the problems that face many of the major cities in
this country - - joblessness, slums, crime, garbage, mental
illness, violence.
125
So, what can be done? How do we create better structures?
We start by looking at life from a higher perspective. We
look at the full range of interactions, services, and structures
required for people to function as an interconnected,
interdependent whole. Yes, people need a place to live that is
affordable. But, it should also be convenient to the range of
services that each person needs to exist and to pursue
happiness. Schools, recreation areas, community centers and
shopping areas should be close, preferably within walking
distance. Where possible each community should be as self-
sufficient as practical in terms of services provided and
services consumed. This includes sufficiency in food and in
disposal of garbage.
What size is optimal depends on the needs of the particular
individuals involved. We will always have our hermits. They
need to exist alone or in single family units. The extended
family unit is the next expression and this may range from 8
to as many as 100 or so. Extended families may occur along
physical or spiritual lines. They are joined together by a
desire to interact strongly with one another. Depending on
needs, interests, and larger purpose these families may
choose to live in isolation or as a piece of a larger social
grouping. Up to 100 or so family groupings may be brought
together to form the first level of community. If people were
able to choose what community they belong to, rather than
being forced into it, or taking one because that's where they
find a house or apartment, that alone would make for a much
safer life.
Much of this will need to be worked out via prototyping. The
specific sizes should be determined by what is required to
make the infrastructure efficient and make the lifestyle the
most elegant. Structures must accommodate the physical,
emotional, mental, and spiritual needs of the people. Further,
they must allow for a much greater degree of creative
expression.
126
Locations of communities should be chosen for their ability
to meet all needs of the particular communities but especially
for their ability to activate the spiritual energies of people.
This will allow the work of the community to manifest most
effectively. There are special people who can see the energy
fields and grid lines important to such alignments. These
individuals should be called on in helping to determine
where the communities should be built.
Consciousness works far faster than we can, not being
subject to the limits of space and time. The plans have
already been made, the sites are already chosen, and the
cities are already laid out. We have only to increase our own
level of consciousness to be able to tap into this. Somehow
the work must be done physically to make it so. Yet, I'm not
so sure that this will be done in our current physical
dimension. We will definitely experience dramatic changes
in our living arrangements on this planet, but, not necessarily
because we physically change our current setting. The
impression I get is that this is just a setting on the stage, and
that the stage has several slots on which construction of sets
can take place. Our current act, the Piscean Age, ends
shortly. We are in the midst of the final times of Revelation
now. While this era closes, it's important for consciousness to
grow and understand what the age was all about, and to learn
what life will be like under the Aquarian Age that lies ahead.
In particular, we need to understand the nature of Light and
choose to follow the Light with us. Most importantly, we
need to understand Unconditional Love, the largest lesson
that Jesus came to demonstrate. And, in learning about these
things we need to take the next step and live in accord with
these teachings.
Tasks and Functions of Communities
1. Provide the infrastructure for meeting the needs of
individuals.
127
We've talked about this already. The means for society to
discharge this responsibility is through the local community
wherever possible. This means each individual community
needs to meet individual needs through the infrastructure by
itself, or by including others that will use the infrastructure.
Some services may not be required on a full-time basis. The
way for getting the unique services of special people may be
by bringing them in when they are required.
• Health care professionals ought to be readily
available to everyone, along with training that
emphasizes physical health. In addition, pools,
gymnasiums, athletic fields and courts, and parks
should be part of every community.
• Educational facilities should be part of every
community. These should include rooms of various
sizes, libraries that include computers with on-line
access to information, stages and theaters for staging
dramatic and musical productions of various types.
• Social facilities should be part of every community.
These should include performing arts centers for
accommodating larger events and recreation centers
and resources for people with like interests to pursue
their common interests. In addition community
centers should allow people to voice their concerns
and opinions to the government on any issues they
find important.
• Transportation and a mechanism for efficient
distribution of goods are essential components of the
infrastructure that society must provide to meet the
needs of individuals. Individual cars are not the
answer or even part of the answer for how this should
be done. There are much better ways to accomplish
the functions of moving people where they want to
go and goods where they are needed. The specific
solution will depend on a variety of factors related to
128
the community size, layout, and expected travel
patterns. Here as elsewhere, the specifics should be
worked out by the best and brightest for the range of
community types and then the appropriate
infrastructures should be laid out when new
communities are built.
2. Provide the infrastructure for facilitating individuals
in accomplishing their purposes.
This one's a little more difficult. It requires that more
attention be paid to individuals in areas that have typically
been considered private in the past. To even begin to do this,
we need to use the education process to train people more
about the nature of reality and about how the mind works.
Education primarily impacts the mind. The mind is a very
complex entity, that usually builds a shell of protection
around itself. We typically do not take readings of minds to
see where they are at or if they might need some help. This
results in most people operating on faulty programs at far
less than their innate potential. To fix this problem, we need
to somehow get individuals out of their shells, interact or test
them in some way, then provide feedback in terms of
information, beliefs, techniques, and exercises that might be
helpful.
• As a minimum, there should be a Mentor assigned to
assist each individual, and there should be a
counselor available on an as needed basis, but also
responsible for a quarterly evaluation. This would
allow needs for further service to be identified in a
timely manner so that they could be provided when
required. Such assignments should take into
consideration the needs, abilities, and purposes of
both individuals. In some cases, the same individual
may be the mentor for several individuals who have
related needs. In other cases, for people with special
129
gifts and purposes, more than one mentor may be
needed to provide the required service.
• There should also be a place where individuals can
go when they experience spiritual growth. This would
be a hospital for the spirit, where one is given what is
needed to integrate the experience and feel whole
again. Since this will be happening on a massive
scale, we may want the educational facilities to be
used instead of any medical facilities. In my recent
spiritual awakening, I was shocked at the lack of
spiritual service provided. Official medical science is
not yet ready to acknowledge such changes. They
look primarily to a physical cause. It's not at all clear
that the physical symptom is not the effect rather than
the cause. Further, in the case of spiritual changes, it
is not clear that it is important to treat the symptom at
all, for this may go away in its own right as the
psyche adjusts to its higher state of awareness.
I know this is a relatively new area of experience, at
least in terms of large numbers of people
experiencing it. Mystics in all religions have been
experiencing the states of mind that accompany
spiritual awakening for many centuries, if not for
millennia. It wasn't until the heavy drug experience of
the 60's that significant numbers of people got into
these states. Unfortunately, drugs alter one's state
whether or not the psyche is ready for the experience.
This in turn burns out various brain pathways
because the current is too great for the circuits.
When the growth is from a natural experience, the
intensity is contained in a manner that opens new
circuits but does not overload the system. Further, the
psyche is taken forward at a pace that it can handle.
The psyche may still find the going difficult, and may
130
take awhile to adjust, but it will be able to adjust and
operate from the new reality.
3. Support mutual beneficial interactions with other
communities.
The whole society is a cooperatively interdependent
grouping of communities -- and hence a cooperatively
interdependent collection of individuals. Communities could
be considered to be societies in their own right. To support
the whole society, each community must function in a
manner that cooperates with its neighbor communities in the
same manner that individuals function within a single
community. Different communities may have different
functions and responsibilities as part of a larger whole.
Individual purposes for those within a community should
align to create one or more higher purposes as well. These
higher purposes will typically involve others from other
communities, and perhaps will involve a large network of
cooperating individuals involved in the same task. In
general, whatever connections between communities allow
mutual beneficial interactions or make for a more elegant
society will come to be. Evolution in accord with the Plan
demands it.
Some of the major interactions between societies include
exchange of information, exchange of individuals or small
groups of individuals, exchange of services, cooperative
endeavors, and tourism and travel.
• Exchange of information involves just that, sharing
of whatever information is generated or received by
one another. Since each community is only a piece,
each has only a local picture of the whole. Through
sharing, each community is able to extend its
boundaries to a larger world that at least extends to its
neighbor communities neighbors.
131
• Exchange of individuals or small groups of
individuals provides a means of sharing a greater deal
of information between communities. This includes
first hand information about lifestyles and values. In
addition, ideas embodied in human form have much
more detail and dimensionality than anything we can
put on paper or pass through our communications
mediums at the present time. People are carriers and
conveyers of information but they are also carriers of
light -- spirit. In this capacity they have much that
can be shared.
• Exchange of services facilitates specialization
allowing communities to focus on particular jobs in
line with their purposes, while they leave other jobs
for other communities that they have established
relationships with. In many cases this allows an
economy of scale to be realized as well. However,
this only works well when an efficient distribution
system is in place between communities. This is a
small price to pay for the freedom from having to do
everything locally.
• Cooperative endeavors are activities where two or
more communities cooperate and work together on
something. This can be done whenever the desire is
there to do so. These might be for work, education,
play ... or for anything desired by the parties
involved. These should be encouraged to forge strong
connections with others at the community level.
• Tourism and travel between communities should be
encouraged and supported. Lifestyles from one
community to the next may be very different. Those
who choose to travel and experience these cultural
differences firsthand should be free to do so. In fact,
this activity should be subsidized because of the
stories it will bring back to the community. People
132
shouldn't be forced to travel, though they should be
encouraged to do so.
4. Support accomplishment of assigned tasking in accord
with the Plan.
Communities have assigned purposes and tasking in accord
with the Plan, just as individuals do. Accomplishing this
tasking is the major function for any community. One part of
this tasking is taking care of the individuals within the
community. The higher part of the tasking is to fulfill some
larger function within the greater body of society. Part of this
function may be found in names, such as the City of
Brotherly Love for Philadelphia. In other cases, it may be
found in nicknames. In many cases, it may not be found at
all. This higher level function will not be expressed until the
community is operating from the right frame of being.
Communities are organs within a greater whole. They have a
vitality and function of their own. As organizations of human
beings, their potential for creative activity is tremendous. It's
only a matter of achieving the right internal structure and
organizations so that the talents of individuals can be
synergistically applied toward the proper activities.
This is easier said than done, especially when human beings
are independent entities who frown whenever any of their
supposed freedoms are taken away. If only they knew how
chained they truly are to things that are of limited value. If
they knew, the incitement for change would quite literally
blow the country apart. Thinking we are free does not make
it so.
First Steps: Where to Start
Start by creating a community of one. Get the parts of
yourself together and find a way to integrate them into the
unique being that you are. Identify what makes you free, in
what areas you are free, and what areas you are not free. Do
133
whatever it takes to make yourself whole and complete, and
be whom that you truly are. Chapter 12, Knowing Thyself,
might be of use since you may need to learn about yourself.
Next, start gathering people around you that you want to be
around -- not that you have to be around, and not people who
happen to be around by chance or circumstance. It's your
choice.
Decide who you will be around. Remember, however, they
have choice too, so the desire should be mutual -- between
friends. It is easiest to start doing this after you have some
insight as to why you are here.
Once you've started to gather people around you, whether
this be one or many -- get together and figure out jointly
what you can do together, and what you are meant to do
together. You may need some outside help and guidance for
this depending on the makeup of your group. Since I'm
making this up as I go, there is no one specific I can refer
you to, though by the time you read this I'm sure that I'll
know. If you get this far and can't figure it out, contact
Beyond Imagination for addition material in this area
including information on workshops. I'd start with exploring
ways to work together to meet the consolidated needs of all
individuals, or to achieve projects of interest to the group.
Where possible, optimize how the special skills and talents
of each individual are used. Also, ensure that benefits that
accrue from group activities are distributed in a manner that
is fair to all members. This does not mean equally. Fairness
and balance are the key operating principles.
If you can get a large enough group together and have the
appropriate resources, either takeover someplace that is
already built and adapt it to your specific needs or start from
scratch to design how you want your space optimally
arranged. Where possible think in terms of creating a sacred
134
space, for this will imbue the whole enterprise with added
spiritual energy.
Since many of our interactions are informational, it may not
be important that the group one lives with is also the group
one works with. This is primarily determined by how closely
people need to work together to get their assigned part of the
work done. The closer the work requirements, in general, the
closer people should live together as well.
Larger Steps: Government Involvement in Prototype
Communities
Disney's EPCOT center was envisioned to be the prototype
community of tomorrow. Sorry, but it's basically an
amusement park. However, the idea is right on. It is time to
seriously look at how our communities have evolved over
the past 200 years and realize that its time for a massive
change. The structures that have worked in the past aren't
working anymore, they've evolved into dinosaurs that should
be allowed to die and be replaced by something more fitting
for this day and age. The Government should have the lead
role in designing prototype communities that show us what
can be and work out any design tradeoffs and issues.
The first step is defining the requirements for what should
be. To start with this involves identifying the range of sizes
for communities and the different sets of needs that each
community must meet. At a higher level, this involves
identifying how the entire country might be arranged into
interrelated networks of communities where each network
carries out particular functions. This requires having some
picture about how the whole will be organized, and what its
constituent parts will be. It is not clear that this level of detail
is known at present. Perhaps the best we can do is start by
working with groups of people who want to start new
communities, derive requirements from what the entire
group needs and what it plans to do, and design the
appropriate infrastructure. The government should fund these
135
prototypes to learn what works and what doesn't. The idea is
that we want a test case that allows the bugs to be worked
out before implementing these communities on a mass scale.
We may need test cases to identify what sizes are right and
what increments of infrastructure make the most sense.
Besides infrastructure, until we see some major spiritual
growth, some exploration of what rules and regulations are
required to maintain peace, order, and proper functioning
within the community will need to be done. Government still
has a role to play in this area, and the appropriate attention
must be given to what kind of government can best get the
job done. The ideal case would be to have no government
required because each individual is spiritually governed.
However, to be practical, right now we need government
direction to fill in for the lack of individual spiritual
direction. Once again, this can only be resolved by looking at
the specific needs for representative example communities.
Something on the order of a Constitutional Convention may
be required to truly address this, for the potential changes go
to the very core of our system of government. Its almost as if
rather than a nation of states, we're about to become a nation
of communities that have particular functions. Further, it
may not be the places where communities are located that is
of the most importance -- but the functions they perform and
the relationships they have to others.
Until we know what some of these functions are and the
specific communities that we are dealing with, we're working
somewhat in the blind.
Perhaps I should step back a bit and look at what is practical
now. Minor changes to current structures are reasonable.
Minor movements of people are reasonable. Small groups
joining together in alternative lifestyles are reasonable. Some
educational changes are reasonable. Economic changes are a
stretch but somewhat within reason. Major governmental
136
change is needed but it will take some effort to bring about.
Overall, the prospects look relatively dismal.
From another level, however, the Plan is what is driving the
show. Per the Plan, the Aquarian Age is just around the
corner. The problem comes in trying to work too much on
the details of how to go from where we are now to where we
need or want to be. This has gotten me into trouble before.
The trick is to not get wrapped up in the how of things. We
need to clearly decide what needs to be done, and then allow
the how to manifest in a manner that is most appropriate. The
bottom line is that we will have incentives, massive
incentives, that move us toward the society and types of
communities that we have been talking about. Exactly when
this will manifest is in accord with the timing of the Plan.
Those of us who believe in what is unfolding regarding the
birth of the Aquarian Age can do what we came to do to
prepare ourselves, others, our country, and our world. The
way we do this is one step at a time; making ourselves
whole, finding a way to get outside the present economic
system so that we can work on the tasks we are here to do,
and then starting to collect people around us that are part of
our spiritual family. Those of us interested in establishing
larger groups to fulfill higher functions will do so. When the
time is right, a new City of Light will be established as a
community of Lightworkers. Those who are ready will be
drawn to the city to perform functions in accord with their
purpose. Each individual is encoded with the knowledge
required and will be linked and aligned with spirit. The City
of Light will function as a society with a binding contract
between the citizens of the city.
OK, I got a bit esoteric but we are starting to touch on my
purpose for being here. This City of Lightworkers will be
realized on this planet, and probably within the United
States. One of my purposes is to help to make it so in
whatever way my talents, abilities, and energies allow. We
137
need a prototype city to serve as the physical manifestation
of what can be. This demonstration is required for the further
manifestation of spirit in this world. Even a single city of this
type will be an enormous fountain from which increased
spiritual energy can flow throughout the world. I'm sure that
some of you reading this now already know that you are
destined to be part of this great new adventure in living.
Depending on what happens in the government in the next
few years, we may or may not see official government
involvement in these activities. If the government does not
move in the appropriate direction, it may be up to private
individuals and groups of individuals to take charge at a local
level and create the conditions necessary to allow the
required prototypes to be built. The bottom line is that spirit
based society is an idea whose time has come, and there is
nothing on Earth that will be able to stop it from manifesting.
The dream is alive. The castle is in the air. All that's left to do
is to build the foundation under it, a task well within our
means at this time on this planet. The only real choice is
when. I would prefer NOW, but I'm not the playwright,
consciousness is. It will happen when the time is right, as
does everything.
Overall, there are many alternatives. Our job as lightworkers
is to choose whatever ones appear to be right whenever it is
time to make the decisions. We control our destiny. We
collectively are society. Banded in groups of tens, hundreds,
and thousands -- the spiritual energy that results from the
synergy of our society will be simply beyond imagination.
It's potency will be such that the change that manifests will
be wondrous to behold. We are gods in the making. When
aligned with spirit what we can do will be miraculous.
138
CHAPTER 10
THE ART OF MAKING IT SO

We've come a long way together. Now we get to explore
some of the secrets of reality creation. However, we must
also deal with some of the perils and pitfalls as well. Many
books on my recommended reading list cover the
techniques in this area quite well. What I'd prefer to focus
on is the whole picture of what is going on from a spiritual
perspective. This will be instrumental in helping to decide
what you want to make so, and what means might be the
most appropriate for making it so under the prevailing set
of conditions. We are creators manifesting our own reality.
It's high time we realized this. Also, we might as well learn
to play the reality game as the masters we truly are.
The good news is that you can get whatever you want and
that you always get whatever you need. The bad news is that
you are responsible and have to pay the price. You may not
agree with this, but I didn't ask for your opinion. Awakening
the Giant Within, Wealth 101, and Unlimited Wealth are
excellent places to start in terms of specific techniques and
philosophies for getting what you want.
Our biggest tool for reality creation is our mind. This is one
of the most complex tools on our planet. The only other ones
that I am aware of that are more complex are the minds of
dolphins and whales. Their brains and consciousness are
advanced enough to make us mere children by comparison.
Ours is complex enough for our level of consciousness,
however.
In our first analogy, let's consider the brain as a computer.
The ego and conscious mind are application software that
runs on the computer. This application software has room for
memory, beliefs, and desires, wants, and goals. The ego is
allowed to fill all these areas with whatever it wants. The
operating system checks the desires, wants, and goals and
139
determines whether these are true needs. Any needs are
routed to the reality creator to line up the appropriate
circumstances for meeting the needs in line with beliefs and
spiritual purpose. Everything else is checked against beliefs,
spiritual needs, and the amounts and types of effort the
individual puts in to achieve these desires, wants, and goals.
If appropriate conditions are satisfied, the reality creator
lines up the appropriate circumstances to satisfy the desire,
want, or goal. If not, too bad, nothing manifests or the
actions result in failure. One additional factor is that the
operating system evaluates anything one requests and any
actions one performs to see if the motivation was selfish or if
the actions were harmful. Whenever these conditions are true
a charge is made to the karmic record. Beneficial actions
create credits on the record. Records are fairly elaborate,
containing details on the nature of the karmic events. The
reality creator checks the karmic record as it goes about its
business of drawing in the appropriate events for each day
and moment. This is done at subtle levels continuously. This
works for little things but we are most concerned about how
it works for the larger events and desires in our lives.
So, what's an individual to do with this knowledge? Here's
the practical advice that results:
1. Get your beliefs in order. Faulty beliefs may be
preventing you from creating the reality that you
would prefer.
2. Make sure you truly need what you want to create.
The need can be on a physical, emotional, mental, or
spiritual level. If you don't need it, but you desire it
anyway -- that's okay, just be prepared to pay the
appropriate price and do it in a manner that doesn't
harm anyone. There is nothing wrong with having
luxurious things if that pleases you.
3. Consider whom your goals impact. State your goals
in a manner that results in the most positive impact
140
and the least negative impact to others. When you
create goals and take action to achieve them, you are
responsible for your action -- especially any negative
actions.
4. Observe how people and the environment are
impacted by any actions you take and mitigate karma
by righting any harm that is done as best you can.
5. Focus on spiritual goals where possible and write
them in a way that is for the highest good of all
concerned, the world, and the planet if necessary.
6. Keep your pursuit of selfish goals to a minimum, to
none if possible. The only exception here is self-
knowledge and self-realization goals. These are
primarily spiritual so they transcend the limited self.
From this, it doesn't seem like there is too much worth
manifesting. The bottom line is that this is true. The key is to
focus on spiritual matters and doing the task you came to do.
You don't have to worry about expending effort to get your
needs met. Time spent focused on achieving wants and goals
that are not spiritually motivated, is wasted time. The Law of
Abundance applies. When you do spirit's work, spirit
provides for meeting your needs. During the transition period
to the new society this may be by putting you in a job that
allows you to apply some of your talents to earn enough
money to make a living. Eventually, this will be via work
that is more directly related to your purpose. To some degree,
when will be determined by what effort you put into your
own spiritual development and to helping others.
So what kinds of things are worthy of making so?
• There are lots of problems in the country and the
world that one could be concerned about. Use your
imagination to come up with potential solutions or
ways to help for any problems that interest you.
141
Crime, education, the homeless, unemployment,
medical care, and a host of others all await human
attention.
• Identify a service or a product that could be of benefit
and create it on whatever scale you choose. Subgoals
might include finding the right people to help you. It
is best if the service or product fulfills a need in a
better or more efficient way than other options.
• Come up with a Vision about anything. Typically
such visions come from the soul and involve your
purpose. Goals can focus on making the Vision a
reality. This might include bringing more information
through, building a prototype, building the real thing,
and duplicating the project throughout the country.
Dream it, get a support team, prototype it, then build it.
As you may be able to tell, my heart's not really in this
chapter anymore. I used to like Piccard and the way he said
"make it so".
However, much of our present physical reality has lost it's
allure. We have some amazing props that we can bring into
our lives, but they have little to do with spirit. We can enjoy
them, if indeed they bring us joy. The potential for
distraction, however, is great. Much of the world is attached
to the things of the world. Yes we are physical, spirit
manifest in flesh. But, that does not mean that material
things vibrate at the levels where spirit can best be
expressed. We also have emotions, thoughts, and higher level
brain functions that few have awakened. It is in these areas
where spirit will be most fully enfleshed. Once this is so, our
attitudes regarding things will change and the things
themselves will evolve to better suit our new needs.
Similarly, our entertainment and our services will evolve as
well to meet the demands of consciously evolved consumers.
There is nothing wrong with things. The problem is the
142
overattachment to things and to entertainment at the cost of
education and spiritual development. We've gone way too far
in this country. We are not alone, however, many of the
developed nations of the world have the same problem.
My Vision is of manifesting a new world order that consists
of a United World living in peace and harmony in which
individuals are able to more fully express spirit in flesh. It's
going to take a whole lot of people doing a whole lot of
things to make this come true. My forte is coming up with
ideas and working the top level plan and the basic spiritual
foundation. I suspect others with talents that complement my
talents will be drawn into an overall planning group and
various subgroups including a spiritual foundation group.
Under the spiritual foundation group will be a spiritual
education subgroup that will generate a plan for how
spiritual education should be accomplished. This should
include training at many levels for the society to be, and how
such training might be phased in to get the society from here
to the Aquarian Age.
This is the only part of the Plan that my Vision has been
involved with. We are all pieces in the overall plan. Each of
us have information encoded into us that will allow us to
build this society in physical terms. It is only a matter of
getting each piece to its appoint conscious state and place for
the society to be realized. This is already starting to happen
across the planet. People are awakening at an increasing rate
and they are starting to make the connections necessary to
get things rolling. It will happen. The Play was written long
ago. We're coming to the final scenes of this act. Then, on to
the next act, the Aquarian Age. Our joint efforts will have
allowed consciousness to achieve what it has never done
before. But, we still have much work to do. Our world is a
far cry from the Utopia of which we are dreaming. Yet, it is
within out grasp, we have only to reach and do what we can
to increase our consciousness as quickly as is possible at the
time on this planet.
143
Don't take this too seriously. Enjoy the process. Treat it as
the game that it is. Be physical, the whole purpose of this
play is to allow consciousness to be more fully expressed
physically. Enjoy the world, enjoy nature, enjoy the
interaction and company of others. Enjoy the body and all
the pleasures that it offers. Enjoy things and services. Enjoy
whatever makes you happy so long as you don't harm others.
Be Happy and Create Well! You have every right to create
what you want. Individuals are entitled to abundance, once
they have done the proper work on themselves. Expand your
spiritual awareness to whatever degree you are able. Live
your life as directed by your spirit, and live it well. In the
process, however, find out what you're here for if you can.
My sense is that this will be revealed to you when you are
ready.
If you still want specific techniques, you'll have to read the
books I recommended earlier. I won't duplicate what others
have already done well. With the above guidance, you'll be
able to apply the techniques with caution to allow you to get
what you want in an ethical manner.
Conscious beliefs are the most important means we have of
impacting the reality we create. If you don't know what yours
are, that is the first area of ignorance that you should correct.
The Nature of Personal Reality is one of the best places to
start on this. The experiences we draw to us are in accord
with our beliefs, so whenever we don't like something we
experience it's time to examine why we attracted that
experience.
Everything in our lives is there to help teach us the lessons
we most need to learn. Our growth is always supported. This
may be hard to believe when the times or experiences are
bad, but it is really true, the universe (via our direction)
always gives to us exactly what we need. Note, not what we
want, but what we need.
144
Further, this is exactly what we need, because it is a higher
level of ourselves that is doing the determination.
When changing beliefs, it is always best to start with those
beliefs at the very core. These typically involve the basic
beliefs about the self. When these are identified and
replaced, many other related beliefs are taken away as well.
Maintain an open mind. Don't allow your beliefs to get too
set. While you believe them, do so with conviction -- for the
power then gets imparted to reality creation. Feel free to
change your beliefs as you do your clothes whenever new
beliefs fascinate you. Treat beliefs as a playground of the
mind. Remember that beliefs are not true, however. They
may be true or they may not be -- and it may be impossible
to know either way. Decide what to use by their results. The
key feedback will come as the reality you experience. Give a
belief a little time before you draw any conclusion about it.
There is significant delay in the feedback path, especially if
the belief is weak. Also, watch for conflicting beliefs. When
you find conflicts, resolve them as best you can choosing one
over another. You might want to jot down the other so that
you can try it again at a later time.
I find it useful to take on new beliefs all the time. But, I live
in my head a lot, so playing with beliefs is a recreation for
me. In many cases, I don't even care about the physical
ramifications anymore other than where they allow my
consciousness to soar, and if they allow me new insights
about the nature of consciousness. My experience is that as
you become interested in the nature of your consciousness
and start to believe things about this, you will start to
experience new states of consciousness from which you can
either confirm or deny beliefs. The speed with which the
process occurs is amazing -- far faster than having to wait for
lower level physical manifestation to occur. When you do
this, make sure you pay attention to results. It is easy to go
into never-never land, and get separated from the consensus
reality. At this level, you must remember that this is a game
145
and that when you get too far off track you find yourself
outside of the boundaries of the board in a place where the
rules don't make much sense.
From a consciousness standpoint, reality interpretation is in
many ways more important than reality creation. Reality
interpretation involves assigning meaning to what happens.
Much of our emotional reality is created by how we interpret
situations and events on a physical level. Another aspect of
reality interpretation deals with the symbolic or deeper
meaning of situation, events, and the things that they are
associated with. This level is much more complex involving
all of the levels of mind. Most people don't see the symbolic
meaning, they see the physical event as the only reality. The
inner meaning, however, is far more important to
consciousness.
The Play is intricately woven. Every stitch is rich with
meaning. Every event, all synchronicities, every detail was
specifically designed and chosen to convey information.
Nothing is wasted. This meaning is always there for anyone
with the eyes to see and interpret. No, we're not talking about
physical eyes.
Each person will see exactly that which their level of
consciousness permits them to see and they'll only
understand that which they need to know. Interesting. By our
definition of Freedom as the ability to access and act upon
information, we're no more free in our consciousness than
we are in our country. We are given that level of freedom
which we can responsibly handle - - no more and no less.
This principle of consciousness, hence of spirit, is the same
that our government executes in the physical world. Until we
get the individual to the self-realization level, there is
nothing that can be done to make them more free. They will
continue to live an illusion, believing they are free when they
are really enslaved. Further, they are enslaved by their own
choice. The bonds are loose, the way to freedom is easy but
it is up to each individual to make the choice to pursue their
146
spiritual identity. The major choice is in being in the world
but not of the world. This is the key -- the truth that we are
spiritual beings in the world but not of the world.
147
CHAPTER 11
KNOWING THYSELF
This is the most important issue that we face as individuals
-- as spiritual beings in flesh. The main endeavor in all of
life is the growth from ignorance to knowledge of our true
nature as consciousness. This is the task that transcends
lifetimes. The paths are many, but they all lead to the ONE.
Everyone reaches the destiny eventually, but each must
reach it by their own efforts. Help is there for any who
need it, all that is required is that one asks. Each is allowed
to proceed at their own pace -- but as the time for
transformation to a new age grows near, individuals must
make their choice of whether to pass through their own
effort or whether to fail and repeat the grade.
Here, we address various ways that help one in knowing
oneself. As you'll see shortly, they're not traditional ways.
Our highest priority task throughout our lives should be to
know ourselves. This should be an activity which engages a
major share of our attention and focus. At the very least, one
should pay an equal amount of attention to the inner world
and inner development as one pays to the outside world.
Unfortunately, most people don't come anywhere close to
this. My guess would be less than five percent is more the
order of the day. Hmm, maybe this is why we're only using
about five percent of our brains. It's no wonder that we have
so many problems in our society, and signs that indicate that
the problems will worsen over time.
So, how does one start to "know thyself". The first step is to
ask and answer some basic questions and see how the
answers change over time. The self that we perceive changes
over time just as dramatically as the physical body does.
Remember, as above, so below. The rules are the same at all
levels. So, no matter where one looks, one is confronted with
the same principles of spirit in action. The physical body
148
grows from baby to child to adolescent to young adult to
mature adult to old adult. This includes at least six levels of
being, even more when you consider that each level may be
broken into relatively distinct sublevels. The emotional,
mental, causal, and spiritual bodies go through similar levels
or phases, but their growth is somewhat independent of the
physical body. The major dependency is that the brain itself
must be sufficiently developed to allow particular levels of
some of the higher bodies to manifest. Similarly, there can be
such interdependencies among the relationships between
other bodies as well. Typically, higher states of higher bodies
require higher states of lower bodies.
Now, what if you don't believe in the concept of many
bodies? Well, in the interest of your higher development, I
suggest that you choose to do so for awhile and see what it
does to your reality. The bottom line is that either they exist
or they don't and science may or may never be able to prove
whether they do exist or not. Thus, the matter is one
appropriate for belief. The key test for beliefs is utility. Do
they empower you. Believe me, having five bodies instead of
one to deal with in your concept of yourself is extremely
empowering. Personally, I don't know whether there is one or
five hundred. What I know is that thinking in this manner
allows more of the nature of reality and the nature of
ourselves to be explained in a manner that is relatively
simple and elegant. Personally, I like simplicity and elegance
-- they convey a sense of beauty that is there whenever we
get close to expressing Truth.
The questions that are useful to ask include:
• Who am I?
• What am I?
• How do I exist?
• Why do I exist?
149
• Where do I exist?
• When do I exist?
That got the basic who, what, when, where, why, and how
stuff out of the way. Be honest and think deeply about what
your answers really mean.
Who You Are
Who you are is a soul expressing itself in flesh to the greatest
degree possible given your present state of awareness. Why
in flesh? Because that is where reality games are played in
which consciousness creates and finds out its own nature.
Know thyself is a constant theme that drives all
consciousness. It's an eternal endeavor, and you are an
immortal spark of consciousness.
In this particular incarnation, you entered to play a particular
role -- a role which is already written in the Play. You, as an
actor, are required to play the role you signed up for.
Fortunately, until one is highly developed, one is not given
foreknowledge of the script. Actually, within the play, one
only has such knowledge if it was written into the part to
begin with.
To the best of my understanding, the above is true. However,
many of you may be coming from a level of awareness
where the above is only a remote possibility. In our
experience of ourselves, we are the person referred to by our
names. We are the "I", the ego which is ever present when
we are engaged in physical reality. We sense that this "I" is a
constant thing, and that we are ever one entity. But, in truth,
such is not the case. This "I" is a floating point that changes
each moment with each new experience or thought. We are
not the beings we were as babies, nor as children, nor as
adolescents, nor as the adults we were before this moment.
We have memories or remembrances of what we were, but
we are not now what we were.
150
What You Are
What you are is consciousness. Consciousness is eternal,
immortal, universal and infinite. A piece of consciousness
has the same characteristics as the whole, just as a piece of
most substances on earth. One can be infinite and have
limitations in form at the same time. The trick is waking up
from the dream, and remembering that we are spirit,
consciousness. We choose to incarnate into forms to gain
particular types of experience. We are not the forms, we are
the experiencers within the forms. Experience happens
primarily within the mind. Our bodies have physical sensors
and effectors, but these are understood to some degree by
science. What is experiencing is the intelligence that takes in
the information that the senses detect; interprets and
understands the information; makes decisions about it in line
with want, needs, and beliefs; and applies direction to
actuators. All of our bodies have similar breakouts into the
sensors, effectors or actuators, and the intelligence that
drives and interprets everything.
For consciousness to be physical, it must reside within the
physical body. It does this, however, by causing suitable
organs or groupings of cells to be organized in ways to serve
as the sensors, effectors, and intelligence for each of the non-
physical bodies. At the lower levels of operation, each body
is virtually on automatic. At higher levels, special receptors
may be created that serve as antennas and receiving devices
for signals that are generated from outside of physical reality.
Actually, from another standpoint, there is no physical
reality. This is all consciousness. Everything is
consciousness. The rules for how to make form from
consciousness are part of the setting for the Play.
What I just realized, is that for consciousness to be physical,
it must agree to limit its reality for awhile to operate within a
set of constraints. It never loses what it was, it just chooses
to play a game for awhile. In our case, the game of physical
151
life. Physical life is encoded in our DNA. For humans, this is
as far as our ability to recreate our true selves as spirit has
come. We are part of one consciousness learning from the
whole of experience of all humans. With each new birth,
consciousness combines what it has learned from the lessons
of evolution. This is a slow process overall because it is the
higher brain functions that take the most work to develop. It
takes watching an individual over a whole lifetime to know
what genetic combinations allow what functions to appear.
Consciousness is working to provide the fabric necessary to
build a body that can accommodate itself, or duplicate itself.
It's learning to become the highest level of creator possible, a
creator of itself. Actually, it is learning to fully realize itself,
as the God that it is. As pieces of consciousness, we are
learning to realize that we too are spirits that create our own
reality. We are learning of our own true nature.
I included the above to give you an example of the kind of
realization that can happen on the fly. No, I don't know
whether it's completely true or not -- much depends on the
clarity of the channel through which the information came.
But, until I wrote it above, it did not exist even as a
possibility anywhere. Also, it's outside the realm of science
as we currently practice it, so it's a matter for belief or
spirituality to address.
Why You Exist
You exist to experience the joy, wonder, and exhilaration or
living life as spirit in flesh. However, it may take many steps
to get there. You exist to have experiences that will allow
you to learn of your true nature. You exist because you chose
this particular form.
These all deal with why you exist in physical form. Actually,
the most correct answer is that you exist because it is your
nature. You are a human being. Beings exist, period. As a
being, your purpose is to be all that you can be.
152
I almost forgot, you also came for a particular purpose. I'm
not sure this is true for everyone, but if you reading this, you
must have a role to play in the unfoldment of the Plan for the
birth of the Aquarian Age. It is up to you to focus your
attentions on preparing yourself for your role. You may also
need to find out what it is. I'll offer some guidance on where
you might want to turn for assistance in that area, a little
later.
How You Exist
You exist because consciousness continuously provides
whatever is needed to maintain the physical forms and
provide you with what you need to grow and to perform your
role. You chose the particular form you would occupy based
on your own assessment of what you needed for your own
development and what service you were willing to perform.
You made sure your character got the right abilities to
accomplish the purpose you set for yourself. Sometimes,
purposes are set to levels higher than can be achieved to
ensure that some required level below that is definitely
achieved. We work best when we believe our work is
important. On a day-to-day level, you are sustained first by
consciousness, then by other physical functions.
Where You Exist
You exist HERE, wherever that may be. You always exist
here. Close your eyes and ask, where am I? You will find that
"I" is not located within your body, and is not anywhere
within this world. "I" is always HERE, beyond any concepts
of Space.
When You Exist
This one's easy too. You exist NOW. You always exist in the
moment. Your thoughts may focus on the past, present, or
future.
153
But, you exist now, outside of time. No matter when you
check, when is NOW.
One of the secrets to rapid conscious development is to
focus your complete attention on being HERE and NOW
in all that you do. This will transport you to a state of
consciousness that is Beyond Mind. Once you have
achieved such a state, even for a moment, you will
understand how great a service Krishnamurti provided for
the world.
KNOWING YOUR BODIES
Whole books have been written on the various bodies. My
knowledge in this area is rather limited so I'll focus only on
what I've experienced to be useful.
The Physical Body
Realize that the physical body is the temple for spirit on this
world. Treat it with respect and don't abuse it. Massages are
helpful, as is exercise. Extremes of weight should be
avoided, but don't be overly concerned about it. When we
eliminate emotional problems that affect this, weight will
naturally find it's right operating level. The body's
intelligence understands what it needs. It knows how to keep
the body functioning perfectly. This body intelligence
receives direction from other bodies to determine specific
conditions. The bottom line is that our body's operation will
be in accord with whatever we believe or whatever the play
calls for to provide us with the physical experiences we need
in order to learn our lessons.
The Emotional Body
Emotions provide the indications of how our energies are
moving. They also provide a means for increasing the
forcefulness and controlling the character of how our energy
is expressed. The key in this area is to allow yourself to feel
things, and feel them deeply. In some cases, they need to be
154
expressed to others as well. Some people think and talk
about their feelings. If that is helpful, do it. My particular
preference is to feel emotions and then let them go. It is not
necessary to take outward action to let them go.
Many emotions are generated from a mental evaluation of
what things or events mean. The label that results from the
evaluation activates the emotional body to result in the
appropriate mental state. The more words we have for
emotions, the more evaluation choices and subtleties we
have. My experience is limited in this area so I don't know
firsthand how great this repertoire should be or what purpose
it would serve. My sense of it is that unless you have
problems or interests attracting you to this area, it's much
like the physical body. Treat it with respect, and don't abuse
it. Also, listen to it -- emotions show one how one is
evaluating one's reality.
Hmm, now I know why this area is important. The key is in
evaluating reality. If we are operating from consciousness,
we feel because we choose to do so. What we feel most is
joy and happiness, because it doesn't matter what happens
anymore or how people react to us. That's all part of the
game, and it's all their creation. When I'm centered in
consciousness, I don't make evaluations that get me outside
of joy and happiness. Such evaluations are disempowering
hence do not have utility at that level of awareness.
The Mental Body
The mental body is the entire realm of thought. While
operating in the physical body, the focus is on the higher
functions of the brain. Both left and right brain functions are
important, but the relative proportion of these will be
somewhat dependent on the individual’s purpose and what
talents and abilities are required for its fulfillment. We seem
to be moving into times where it is important for individuals
at the frontier of reality creation to have balanced minds with
both sides functioning at peak levels. The intuition allows
155
new ideas to come through and provides for creative
expression. The reason creates the structures and connections
to other ideas that result in a practical basis on which
physical manifestations can be launched and from which
further intuitive action may proceed. The balance of both in
the same person allows much to be discovered and
understood quickly. This is what will allow the rapid
advances necessary to transform the world and birth the Age
of Aquarius. We have to create the new world in our
imaginations, then put the infrastructure in place to make it
so. The trick is to work out the details in consciousness, in
the mind, before we make it so in the physical. Otherwise we
waste a lot of effort in creating things physically.
Reading good books is the best place to start for building the
mental body. There is nothing like the greatest thoughts of
mankind to stimulate the mind to think in a like manner. As
these thoughts are read, however, the idea is to try to get into
the mind of the being who first came up with the thoughts.
The true meaning is not necessarily the meaning that you
give to something. The author may have intended something
quite different. A few words is not enough to carry the real
meaning. Further, if it was truly so simple, then why did it
take a great mind to uncover it? The bottom line is that when
you read great ideas or the words of great minds, do so
slowly, and with your full attention. Play with the ideas that
you read in your mind and discover the ocean of meaning
that can be expressed in a simple idea.
There are biochemical processes that go on in the brain. You
may find that as your state of consciousness expands,
psychological or physical disorders or imbalances may arise.
I found this true in my own case. I want to warn you, even
though I haven't confirmed whether others have experienced
this. In my personal case, a physical "disorder" was
discovered. My sense is that rather than a disorder, it is a
physical function that allows my mind to think as it does.
We're starting to see various pills advertised as brain food or
156
nutrition for the mind. I believe, that as consciousness
continues to expand, we may need to input additional
substances into our body to provide the appropriate levels of
ingredients needed for our mind to operate at a new level of
functionality. I liken this to a small change in diet, or the
addition of dietary supplements. The old saying: "you are
what you eat" may have more meaning than we yet know.
It's important to understand your own mental abilities, your
strengths and your weaknesses. Learn to operate from your
strengths. You are free to work on weaknesses, but it is not
necessary unless something specific in your situation is
driving you to develop some area. Just because something is
a present weakness doesn't mean that there's a lack of talent.
It may be that it simply hasn't been developed.
The Causal Body
This is where the balance of cause-effect happens. The
causal body monitors what we think, feel, and do and
ensures that a balance is maintained. It does this by attracting
the appropriate events and creating the appropriate
circumstances to allow us to experience whatever is required
to balance any negative or harmful actions we have done. It
speaks to us primarily through conscience, or a more
developed sense of right and wrong.
Moral and religious training provide the basis for conscience.
The bottom line is that we are responsible for all that we do.
The causal body is responsible for giving us the lessons that
we need to realize that we are responsible. If you aren't
operating from a basis of personal responsibility, already, I
urge you to start to believe that you are responsible for all
that you do and experience. And do it ASAP, with firm
conviction. Also, read The Nature of Personal Reality to see
what Seth, a non-physical entity, has to say about this.
The Spiritual Body
157
We are in the stratosphere here. I don't have a direct
experience of my spiritual body. I believe that it speaks to me
through my intuition and that it is to some degree the
transmitter of much of the information that comes into my
mind. That is, at least much of the metaphysics related
material that comes through my mind. My awareness of soul
began as a small still voice inside me and has grown larger
and larger as I paid attention, listened to it, and trusted its
advice. I also believe that it guides my actions and ensures
that I get exactly what I need when I need it. Part of its job is
to write the details of the script that is related to my part in
the play. This may also be our superconscious, one of the
three major parts of our mind.
My sense is that this is my Higher Self, my very
consciousness. It's only recently that I've had a strong
connection with this entity, though I have been aware of its
existence and influence for over 20 years. I believe one of
the goals if the game for each of us is to realize "I AM
CONSCIOUSNESS ITSELF". Right now, I know that I am
conscious, and in touch with consciousness, but there is a
separation. My sense is that one day this separation will
vanish.
ABILITIES AND BASIC NATURE
There are a variety of methods for finding out your abilities
and basic nature. The ones that I've found to be most useful
are primarily metaphysical ones. In most cases, however, the
methods confirmed things I already knew about myself. In a
few cases, they extended my self-knowledge in a way that
felt right and was confirmed by my own intuition.
Many of our abilities are known to us. They're the things
we're good at, the things we like doing, the things that excite
us to the very core. Our basic nature may not be so obvious
to us because it's expression is limited until various obstacles
are removed.
158
Astrology
Astrology can tell us a lot about who we are. It doesn't cause
us to be who we are. The various planets represent aspects of
ourselves, the constellations various energies and ways of
expressing those energies. At our birth, the energies existed
in a certain pattern that was a major piece of what made us
what we are. The symbolic meanings of the planets and
constellations are there to allow us to find out about
ourselves if only we choose to see and to use the symbolic
meanings. Choose to do so, it will be worth it in both your
growth and your ability to time your actions by living in
harmony with natural energies.
There are four basic energies earth, air, fire, and water
corresponding to body, mind, spirit, and soul. Where specific
planets are located tells us how particular parts of our nature
are best expressed. What planets and how many we have in
various energies tell us a lot about why we are here and what
areas we came to focus on. My own chart has a lot of fire
energy so I came to be heavily involved with spirit. For most
of my life, ideas have been more important than things -- in
many ways as important as the very air that I breathe.
Metaphysics has been one of the true joys of my life since
1974. Philosophy, in particular Plato, even before that.
The key is to know what energies we came into this
existence with. These have a lot to do with our natural ways
of expressing ourselves -- spirit (sun), emotion (moon),
communication (mercury), will/power (mars), love (venus),
challenge (saturn), awakening (uranus), unconscious/ dream
(neptune), superconscious (pluto). I don't know that these are
exactly right. Consult a professional astrologer for more
detail. I do know that the significant spiritual advances and
experiences are timed. They are determined at the moment of
birth. Actually, before, for the date and time of birth are
specifically chosen so that the energies are right.
159
In my own case, I've found that Uranus aspects to the natal
sun are highly powerful spiritual times. They result in intense
spiritual awakenings of a very sudden nature. I don't know
that this is the case for others, but it sure was powerful for
me, the type of experience that truly changes one's life in a
manner that one can never go back. I believe the type of
energy that I experienced recently was a once in a lifetime
energy combination.
There is not much that can be done to prepare for it. The best
advise that I can offer about how to handle this experience is
to put yourself in a place where you can reexamine
everything that you believe and don't make any firm
commitments or take any firm actions until the fuzziness of
reality lessens back to a level where you feel grounded in it.
For me, this period lasted over three months and landed me
in a mental hospital. In the future we'll have spiritual
hospitals to assist us in these times. Once again, the timing
for the interplay of energy states is set at birth. The most
significant times for various aspects about the individuals
expression can be calculated. Education for individuals can
be planned so that they are prepared for what they will
experience.
Life doesn't have to be difficult. All we need to do to make it
easy is understand something about the basic energies in the
universe, and how we personally interact with them as they
fluctuate over time. Initially, we can use astrology and its
associated calculation to help in assessing where the energies
are. Eventually, we'll be able to intuitively sense the nature
of the energy field around us -- allowing us to discard the
tools. Once again: as above, so below. What we see in the
planet and stars is happening inside us. We need only make
the appropriate mapping of what above symbol corresponds
to what inside symbol. Everything in the universe is Light, is
vibration, is information, is symbol. Astrology provides
useful information to us only when we understand the
meaning behind the symbols. Further, unless it is used in
160
such a way that tailors information to the individual, what it
provides has no real personal value. Horoscopes in the paper
are primarily amusement. Though, each individual does
interpret the symbolic reading in a way that provides
something of value. That is, provided they use their intuition.
Numerology
Numerology reads and interprets the spiritual energies
encoded into sequences of letters or numbers. Numbers are
the basis of all things. Everything is vibration, and all
vibration can be encoded into number. Pythagoras was one
of the earliest numerologists of renown in the western world.
I've found a particular book, Numerology and The Divine
Triangle, by Faith Javane and Dusty Bunker to be
particularly valuable to me. Much about a persons destiny
and character are determined by the combinations of
numbers that make up one's name and birthdate.
This, too, is an area where the meanings are subtle. One must
learn to understand how to interpret symbols in cases where
there are two many variables for the rational mind alone to
handle. The intuition needs to be given free reign to come up
with the appropriate meaning for a specific set of conditions.
I have a strong background in mathematics, so I find that
numerology is a useful way for me to begin my
interpretation of the symbols in my world. It's as if this
method is just natural to who and what I am. You may or
may not find it useful to you as a way of perception that you
use. However, I would advise checking your numbers
yourself or employing the services of a good numerologist.
Everyone should understand what parts of their character can
be revealed through an assessment of only a few key pieces
of information.
Tarot
161
The tarot is a completely symbolic form of information that
has meaning on many levels. The is a major arcana of 22
archetypes, and 56 additional cards arranged as four suits of
14 each. The archetypes are parts of the psyche. The soul
includes all of them. One of the goals for self-realization is
realizing that each of us personally is all 22 of these. I had
my first realization of this only a few months ago. It changed
the very core of my experience and knowledge of who and
what I am. To the ego, the experience was a death. What I
was died, and I was now something new -- something
capable of a level of awareness that I did not know existed
before. It's one thing to intellectually understand something.
It quite another to experience it and know that it is true to the
very core of one's being.
Tarot readings can provide information about a variety of
things. The tarot is an oracle consulted when we want to
know something. Selection of cards in a reading is dictated
by the unseen energy fields to provide the requested
information. However, the information is symbolic, hence
must be interpreted. The quality of a reading is determined
partly by how well the medium understands the meanings of
the cards and partly by how well the medium tunes into the
individuals energy.
My preferred way of using the tarot is through numerology. I
convert symbols to numbers from one to seventy-eight, then
use the mappings from these numbers to tarot cards as called
out in the numerology book previously recommended.
Enneagram
This comes from Sufi teachings. The enneagram breaks
people out into nine personality types. I believe it is a useful
way of categorizing people's personality. It allows
individuals to understand more about how they operate in the
world, by themselves and interacting with others. The
enneagram also includes a moving aspect that identifies a
162
path of integration and disintegration for each personality
type.
When interacting with others it is useful to know not only
your type, but theirs as well. We can choose to act as any of
the types if we need to in order to facilitate communication.
Our basic type is the one that is preferred, our home so to
speak. As with the tarot, however, we are truly all types in
one. Self- realization requires this understanding as well.
Soul Ages and Types
The Michael Teachings explain the concepts of soul ages and
soul types. There are seven soul ages with seven levels in
each age. There are also seven soul types with a variety of
things called overleaves that color the type. The Michael
Handbook is one of the best places to start for learning about
this. You should be able to figure out your type and soul age
using that book. Otherwise, you may want to get in touch
with one of the Michael channels in the San Francisco Bay
Area to have them do a reading of this for you.
The soul age and soul type tell us a lot about why we're here
this time, what we do, and what we are learning. The
overleaves further qualify this information adding important
detail. As with all other information, use what rings true,
what feels right to you.
Soul age in particular makes one of the biggest differences.
If you've reached this far, you're probably an old soul.
Otherwise, you would not have had enough openness to stick
it out this far or to even start this journey. Until one is
through with the drama and intensity and mature soul
existence, one does not focus much activity on spiritual
development.
Personality Type
The Briggs-Myer test categorizes one into one of sixteen
basic personality types but provides scores that differentiate
163
people to a much finer level. These types are based on work
first done by Jung. I've found that most of the people that I
know who are heavily into metaphysics are xNxx, strongly
intuitive types. I tested as INT/FP. Introvert, intuitive, evenly
thinking/feeling, and perceptive. This should not surprise
anyone that is still with me.
If you haven't had this test done, it is worth giving it a try.
From the descriptions in psychology books you can probably
guess your type, but the numbers give you the additional
insight of how strongly you fall into one side or the other for
each of the four dimensions.
Rays
My understanding is that we have a soul ray, a personality
ray, and than other rays for our various bodies. These rays
correspond to a frequency of vibration that is one of seven
basic ways that divine energy expresses through us.
At this point in time, the soul ray is most important. It tells
us our major soul grouping. Mine is two, the ray of
Love/Wisdom.
I believe it is time for the members of each soul grouping to
join together. At the very least, this needs to be through
information exchange and creating a network of the souls
within each individual grouping. Each grouping needs to be
responsible for figuring out what work it is here to do for the
whole and how best to do that work. To be an effective
member of the group, however, each individual must be
acting from soul -- i.e. must be self-realized to a high degree.
If you're interested in the rays, I recommend Tapestry of The
Gods. It has the clearest exposition of this material that I
have found. My emphasis in going through it was to get a
general understanding overall, and a specific confirmation of
my own ray make-up so I don't recall much of it except for
the overall impression of the quality of the work.
164
If you are a fellow soul on the ray of Love/Wisdom please
contact me so that I can start the process of building a
network. As more about why I'm doing this is revealed to
me, I'll pass the information on. Remember, however, you
are free to do as you will with any information. Make sure
you check everything out with your own internal forces. For
spiritual information, do what it takes to get the experience
so that you know. Knowing goes beyond sensing, feeling,
and thinking. These three can point the way, but they are not
the true experience, awareness itself.
As we move toward the Aquarian Age, it will be more and
more important to know one's ray makeup. This is a key
piece of information in determining where each of us fits in
the overall scheme of things. All seven rays will have to be
established strongly on Earth. In addition, connections
between each of the rays will be required. All will have to be
aligned in an appropriate manner to create the seed from
which a new consciousness will be born.
Auras
We have talked about energy fields that are around us, and
the subtle bodies. Some people have the ability to see the
energy fields around us in a way that their brain maps to
colors. I have not seen these colors but I have been to two
different ladies who not only see the colors but have
developed an ability to interpret what the colors mean. The
colors they see are quite different both in terms of the
specific colors and what these colors mean. I'll use my own
case as an example.
• Nancy Ann Tappe, a psychic from San Diego, saw
my major color bands as violet, yellow, violet. She
interpreted this to signify that I was an old soul, and
had a warrior nature. She also told me that my eternal
pattern was Peace. I now believe that at least the first
two colors she sees corresponding to soul and
165
personality are the same as the rays. I'm a two soul,
five personality. If we number the colors:
o 1: indigo
o 2: purple
o 3: blue
o 4: green
o 5: yellow
o 6: orange
o 7: red
then my colors come out 2, 5, 2 agreeing with my ray

makeup. Nancy sees many more than these three
bands, however.
• Geraldine Stringer, a psychic from Palm Springs, saw
my colors as purple, double green, triple blue, brown
with the purple and one of the blues repressed when
she saw me two years ago. She sees the colors as
corresponding to abilities and can tell what a person
is here to do. The particular shades of colors provide
further distinctions of abilities so she gets quite
specific in her details during her readings. I was
blown away. The material from a two hour recorded
reading transcribed into nearly 30 pages of single
spaced typed material. This material is still relevant
today.
Recently, I went through a major spiritual awakening
and felt the need to confirm what I intuitively knew
had happened. I went to her for a second reading and
found that the two repressed colors were no longer
repressed. She was blown away this time, because
she hadn't seen anyone make such a dramatic change
166
so quickly. Since she also reads colors from
photographs, we were able to narrow the window of
change to nine months. Further, my own awareness
was that the entire change occurred in a three month
period.
Purple is the Vision color, it has a strong spiritual
focus. The greens and the blues deal with healing,
communication, and creativity. The brown signifies
world impact. Prior to seeing Geraldine, I had already
had various insights about my purpose in life, and I
knew a lot about my abilities. The readings
confirmed what I knew, but they also taught me that
everything that we are is constantly broadcast around
us in our energy bands. These are reacted to
subconsciously by everyone we meet. Some special
people have the capabilities to consciously perceive
these bands. Privacy is the main reason that most of
us don't see them. We are never given abilities until
we are at a level where we understand the need to use
them responsibly. At least, such is how it works for
higher level abilities.
I highly suggest having your aura read, if this interests you.
The confirmation of your own self-knowledge is great
feedback. And fully realizing that these energies are truly
emanating from you is a dramatic event. One realizes that
there is no privacy, ever. Consciousness knows all, and
everything you think and feel is being broadcast, regardless
of whether you say anything out loud or take any physical
action. Your thoughts and feelings hit the subtle bodies of
everyone in your vicinity -- actually space may be no
obstacle either.
FINAL THOUGHTS
167
Read the great thoughts of the ages. Keep those that are most
meaningful in close reach, where you can see them and
reflect upon them each day. The more you do this, the sooner
you'll be able to generate your own and the better humanity
will be. Consciousness grows whenever any individual
creates anything new, and thoughts are one of the highest
form of objects that we can create -- that is, great thoughts. A
quote from Thoreau hangs to the left of me as I write this:
I know of no more encouraging fact than the
unquestionable ability of a man to elevate his life by
a conscious endeavor. It is something to be able to
paint a particular picture, or to carve a statue, and
so make a few objects beautiful; but it is far more
glorious to carve and paint the very atmosphere and
medium through which we look, which morally we
can do. To affect the quality of the day, that is the
highest of art.
This is one of the rewards of consciously working on
knowing ourselves. At some point we get to carve and paint
the structure through which we create and view reality itself.
Spiritual transformation or awakening happens each time we
expand our sense of "I" to include more of what was "not I".
Remember we are on a journey to ONE. ONE has no
separations or boundaries. It is only because our awareness is
limited that such boundaries exist and that we find we are
separated into us and the outside world.
It is very useful to define what you are, exploring all the
limits to yourself. Notice what you feel responsible for, and
what the universe outside of you is responsible for. Notice
where you feel that your body ends, where you mind begins
and ends. Find out what assumptions you have taken for
granted and determine whether they support you or hinder
you. Ask yourself some basic questions:
168
• Where do your thought come from and where do they
go?
• How much free will do you really have?
• What part of your life is a role in a play?
• When you speak or write, are you really aware of

what is coming next?
• Is the air that I will breathe in ten minutes a part of
me?
• Am I truly the same person from moment to
moment?
• Have I had any experiences where my ego died and
was born again?
That's enough to get started. Make knowing yourself the
top priority in your life. It is that important! The more
you do so, the more you will be able to be what you truly
are. And, with that, all consciousness prospers. Become
enlightened, and allow your Light to shine that all may see
whom that you are, spirit enfleshed to the greatest degree
possible for you at this time.
169
CHAPTER 12
WHEN LOVE CONQUERS ALL: LIVING FROM THE

HEART
It's appropriate that as I write this Christmas is only five
days away, for Christ was the supreme example of what
living from the Heart is all about. At some point in our
development we must truly realize that the nature of
consciousness itself is UNCONDITIONAL LOVE. As our
conscious awareness increases, we too begin to display this
natural characteristic.
In my understanding, the heart is the seat of the soul. It is the
organ through which we are most in touch with our true
reality as spirit in flesh. It too is the center where our passion
for life and for our true work can be found. The heart is the
place that knows. Our physical bodies sense, our conscious
and subconscious minds think and feel, but it is the heart that
truly knows. The pump that drives blood through our system
in reality drives life through our system as well.
So, what does it take to live from the heart?
Courage, Trust, Faith, Forgiveness, Compassion,
Truthfulness, Kindness
That's a good list to start from. Let's take each one by one:
• Courage is required because we have to let go of our
illusions that the world is an unsafe place where we
have to be on-guard and watching out for ourselves
all the time. Also, we may fail in our attempts to
follow our hearts bidding, but we must persist
anyway.
• Trust is required both in ourselves and in others.
Without trust, we have no true basis for treating one
another with the true dignity and respect we
rightfully deserve. Also, some of the things our heart
170
tells us will not necessarily be pleasant to our
thoughts and emotions -- resulting in potential battles
between the head and the heart.
• Faith is required because some of the things our
hearts tell us may have no factual basis to support
them. Only faith will get us through and allow us to
express these admonitions of our heart anyway. Also,
faith is required for the communication of the heart to
become a regular mode of expression to us.
• Forgiveness is required because others may do things
out of ignorance that may harm us, harm themselves,
or harm others. We must know that such acts are
always performed due to a lack of light or
consciousness. Literally, those who commit such acts
know not what they do. If God can forgive them, who
are we to place blame?
• Compassion is required because while all is
consciousness, and all are souls in flesh, many are in
dire conditions. While it may be illusion from a soul
standpoint, it is very real from the point of the person
experiencing the conditions. No, we do not have to
step in their shoes. But, we should be open to their
pain and suffering -- assisting where we can,
especially when our hearts move us to help.
• Truthfulness is required because it allows us to
express whom that we really are. Without this, we
hold back a part of ourselves that we might prefer to
hide from others. Sharing who we truly are is a key to
allowing love to flow through us. No blocks, no
barriers. We are consciousness in flesh, perfect and
complete as we are. We must express the truth,
regardless of what the consequences might be.
• Kindness is a basic requirement. It is only natural
that we should be kind to one another and not do
171
anyone any harm. It is one of the most important
behaviors to be inculcated within any society.
Without kindness, the very foundation of society
crumbles.
These alone aren't enough, however. There must also be a
level of spiritual awareness and understanding. Otherwise,
what is done affects the surface only. For love to conquer all,
requires a depth of comprehension about the true reality, the
reality that lies just beyond our grasp -- the reality that
separates the present world from the utopia that lies just
beyond imagination. We're at the threshold of a new age, the
Age of Aquarius. The dawning started some 30 years ago in
the 1960s -- the dawn has not yet arrived, however, though it
grows closer everyday. It is not clear exactly when the day
will come, but it will indeed come, and when it does, the
dawn will be glorious beyond compare; and a new day of
consciousness will have finally arrived after a Play that's
taken us 2000 years from the days when the Christ roamed
the world in flesh. He was the example of what we all were
to become prior to the close of the Piscean Age -- the age in
which we now live.
Looking around the world today, it appears we are far from
achieving this in reality. However, look beyond the
appearances to consciousness, to the collective worldview
that our best and brightest minds on the planet are beginning
to create. Many of the latest theories and models coming
from science are starting to take on a spiritual flavor, as is the
latest philosophy of mind. Both are sounding closer and
closer to what metaphysicians have been saying for years.
We're realizing that consciousness impacts physical reality.
As we get more and more minds focused on this, science will
find ways to measure the various energy fields through
which consciousness works within physical reality.
Also, it will become more and more apparent that not only
does consciousness affect matter, it creates all of reality.
172
Metaphysics will become a respected branch of knowledge.
Consciousness workers at the frontiers of understanding will
have to move further out to Meta-Metaphysics, the next
major challenge for our intelligence.
Living from the heart, one joyfully does what one came to
this existence to do. One realizes that it is all a game, a play
of consciousness, and has fun with it. One enjoys one's part
and fulfills one's duty. One stays awake and awaits the dawn,
touching any who cross one's path with the unconditional
love of one's center in consciousness. When one lapses and
falls asleep awhile, one works to awaken in any way one can.
The many are asleep. They have been for 2000 years. A few
have found the way to wake up and have experienced
glimpses of what is to be. More and more are beginning to
awaken -- and learning to remain awake.
But, it is still night. So, remaining awake can be a difficult
task. But the dawn is coming. Thoreau speaks of this:
The millions are awake enough for physical labor; but
only one in a million is awake enough for effective
intellectual exertion, only one in a hundred millions to
a poetic or divine life. To be awake is to be alive ... We
must learn to reawaken and keep ourselves awake, not
by mechanical aids, but by an infinite expectation of
the dawn.
Interesting. In a country of 250 million, by Thoreau's
estimate, there are only 250 people awake enough for
"effective intellectual exertion". That's 250 in all of the
United States! I believe that with the proximity of our time to
the Dawn, there are many more than that and the numbers
are growing rapidly. At some point we will reach a critical
mass that is sufficient for consciousness to close this act of
the play and let the new act begin. The setting will still be
Earth, but the stage may be new -- and our parts will be quite
different than they were.
173
To start with, pay more attention to what your heart tells you.
Don't let the logic of your head overrule what you know to
be right. Right action is a key principle that must be followed
for love to truly flow. Right is not right because society says
so. It is right because spirit or consciousness say so. As an
aware individual, it is up to you to find that part within you
that knows right from wrong. I believe this is within every
individual, and I know it's within me.
Remember, much of what I believe to be true in general is an
abstraction of what I know to be true for me. One knows
through experience. If a belief has no result in experience, it
has no value. The true test of any belief is in its utility.
The true test of whether you're on the right path is how
happy you are and how much unconditional love flows
through you to others. It can flow physically in interactions,
or in what you create that is of service to others. The work of
Masters throughout the ages is distinguished by the amount
of love that went into their work. The more love you put in,
the more beauty that results. There is no other secret to great
work -- it is Love, Love, Love.
Whatever work you do, do it with love. Treat everyone with
kindness and respect. Remember the attitude that goes with
the word Namaste, and take that attitude with all souls that
cross your path. Above all, remember whom that you truly
are and allow that gusher of unconditional love that dwells
within you to flow freely out into the world knowing that the
source from which it comes is none other than
Consciousness itself.
NAMASTE.
CONCLUSION
174
In the beginning of the book, I promised to take you on a
journey that I believed would change you forever. What I
didn't know was that my journey of writing the book would
do this for me as well.
You see, when I started two years ago around Christmas, I
was quite sure of myself and thought I knew my metaphysics
pretty well. In the entire first year, all that came through was
the table of contents and foreword. Around Christmas last
year, the introduction and first chapter came through. It
wasn't until mid-November that I finally had sufficient
experience to bring forth the rest of this book. As I write this,
it is now Dec 20, 1993. I can hardly believe that the bulk of a
non-fiction book came through my fingers and consciousness
part time in a six week period. Yet, here it is in front of my
eyes. I watched it grow page by page.
I hope my Vision of a New World Order didn't frighten you. I
don't know what part of this will come true. I only know that
this information is the best guidance that I could bring
through at this time. Hopefully, it's a world that leaves a
positive impression in your mind, a world that you would
like to be part of someday. Even better, a world that you
might want to help create. There is much that can be done.
The truth is that we can do anything if we focus sufficient
talent and resources toward getting it done. Cooperative
interdependence is the key.
We create our own reality. The time has come for us to
assume our rightful roles and start doing the jobs we came
into this existence to do. Remember, however, that things are
easier to do in consciousness first -- then we can translate the
results into the more dense physical stuff.
175
Do that which you love! Such is the directive of spirit. No

fine print. No exceptions. And, do it now -- and always. Once
you are given the knowingness, you cannot fall back into
ignorance. Thy destiny must be manifest. For, the fate of the
world is intertwined with the destiny of each individual.
Each of you has the power to change your world, to enhance
it in ways that go beyond your wildest imaginings. What you
do and how you do it makes all the difference. You are that
powerful, for ye are of God -- gods in flesh, the creators of
your reality, the masters of your fate!
Be Happy and Create Well!
In Peace, Love and Light,
Wayne
176
REALITY CREATION
1010
177
REALITY CREATION 1010

by
Wayne Hartman
26 Dec 93 - 4 Jan 94
FOREWORD
Chapter 1: Introduction to Reality : A New Look
Chapter 2: So, What is Reality Creation?
Chapter 3: On Models and Paradigms
Chapter 4: The Brain as a Computer
Chapter 5: The Whole Body as a Robot
Chapter 6: Multiple Bodies and Energy Fields
Chapter 7: Symbolic Information Systems
Chapter 8: Life as a Play of Consciousness
Chapter 9: Who Are We, Really?
Chapter 10: Our Collective Self, the Universal Body
CONCLUSION
178
FOREWORD
So, who am I to be audacious enough to begin to believe that

I can write a book on a topic such as this? At first glance,
I'm a 35 year old engineer diagnosed as bipolar with a bunch
of bills and insufficient income to pay them. I live in
Monterey, and commute over 80 miles each way to work in
Sunnyvale, something I've been doing for over four years.
Recently, I began sleeping 3 days per week in my van in the
parking lot at work -- because I could no longer tolerate the
commute yet still needed the weekly paycheck; but also,
because I needed to free up some time for writing about the
stuff inside of me that feels like it's about to explode.
I've spent 20 years involved in a personal spiritual search,

primarily through metaphysics. I've probably read more
books than most people read in a lifetime. Further, I've
engaged my mind in thinking about various metaphysical
principles often and deeply because such activity is one of
the greatest pleasures of my life. As a result, my
understanding is far superior to my years. No, I haven't used
my understanding to eliminate problems in my life,
especially monetary ones, mainly because I cannot do so and
remain within my integrity. There are many techniques that
can be used for the gain of one at the cost of others. These
are not acceptable to my consciousness, hence I cannot use
them. The only true key I've found to abundance, is that
when you are doing work you truly love in line with your
purpose, the universe will bestow its great abundance unto
you. As of yet, I have not been doing this long enough to see
the results come forth. I believe that this work that I am now
doing is the work of spirit. Much that comes through will be
new to me as I write it. Yes, the work will incorporate all of
my talents, training, and understanding; but, it will do so in a
manner that is fresh -- that includes connections beyond any
that I have previously made.
179
As I write this, I'm excited about what lies ahead. Books are
trips for the mind. The ideas they convey provide us with
internal revelations and experiences that can change us
forever. They can point out new ways of seeing things that
alter our very reality. As the writer, I get an even more
intense experience than you the reader. For you see, my
consciousness must experience the meaning of the words
before it is allowed to express them. At least such has been
my experience over the past year or so.
One of the main reasons my consciousness is being used for

this task is that I have a balance between scientific and
metaphysical backgrounds. It seems it is time to start
looking at various metaphysical teachings regarding the
nature of reality using more of the scientific method, yet at
the same time being open to the nature of beliefs and
allowing more subjective validation of the utility of the
resulting models. It's as if both science and metaphysics
have reached the limits of where they can truly go on their
own. Their union is required to propel knowledge further by
allowing the best and the brightest on the planet to use all of
their resources in pursuit of knowledge and Truth. The
power that can be unleashed is enormous. The inventions
and the results that will come from the union will be beyond
imagination.
To some degree, this marriage of science and metaphysics

already exists within my mind. It has taken over 20 years for
the gestation however, since it is only recently that concepts
have started to be born within my mind that truly involve
both parents. Science and metaphysics were both a part of
my life. One was my occupation, the other my passion and
preoccupation. Now, I'm starting to see that both are integral
to my life, both will be required for me to progress further so
that I can finally do the work I came to the planet to do. This
work involves the communication of a vision of what the
world will be in the Age of Aquarius, and to start to bring
180
forth the ideas and methods necessary for the building the
foundation for this new world.
Big task for someone who is only 35. Maybe, but someone's
got to do it. One of my friend's once told me, "In the times
ahead, if you see a task to be done, and you have the right
abilities, then it's probably yours to do." Lately, I've taken an
attitude that involves doing what I know to be my tasks.
After all, what's there to lose. If I don't succeed, I'll have
learned some tremendous lessons anyway. If I do succeed,
I've given those who thought I wouldn't a whole lot to think
about. Besides, the ultimate fate is in accord with the Plan. I
can only do what I believe that it calls for me to do. From
the flow of this writing, my sense is that this be it, at least for
the moment. All we can do is let the moment extend to the
Eternal NOW. All that happens will happen as it unfolds in
that one moment.
This book is titled Reality Creation 1010. Even though it

deals with basic principles, this is far beyond what mere
introductions of the 101 variety bring to people. Also, we
feel that this topic itself is definitely graduate material.
Those reading this are preparing to graduate into the Age of
Aquarius -- a level beyond your wildest imagining. In
addition, 1010 is 10|10 = 22, 1|010 = 12, |1010 = 10. All
three of these numbers have a hidden significance. Twenty-
two is the completion of the cycle through the major arcana
of the Tarot. Our hope is to attempt to impart knowledge
corresponding to that level of awareness. Twelve is the
completion number of the pyramid of man (physical,
emotional, mental, and spiritual sides). Ten is another type
of completion of man, one step beyond the enneagram.
Further, reality creation is a topic for beings who are
rediscovering their true nature as the gods/goddesses that
they are.
The truth is we create our own reality. We do it all the

time, both personally and en masse. This book attempts to
181
explain how this is done, by proposing a series of models as
conceptual frameworks that explain various aspects of what
is created to various degrees. It does not prove that these
models are valid, but it does provide criteria for evaluating
utility of the various models in your own life. We are
breaking new ground here, trying to talk in a scientific way
about things that have been outside the realm of science.
However, this attempt is necessary at this time so that
appropriate energy can be applied to thinking in new ways
about one of the most intimate and important topics around -
the very nature of how we create reality.
182
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION TO
REALITY: A NEW LOOK
Before we get to reality creation, we had better take a look at

reality itself and define exactly what we mean. And I don't
mean pull out Webster’s. If you're reading this, you've
existed long enough that you should have a reasonable
concept of what constitutes reality. Anyway, I'm going to
assume this is true for myself and provide what comes to
mind in this area as a basis for the discussion in this chapter.
The consensus belief is that reality is the world outside us,

the world that we touch with our senses, an objective thing
that is the same for all of us. Reality is the stuff that science
can deal with. Occasionally, it stretches into our very bodies,
but only on terms that science can understand objectively.
Whenever we cross the objective/subjective boundary, we
start leaving the realm where conventional reality dwells.
Part of reality lies in the organization and structures of the

things that are within reality. Part of this includes the
behavior and mores of the society. In addition, feelings and
emotional states are allowed a place as well, but on fuzzier
ground, and primarily as tied to specific physical conditions.
Psychology and psychiatry are still relatively primitive ways
for dealing with the complexities of emotional and mental
behavior.
The difference between fantasy and reality often resorts to

looking at what is out there in the "real world". The external
world is treated as the truth or the standard. The images in
our minds are representations of this reality and may be
distorted from the real thing.
I find it difficult to deal with a view of reality that separates

itself from the consciousness that experiences this reality.
183
From the point of view of an individual, there is an inner and
an outer reality. The outer reality includes everything I sense
with my senses, including others that appear to be as I am.
The inner reality is one of thoughts, feelings, models about
the world, and models about myself. The inner reality is the
one that is the most prominent. It is where the majority of
life is lived. Then again, this may be because I'm an
introvert. I don't have the experience to know whether
extroverts see life this way. Regardless, these two level of
reality exist, and it is the experience of the individual that
determines the ultimate nature of reality.
There is an argument against this. It would say that if one is

perceiving reality incorrectly, then what one is seeing is not
reality but a distortion. The idea being that the distortion of
the instrument perceiving bears nothing on the nature of the
object of perception. It's a nice little argument really, until
one considers that all of our sensors are instruments as well
-- instruments with biases and filters that allow us to see the
world in the way we do. For instance, our eyes behave as
bandpass filters that emphasize higher frequency
components. This allow us to see edges and changes much
more sharply, resulting in an image that is of greater utility to
us in interacting with the world. Scientists can back off the
impacts of this filtering to find out what the world "truly"
looks like. When they do, the result is much more blurry --
literally, the world that we would see would be much
different. From many standpoints, it would be different
enough that we might call it a different world. What would
be our reality then? Is it what we perceive or is there really
an objective reality out there independent of a perceiver?
Also, what about those who are blind? Clearly, their reality is
different from those who are sighted. But, how different is it
really? What happens when one cannot perceive things that
the consensus humanity perceives? In the case of the blind
person, suppose he develops his other senses to compensate
for the lack of sight. He is developing his senses in a manner
that any other might assuming that they had sufficient
184
discipline. The result is being able to perceive different
aspects of the world that many never sense. Yet, this is
reality too. It is perceived. Sensors suitably calibrated could
theoretically detect the subtle inputs. But it is the mind of
the perceiver that translates this all into meaning.
This is an important question. To what does reality apply?

We would argue that it applies to a being of intelligence
experiencing its existence, period. Reality is what that being
experiences. Our concepts of reality should thus include all
that this encompasses. We might take this one step higher
and also consider a group of intelligent beings experiencing
their existence in a shared world. The Earth and Nature
appear to be common components of reality that apply to
everyone yet are outside of anything that we create in our
heads. Many other components exist primary as constructs
that we believe and use to explain things.
Maybe we should consider reality to occur at levels of

existence. Rocks, minerals, and inanimate things occur at
one level. Flora, fauna, and the abundance of nature occur at
another level. Man occurs at still another -- where
consciousness starts to abide more fully. That is,
consciousness can potentially abide more fully.
All levels of reality exist, but only some are relevant to us in

considering the nature of reality creation. Science has
uncovered theories for how much of the basic stuff came into
existence. These may or may not be correct. Focused HERE
and NOW, much of it has little importance anyway. The
bottom line is that there is a given amount of physical stuff
from which to construct forms at any of these levels. Nature
uses much of the stuff in ecosystems that provide an
incredible diversity of plant and animal life. Further, nature
sculpts the lands in incredible ways via a handful of basic
operations used in a variety of ways. Here, too, science has
its theories although even such basic things as weather show
incredible complexity.
185
Personally, I believe in the power of simplicity. Truth should

be expressed succinctly and easily when it has been rightly
and fully understood. Where great complexity is required to
explain something, the keys have not yet been found to
unlock the complexity.
Everything comes down to meaning, the meaning of

experiences in our lives. Our inner world thrives on such
meaning. We constantly evaluate what the things, events,
and experiences in our lives represent. What do they really
mean? On the one hand reality involves what something is.
On the other hand reality involves what something means.
Yep, what it is and what it means. Those are the two main
issues. Now we can ask a series of questions:
What are physical objects?

What do physical objects represent?
What is life?
What meaning does life have?
What is nature?
What meaning does nature have?
What are emotions?

What meaning do emotions have?
What are thoughts?

What meaning do thoughts have?
What are humans?

What meaning do humans have?
What is consciousness?
What meaning does consciousness have?
186
Thus far, science has addressed the first three sets in detail,
and the next four only in limited areas from limited
perspectives. However, science is typically very light when
it comes to dealing with the issue of meaning. This is
typically left as a matter for religion. The major reason for
this is that answering the what question is usually sufficient
to being able to use knowledge in ways that "benefit"
mankind.
From another standpoint, reality is you and the worlds in

which you exist. These worlds include the physical world,
the emotional world, the mental world, and the spiritual
world. The outer world is primarily the physical world
though it also includes exchanges with other beings at the
emotional, mental, and spiritual levels. From the world
standpoint, it is useful to know what objects exist in each
world and how those objects behave. In addition to know
what interchanges happen between worlds, and what
correspondences appear between objects and interactions in
different worlds. For instance, particular emotions may
always result in the same body conditions such as breathing
rate, blood pressure, heart rate. They may also be tied to the
same types of thoughts as well. From that standpoint, there
is truly one interrelated world -- though it is useful at times
to talk about it as if it had separate component parts.
OK, so where does meaning come into the picture?

Ultimately, reality for an individual is the meaning that one
gets from one's experiences.
I'm a monk living in a dark cave. Reality has little to do with

the physical senses and everything to do with emotions,
thoughts, and spiritual experiences. For all practical
purposes, the physical world is illusion -- possessing much
less force within my awareness than the visions that may be
played out in my mind.
187
I'm a person from a small town with a limited education who
has never ventured outside of my own town. My world is
relatively small, confined to a limited geographic area. It
matters not that there is a large city 200 miles away. For all I
truly know, that is mere fantasy. In fact, I may have a hard
time believing that the world is other than flat. My
experience is that I travel in straight lines, and I don't see far
enough to force my reasoning to think in any other manner. I
may know quite alot about the woods, farmland, streams,
vegetation, and wildlife in my particular area but I haven't
extended this to a concept of nature encompassing the entire
planet.
I'm a rocket scientist. I know the laws of physics and many

of the laws of chemistry. I know the Earth is a sphere and
that there are other planetary bodies out there. I know that I
can use the physical laws to calculate the orbit for any rocket
I design. Much of my knowledge about the world is mental,
not from direct experience, but from reading the results of
the experiences of others. Most of these results have been
confirmed by multiple sources adding to their credibility. I
live and work in a primarily mental world, a world where
concepts about the physical world are discussed.
Occasionally we get an opportunity for a physical
experiment to bring back new data.
I'm a psychic who sees auras, and makes my living doing

readings for people. I see bands of color around my clients
which over many years I learned to interpret. These color
bands appear around other living things as well. To see these
bands clearly, I have learned to alter my state of awareness
slightly so that my eyes perceive differently. These energy
bands convey information about health, abilities, significant
occurrences, and other history information about each
person. People are dynamic information systems or energy
systems that broadcast their energy to the world constantly.
188
These a just a few examples. Look how different reality is
for these four individuals. Literally, the reality they
experience is different. All would have a hard time really
relating to any of the others. It's not a matter of which one of
them is correct. They all are. The problem is the one of
blind men and the elephant. Reality is the large and intricate
thing. We are blind men with a few sensors and a brain in
which we create the conceptual context to make sense of our
experience. Because we only need enough of a context to
explain the parts of the world that we personally interact
with, each of us creates our own and refines it as we go
through life. Part of this framework is created as models,
and part as a belief system. We typically change the
framework only when confronted by sufficient evidence
which does not fit.
The bottom line from this is that reality is truly something

beyond which we can completely describe. There are many
parts to it, each of which various disciplines can describe and
define. But our knowledge is insufficient to even attempt to
describe the whole, yet. We have to be satisfied with that
part we can describe. When we talk about reality creation in
this book, we limit ourselves to that part of reality that is
personal, the part we experience as individuals and as groups
of human beings. Science has already explored much of the
physical world and nature, so we'll stay away from those
areas and focus more on the nature of personal reality,
primarily those aspects that we experience in our head,
though we may also get into our bodies a bit.
Personal reality primarily involves the meaning that we give

to things and events in our lives and how we respond or react
to this meaning. It deals with what we see and why we see
it, what we feel and why we feel it, what we think and why
we think it, what we know and why we know it, and what we
do and why we do it. These are some pretty heavy topics,
but at the same time this is everyday stuff, so it shouldn't
take a PhD to figure it out. After all, each of us do these
189
things (see, feel, think, know, do) in the course of each and
every day.
This is the bulk of where reality lies. How do I know this?

Simply because this is what we spend most of our time
doing. It is only logical that reality would be found where
the bulk of our existence is found. If not, we live most of
our lives in unreality or illusion. That might make sense if
you subscribe to eastern philosophy and religions or if you're
committed to "A Course in Miracles", but for the masses in
the west, this is a rough one to take. Personally, I'd prefer to
believe that our current experience is real -- it is the reality
we are experiencing. Whether this is the true reality is
another matter that is left to spirituality. The reason for
wanting to understand reality creation is twofold: first, to
allow us to make this one better for ourselves and others;
second, to allow us to understand more of what the true
reality is like.
Some things about reality are common. They provide a

common background environment in which we can all
experience our personal reality and interact with others.
Other parts of reality are private -- the things in our heads or
in the places that we keep closed and guarded from others.
Both are important. For me, the private part has been the
most important, however this is starting to shift. Overall, I
believe the outer has been far more important than the inner
for far too long. We embarked on the scientific adventure in
the early 1600's and have been pursuing it relentlessly for
400 years. In that pursuit, we've focused strictly on
explaining as much of the outer world as we could using the
scientific method. The hope was that by understanding this
world we would better understand ourselves. It is not clear
that we've achieved this. One only has to go back to
Socrates and Plato to find basic questions that could be asked
by the Ancient Greeks yet still cannot be answered even with
all of our science and technology. The problem is that these
disciplines deal with entirely different parts of the elephant
190
that we call reality. We have small disciplines in the social
sciences that have attempted some work in the areas we are
concerned with, but the successes have been relatively few,
and the models relatively shallow. Much of this is due to
lack of resources and funding. We get what we focus upon.
If we want answers in particular areas, we need to get quality
people and apply them to the task at hand for as long as it
takes to get results.
One of the most complex machines on the planet is the

human brain. Yet, we have very few people truly studying it
to understand how it works. Don't get me wrong, there is
much more research now than there has even been. Also, it
is not an easy task. Essentially, we are asking a machine to
understand itself -- but, this is what self-awareness is all
about. And, self-awareness is one of the key behaviors that
must be included within the definition of reality. The key
reason for this is that shifts in the level of awareness change
the very nature of reality that is experienced by the
individual, and many times, change it permanently. Any
concept of reality that does not encompass these kinds of
reality shifts -- does not deal with the most important aspects
of personal reality.
We experience reality every moment of every day, both

while asleep and while awake. However, we have another
reality as an observer who watches our activities as we
perform them -- physical, mental, and emotional activities.
When we experience ourselves as this observer, we are
operating from a spiritual standpoint that is as much a part of
our reality as any other. It's interesting, we can be doing,
feeling, thinking, and watching simultaneously as if one
point in all four of our bodies were merged together at once.
This, too, is part of our experience -- at least for those of us
who have achieved this level of awareness. It's almost like a
game, with our state of consciousness determining the level
we have achieved. I don't even begin to know how many
levels there are. Further, I refuse to discuss levels beyond
191
those I have experienced. I have read of others, but until I
personally experience them, they are as fantasy to me.
Actually, provided I have confidence in the author, they are
treated as likely possibilities.
Regardless of the number of levels or their structure relative

to one another, it is important to realize that there are several
levels and that each of these levels is just as much a part of
reality as any other. There is still one overall reality, but it is
of such complexity that we are only familiar with the pieces
that we experience regularly. Our growth involves learning
about behavior on the various levels and doing what is
required to achieve higher and higher levels of understanding
and awareness. Awareness involves being able to perceive,
interpret, feel, understand, and create reality. Yes, that's a lot
of stuff. But, reality is that big of a subject. Our awareness
is our primary tool for dealing with reality. Our ego is the
conscious part of our awareness most intimately connected
with reality.
192
CHAPTER 2: SO, WHAT IS REALITY

CREATION?
Reality creation is how reality is constructed. In particular, it

includes how we create the reality we experience as
individuals and en masse. Given the scope of reality
discussed in chapter 1, this is a broad topic as well,
containing many aspects and nuances. Here, we'll provide an
introduction sufficient to establish an overall framework for
further chapters.
Reality creation is what human life is all about. We are

creators, learning of our own true nature. It is through our
experience of reality that we discover that we are creators
and start learning the basics of how we create the reality we
experience. This is basic stuff, but it is not simple stuff. It
takes achievement of a relatively rare level of awareness to
even begin to understand this. Perhaps I should have
mentioned this as a prerequisite for this book. Some things I
just take for granted. Be forewarned, if you are already lost,
maybe you should start somewhere else. I recommend my
previous book, Beyond Imagination: Foundations for
Creating a New World, as a place to start. It provides a
recommended reading list that will provide a thorough
introduction to much that is understood about reality
creation.
As individuals, the general understanding is that reality is

what happens to us. Many believe that they have no control
over it, whatsoever. If you're in this camp I'm not sure you'll
find this book of much use except in presenting alternatives
that you might find sufficiently empowering to start
believing in them. I'm assuming that most readers are
coming in with a basic understanding that we create our own
reality. The Nature of Personal Reality by Jane Roberts is
a great place to start for gaining a background understanding.
193
Creation of the natural background to reality is done

primarily by Nature. Further creation of physical reality is
done via ideas which get translated into the resources and
labor necessary to fabricate the objects required or change
the natural state of the background. This work can be easy
or difficult depending on how attuned it is to natural laws
and principles. Everything that humans create comes first
from the idea or mental picture.
Emotions and ideas are also creations in and of themselves.

They, too, are part of reality -- hence the process for
generating them or bringing them into this existence is
reality creation as well. I would argue that this is one of the
most important areas of reality creation because of it fluidity
and the rapidity with which things can happen.
The bottom line is that reality creation is going on all the

time and we are all participating in it in a most intimate
manner whether we are aware of it or not. In fact, most of us
are not aware of how we are creating reality even though we
know or observe that we are doing so. For instance, few of
us understand where our thoughts originate. They just
appear in our heads. Similarly, we don't know where our
words come from when we speak. We know they come
through our mouths and that we speak them, but we don't
know how this really happens. Similarly, we feel emotions.
Typically, we sense that these surface or arise in reaction to
things going on in our lives, but we don't know exactly how
circumstances trigger emotional and mental states. We know
the body is involved as well via hormones and other
chemical and electrical mechanisms, but the physical effect
is simultaneous with the emotional one.
So, it's obvious that much of reality creation happens at

levels that are outside of our normal conscious awareness.
However, we can become more aware of how this takes
place even though we don't consciously control what is
194
happening. As an analogy, consider a planet. We can
observe the planet in the sky and plot its position over time
to get an understanding of how it moves relative to us. If we
want to know more, we find that it's necessary to create
models of the solar system and equations for planetary
motions. From these equations we are able to plan the
course of objects (satellites) that we design to perform
specific functions. Now, we didn't consciously create the
planets or the natural laws that govern them. However, by
understanding something about the reality that resulted from
that creation, we are then able to consciously create new
things that utilize that understanding to result in a desired
behavior for the satellite.
Science has shown us how to do this amazingly well.

Technology progresses at rates that were undreamed of as a
result. Unfortunately, we have not yet applied these same
methods and laws to our inner reality as well to achieve the
same kinds of results. The major reason for this is one of
resources and attention. For 400 years, we've allowed
science to dominate nearly everything. It has been an innate
part of our worldview for these four centuries, and has been
the dominant part for nearly 100 years. In fact, technology
moves so fast now that it is nearly impossible for society to
keep up with it. Inherently, there is no reason why
consciousness technology can't proceed at a similar pace to
allow us to harness more of the power of our minds.
We've reached a state where information has become

extremely valuable. Some say we are in the midst of the
Information Age. To a large degree this is true. Processing
of information occupies a large part of our lives. It did
anyway, even when it was only sensory types of information.
But now, we live in a conceptual world that we create in our
heads. We use this conceptual world to store information
about the real world and to assess or determine the meaning
of particular events or combinations of circumstances. For
some people, this is a relatively simple model. For others, it
195
is much more complex. Generally, there may be many
models that cover various aspects of the world where the
detail is determined by interest. The bottom line, however, is
that everyone builds models to simplify how they interpret
the complexities of reality. We must be careful however,
because the models we use act like glasses as well, only
allowing particular information from the outside world to get
through.
From the top level perspective, reality includes an outer

world that provides a common background, and a bunch of
individuals who have bodies in the outer world but who
construct their own inner world. These individuals interact
with the outer world and with other individuals but do so
through a finite set of senses and with filters determined by
the inner models they have of their world. One of the major
tasks is for individuals to get their models of the world in
agreement with their observation of the world. Note how
much this sounds exactly like what science has done with the
physical world. We observe and create models that account
for what we see. From a consciousness standpoint, we need
to do the same. We observe what we experience, then
attempt to account for that experience. Personally, I've been
in the midst of some major changes of consciousness. My
motivation in writing this is to take a first cut at explaining
what I've experienced. One side effect of writing this is that
I activate one of the chief operating principles of life:
You Teach Best What You Most Need to Learn.
I believe that came from the Messiah's Handbook in

Illusions: The Adventures of a Reluctant Messiah by
Richard Bach. Heaven knows, this is the most important
thing for me to learn at this time! My belief is that further it
is one of the most important things for all of humanity -- for
it is the very key to the kingdom. It is the step that allows us
to transition consciousness into the Aquarian Age.
196
As you can probably tell, I'm most concerned about reality
creation at the individual level. That is the part that we have
some control over. I'm also interested in reality creation at
the mass level -- because I believe it is the joint individual
creation that results in the outer reality. Also, much of our
personal reality relates to how we interact with our world
including all the other people we deal with. Individual and
mass reality are merged in major ways so that it is nearly
impossible to separate the them in practice. However, there
is still some utility in doing so in theory. Primarily because
it makes our models simpler to understand and use to create
change.
We already create our reality. Yes, every one of us. The

trick is to do so consciously rather than subconsciously or
superconsciously. We want to be aware of what we are
doing. Note: this doesn't mean that events and circumstances
will change. It only means that we'll be more aware of how
things are working and what is going on. Our reality
however will be quite different, because our focus,
interpretation, and understanding will be different.
We live in an elaborately constructed play where the scenes,

events, and symbols make sense no matter what level of
awareness we are at. One of the things that keeps the play
interesting is that we never know what level other people are
at. The bandwidth for communications channels is too short
to convey anything but a minute part of what we are. We are
simply too complex for that. In fact, part of what allows
communication at all, is the assumption that the receiving
party is like unto us, so that we don't have to convey much
background. It's amazing that we're able to communicate at
all. Further, the communications process itself provides
limited opportunity for feedback to see whether our words
convey the desired message. Overall, the process is very
loose. The medium of words is a poor channel for conveying
information, but it is one of the most flexible and useful ones
that we have available to us as individuals. Images and
197
expressions have great informational content as well because
they map to greater levels of organization in the receiving
individuals. Also, the bandwidth of images is higher
allowing information content to be conveyed more quickly.
Part of reality creation involves how we interact with others

in a variety of frameworks and settings. Overall, we believe
that we consciously choose much of how this occurs. We
believe that we have free choice at any points where
decisions are made. There is no basis of fact to show that it
truly works this way. Decision points appear to offer
choices, but we have no way to return to the same point to
see for certain whether an alternate choice could have been
made. We would not be able to detect from the reality that
we perceive whether the choice was executed according to a
script or whether we truly have free choice. From my
vantage point, we do have free choice in these matters, but
we do not consciously execute the choice, we simply enact
the result of what a higher part of ourselves has already
scripted. This distinction is important. One of the highest
goals is Self-awareness. We achieve this by understanding
our true nature as spirit and as a creator of our own reality.
So long as we continue to go through the play as if we
consciously had choices about things, we delay the
realization that there are other components of ourselves
behind the scenes responsible for creating much of what we
experience. It is only when we become aware of these other
parts of ourselves that we grow in consciousness to
understand whom that we are. One of the major lessons in
life is that of my will vs. Thy Will. However, it can't be
learned until one understands my will to begin with. Further,
one must understand that free will operates through it all.
Free will is an interesting aspect of reality creation. Yes, it

always applies. However, it applies to our entire self. We
have the freedom to create, but we are responsible for our
creations as well. We know this at a soul level. We don't
typically know this at the physical consciousness level. It is
198
equally true at all levels, however. Part of how reality is
created is in terms of action/counteraction pairs that show up
as balancing events in our lives. As awareness, we are an
observer of these events riding along for the show so that we
can learn from what we observe. In drawing conclusions,
constructing models, and creating beliefs we set up our
apparatus for understanding ourselves and our world. Part of
this apparatus is about the very nature of ourselves and of
reality. This later part is the area where reality creation
happens. The key mechanism at play is that we get what we
focus on subject to the basic rule of:
As ye sow, so shall ye reap.
Personal responsibility is the first lesson. Closely aligned

with this is the principle of right interaction with others:
Do unto others as you would have them do unto you.
Until these two basic lessons are learned, there is no firm

basis on which fully conscious reality creation can begin to
proceed. Once one has achieved these two, however, an
instinctual yearning for something more begins. Then the
directive:
KNOW THYSELF!
becomes operative and the adventure into understanding the
nature of consciousness and the true nature of reality finally
begins. At this point, one finds that as one's level of
awareness changes, the reality that one experiences changes.
The true reality is consciousness itself, not the experiences of
consciousness. The experiences are but illusions passing on
a screen, illusions with meaning, yes, but illusions none the
less. The problem with this is that achieving and
maintaining an awareness of one's nature as consciousness is
difficult to do when one's beingness is couched in flesh. Yes,
there is a purpose for this. We are learning to be creators of a
higher order. Presently we create reality. And what an
199
elaborate and beautiful reality it is. Overall, our
consciousness is learning to create beings of its own order
couched in its creations to as high as a degree as is possible.
You could say we are attempting to create gods on Earth,
beings truly able to create their own reality consciously. The
key to it all is getting individuals to take the initiative to
know thyself rather than be so immersed in the activity of the
game. Looking around the country and the world today,
clearly this is no easy task. Those of you who are on this
path, congratulations, pursue it to whatever degree you are
able. This is one of the areas where free choice truly reigns.
At any time, anyone can choose to see things differently and
embark on their personal quest for self- knowledge. They
will find that the doors are opened at whatever pace they are
willing to go in their quest -- subject only to what level of
understanding they achieve and their willingness to follow
the signs and take the gifts that their consciousness sends to
them. Note, however, that some lessons take time to unfold.
Why does it work this way? Simply because consciousness is
elegant in how it creates the Play, and events and
opportunities appear per the Play. An individual's free will
determines what shift in awareness occurs as a result of the
scene being played out. The new awareness then lines up
further events and opportunities.
One of the first lessons in knowing thyself is learning that:
We create our reality through our beliefs.
Why is this so? Because beliefs represent our conscious

understanding of ourselves and our world. They filter
everything we perceive and govern how we interpret reality.
Further, since this is such an important lesson, the law of like
attracts like assure that we attract the appropriate events and
circumstances to conform with our beliefs. Occasionally
things will be brought to our attention to get us to question
beliefs that may be in error in an attempt to spur our growth,
200
but typically it is left to us to become interested in knowing
ourselves.
The complexity of the physical instrument comes into play

as well. It is not yet clear what process the brain must go
through to accommodate increasing levels of consciousness
and awareness. Because we are creating physical bodies, the
organization of the brain is a major consideration. It is the
seat of our physical consciousness and to some degree must
be programmed to give it functionality. It's not that all of our
intelligence must reside within the physical body, but enough
of it must be there to allow our consciousness to drive the
body from within the brain. Part of how reality is created is
to partition specific functions out to smaller units of
consciousness so that the greater part of consciousness can
focus on higher levels of functionality and awareness. To
enflesh itself to a greater degree, consciousness must
continually work on its creation in ways that result in
increased ability to accommodate awareness. Consciousness
itself is pure awareness without form. It seeks to express
itself as awareness within form. All of evolution has been an
elaborate experiment in expressing consciousness in form.
Human evolution has been an experiment in creating fully
self-aware life. Dolphins and whales have already achieved
this. We still have a ways to go, but we're getting there
rapidly.
We have complete control over our beliefs. Many may have

been adopted during our childhood, but we are free to
reexamine these and change them at any time. One of our
key methods for controlling the reality we create is by taking
control of our beliefs and adapting them so that they serve us
rather than hinder us. In particular, we need to closely
examine beliefs about who and what we are. These are core
beliefs that define much that we will experience. A second
area of core beliefs involves the basic nature of our world or
our reality. These too need to be closely examined to
201
determine their impact on our experience. A key belief that
is useful is:
We are consciousness housed in a body.
We are not strictly confined to a body. First and foremost,

we are consciousness. Secondly, we are enfleshed in a body.
Yes, this body is important -- but only as the vehicle for
allowing consciousness to be enfleshed. Consciousness can
only be enfleshed to the degree of our awareness of our
nature. The consciousness part of us is not created as the
body is. It enters at some point to drive the biological
machine. All the minute details of body creation are driven
by consciousness in accord with the Plan and with spiritual
laws. In addition, a conscious part of the brain is
programmed to become aware of its identity as "I". The
program is allowed to grow subject to appropriate spiritual
laws. As it grows, some of its activities lead to increased
awareness of itself. First this is reflected as an awareness of
its abilities and talents and awareness of self as doer. As it
becomes more aware, consciousness, as the programmer,
nurtures it further by feeding it reality for it to digest and
draw further conclusions from. At some point the entity
becomes aware of itself as observer, separate from the
awareness that was immersed in physical reality. As it
questions the very nature of itself, it grows ever more aware
until it knows that it is consciousness. At this point it has
truly realized that:
We are in this world, but not of this world.
This world is an illusion, an elaborate one, but an illusion

nonetheless. That doesn't alter the fact that it is reality. It
just means that reality is truly an illusion, just as a movie on
a screen. Also, there is great meaning in the illusion. After
all, the actors are real even if the parts they play are not. In
our world, not only are the actors real, but they don't even
realize they are actors since they are only allowed to
202
experience the play moment by moment. Further, in our
play, the actors must start with a very limited understanding
of who they are and why they are there at all. It makes for a
very interesting challenge.
Because we are in this world, we accept particular rules for

creating reality in accord with spiritual laws and the Play.
Also, we must take care of maintaining basic functions in
accord with the rules for reality creation within the
dimensions in which we operate. Part of this is required
because consciousness is co-creating reality and there must
be an overall consistency in order for individual experiences
to make sense in the context of the Play and the individuals
understanding of reality. Activities involving multiple
individuals must be coordinated for the Play to be enacted
properly.
To make the overall framework for reality even more

challenging we must realize that the lessons at each level are
relative, not absolute. They are not meant to be carried to
extremes and the context in which they operate may be
limited. For instance, we create reality through our beliefs is
only a partial truth. It does not mean necessarily that every
belief will be manifest. Consistency in beliefs is also
needed. Further, if beliefs are in error, reality specifically
may not conform to the belief to point out the error. The
strength of the belief is as important as well. Beliefs with
more emotion and conviction are more likely to be manifest.
Another basic law is:
Laws may change with the level of awareness.
As the level of awareness grows, the place at which

conscious reality creation occurs changes and the
interpretation of reality may be completely different. One
could say that as awareness changes so does one's world. On
a mass level, however, the world remains the same for the
most part. We have not experienced individuals attaining a
203
mass awakening on a large enough scale to cause a
significant world change, at least not instantly. Some of the
historical disappearances of large groups such as the Mayans
may have been due to consciousness shifts. Changes in
technology, and in particular transportation have made the
world a very different place in the past 100 years,
dramatically affecting our personal understanding of the
meaning of time and space.
The nature of the Play makes it appear that everything

happens relatively smoothly over time. We need to make
sure we don't confuse appearance with reality. We
experience reality only in the moment. We may have
memories of the past and expectations of the future, but the
only time we ever experience reality is NOW. We exist here
and now. We always have and always will. There can be no
other time for awareness. Consciousness itself is beyond
time and space. It is eternal, immortal, universal, and
infinite. This is our heritage as sparks of consciousness. It is
our true nature. Realizing that, however, is another matter.
And we are here, now, to realize it as much as possible
within this physical form. Since all is here and now, change
can happen in a moment as well. At any moment, the current
act could come to a close, and a new act in the Play could
begin. This is what happens when consciousness shifts occur
on a massive scale, or when consciousness has generated a
new physical pattern capable of holding increased awareness.
In time, this may take awhile to occur, especially if the
background reality is to be maintained. After all, we can't
have violations of natural laws appearing out of the blue to
large numbers of people, can we? They just wouldn't know
what to do. However, if we examine the Play, and look at
what ideas the mass consciousness is being exposed to, we
can start to see some of the overall directions in which reality
is moving to allow change to happen at warp speeds
compared to what has transpired in the past. I know, the past
does not exist, but the remembrance in our minds is real
whether the supposed events were real, illusion, or even
204
imagined. Also, from a reality creation standpoint it is useful
to see whatever parts of the Play we are aware of from a
more global perspective. This allows us to see how the
whole mechanism was constructed. Yes, the place where
reality happens is the moment. But, we're stepping back
from that to try to understand how each moment was created
to begin with. Also, it's useful to understand where our
drama begins and ends, and what major themes are being
carried out for our illumination. At some level we are a
group consciousness as well, and the larger reality is being
carried out for that group. Now that group recognizes itself
as one entity composed of individuals, just as we are
composed of individual cells.
205
CHAPTER 3: ON MODELS AND

PARADIGMS
My scientific/technical background has taught me the value

of using models to describe how something works. In our
case we want to develop models that are useful in explaining
the nature of reality and the process of reality creation.
Many of the models that I intend to elaborate on were
introduced informally in the previous chapter. You'll see
them again in much more detail in the chapters that follow.
Before we get to those chapters I'd like to explain a few
things about what models are, why we use them, and how we
use them. In addition, an introduction to paradigms is in
order as well. I suspect that many of you reading this will
already have been exposed to the concept of paradigms, but,
nonetheless, I'd like to provide some words on why and how
I use them in the context of understanding reality creation.
What Models Are
Models are representations of things, processes, systems,

behavior, or concepts. The ones of most value in our
particular context are conceptual models that deal with the
nature of reality and process or behavioral models that deal
with how reality is created. Models have varying levels of
complexity depending on the nature of what is being
modeled and the fidelity that one wants in the output.
Fidelity deals with how closely one wants the model to
approximate reality. All models are representations of the
real thing. As representations, they generally make
simplifying assumptions about whatever is being modeled.
Typically, models must be validated to assure that they
behave appropriately in accord with what is being modeled.
Reality is an extremely complex entity involving a whole lot

of stuff. In this book we deal with a high level of abstraction
206
of reality that is primarily centered on the functions centered
in the brain that experience and interpret reality and that are
involved in self-realization. We also discuss the functions
performed by consciousness itself and how these map to the
functions that are physically expressed. Where possible, I'll
attempt to validate the models that I discuss. However, in
many cases the concepts are so new that the utility of the
model must be judged based on experience in using it.
Why Models
We use models because they provide a simplified means for

us to understand behavior of complex systems. At least,
that's why I use them. Models also provide a framework for
organizing our knowledge about a system. When the
framework is structured properly it facilitates understanding
and analysis, possibly allowing us to venture into unknown
territory to generate new knowledge.
In our case, we are attempting to model the very nature of

reality itself. In doing this, we're treading on some rarefied
turf that traditionally has been the realm of religion, not
science. The models will be somewhat simple and sketchy,
but they are a place to start from. Also, different models will
pertain to different aspects of reality or its creation. This is
such a big area that I can only cover particular general areas
that I feel are most important. Further, since I am creating
the models, they can only cover areas for which I have
sufficient awareness to generate the appropriate concepts,
connections, and relationships.
How We Use Models
We use models primarily as analogies that help us

understand behavior of complex things in terms of things
that we are already familiar with. In using the analogies,
however, we need to understand how far to carry them.
207
Overall, my higher purpose of using these models is to
capture my knowledge about reality and reality creation in a
manner that can elicit an awareness in you that results in a
consciousness shift related to your understanding of reality
and its creation. My shift will come when I build the model
and relate the information in words.
What Paradigms Are
Paradigms are our habitual ways of looking at things. They

are the glasses we use to filter things to simplify our lives.
On a larger scale they are the way society or a group of
people see things. Typically these are philosophical attitudes
about life or its meaning. One problem with paradigms is
that the filters may distort our view of reality so that we are
not seeing things that may be important in a way that is
empowering.
From another viewpoint, our paradigms are the models of

reality that we use all the time in interpreting our experience.
We don't see the real world, we see our paradigm of it.
Why Paradigms
Paradigms make life easier. We can decide on a rule for

interpreting particular behavior and not have to think about it
anymore. They allow us to automate our reality
interpretation freeing us to focus on things of higher interest
or value to us. It's useful to understand what our paradigms
are and to make sure that they empower us.
Breakthroughs: The Value of Paradigm Shifts
Breakthroughs typically happen when paradigm shifts occur.

Paradigms are such important parts of are lives that when
they shift we experience a major change in our perception of
reality. The outer reality may not change at all, but the inner
one can change completely.
208
CHAPTER 4: THE BRAIN AS A

COMPUTER
The brain functions like a computer on many levels. A

computer has inputs, memory, processing, and outputs.
System software takes care of assigning resources to various
programs. Programs evaluate inputs, perform various
functions and generate various products or output.
One type of the brain's inputs come primarily from the

senses through the body's nervous system. Information is of
several types:
Visual information comes in the form of pictures about the

world. The sensors themselves only detect incoming
patterns of various frequencies of light. The brain is left to
interpret these as images. Images contain a great amount of
symbolic information. One of the types of images that we
input is printed text from a variety of sources. The process
of reading is engaged exclusively with this type of
information.
Aural information comes in the form of sounds, waveforms

with various frequency spectrums. The ears translate the
waveforms into appropriate representative signal that the
brain then interprets. Sound is a key means for transferring
verbal information between humans.
Taste, smell, and touch are additional senses from which

information comes. This information is primarily about the
physical world and operates at a more subtle level. They are
important for experiencing reality, but not so important for
understanding reality creation at an abstract level so we
won't be discussing them much.
209
There is another type of information that is contained
internally as product in the brain. This information is stored
as data in various forms or as programs that can be run
whenever they are needed. Thoughts could also be
interpreted either as input to the brain or as output data that
results from the brains functioning.
We operate on at least two levels: a realtime level that takes

sensory inputs from the world and reacts to them for our
safety or efficient operating, and a non-realtime level that
processes more abstract information that associates meaning
to what is being experienced.
Some of our primary outputs are directions for our bodies

shape and condition; control of our physical actions and
reactions; generation of our speech and communication with
others; and our thoughts, models, and programs about the
world and reality. There are a lot of physical related outputs,
but I'm not going to cover them here because my focus is
more on the conceptual side of things that is involved with
reality creation.
The most interesting part of the brain is computer model is

the elaboration of what the software is doing. The processor
elements of the brain are much more complex than any
computers we have even begun to dream of. Little is
understood about how the brain actually works. We don't
need to know the physical details, however, to start to
understand the higher level functionality. The complexity of
the brain allows for nearly any level of functioning to be
achieved. Because of this, our focus will be on what
happens at the abstract level. The understanding of details
will have to wait for biological science to catch up with our
metaphysical knowledge.
Just as there is a variety of software for our computers, so

there is a variety of software for our brains. In addition, we
are programmers of ourselves, so our software constantly
210
changes over time. Awareness shifts, for example, typically
involve major changes to old programs or the generation of
new ones. Some of the major programs we run include the
following.
Maintain Security Program
This program involves keeping us inside a comfortable

operational envelop that is defined by our beliefs about what
it means to be secure. This encompasses more than physical
safety. It includes emotional and mental security issues as
well.
Its primary inputs are the sensory input from the real world
and the beliefs about the present state of security. Its
functions include interpreting the inputs to assess a new
current state of security and then determining actions that
can lead to increased security if required. Our state of
awareness has a lot to do with how automatically this
program operates. As with other programs, the amount of
attention given to the program is determined by how
important that area is to us. If we believe we are always safe
and secure, little time is given to this. However, if we
believe the world is unsafe and we don't feel secure, more
time is spent on this. The basic lesson that we are always
safe is critical to understanding that we create our own
reality.
Safety is built in at a very physical level as well. We have a

database of sounds and their meanings that includes most
sounds that might signify danger. When these are heard, the
brain interprets the meaning for the current situation quickly,
putting our body on alert by pumping the adrenalin and
directing an appropriate response to the situation. For the
most part, this behavior is automatic. We witness and feel it,
but we don't consciously control it. Similarly, there is an
automatic level for responding to visual and other sensory
threats as well.
211
At higher level of awareness, security comes from knowing

that our worldview is proper and that there are appropriate
parts of ourselves that are fully capable of handling whatever
might come up in a manner that is best for all concerned
including ourselves.
At a still higher level of awareness, we know that we create

it all, and everything happens in accord with the Play.
Further, the Play is perfect, so we will be experience exactly
what is needed for our highest growth -- nothing more and
nothing less. Further, we are not in control of the Play,
consciousness is. We are souls. We are consciousness
enfleshed. Reality is just an illusion, a game that we play for
awhile because it is fun and because it allows our awareness
to expand.
Interpret Outer Reality Program
This involves determining what reality is and what it means.

We are barraged with an endless stream of stimuli from the
outside of us. Much of it is direct information about physical
things. Some of it is conceptual information from others
about what is happening in the world or more rarely what
various things mean. One could spend all of ones waking
life consumed with observing the information coming in.
There is so much of it that there just isn't time to process it
all. The key way we have found to deal with this is to build
an internal model of the world that defines what we are
interested in tracking. Much of this is created by where we
focus our attention. Things we are interested in get
structures for filing information, evaluating that information,
and for assigning meaning to the information. The more
focus we apply, the more elaborate the structures.
Consciousness builds these structures in an optimum fashion
for catering to our interests. It's as if we have a team of
programmers that are waiting to do whatever we want. The
212
way to get these programmers working is through attention
and desiring to know.
These interest-related structures serve as filters that select

what information gets attracted and paid attention to. Our
beliefs also come heavily into play. Information that is in
line with our beliefs tends to get through our filtering
apparatus so that we can see our beliefs confirmed by reality
no matter what the beliefs may be.
OK, so what do we have from the higher perspective? This

program takes in information about reality, filters the
information by belief and interest, evaluates the information
based on various structures that define how the information
gets translated to meaning, captures the meaning in history
structures, then translates the meaning into appropriate
emotional and mental states. Where required, models are
created to provide the structure for representation. Also,
programs may be created for automating any of the
evaluation and translation functions.
Ultimately, this program results in a what does it mean to me

assessment. This includes a step that involves determining
whether there is any impact on my existing models and
structures. If so, the appropriate resources are employed to
adapt these structures to agree with the latest information
about reality.
If we have limited understanding of the world, then we are

blind to great amounts of information. You could say we are
operating with blinders, and that the more we understand the
thinner the blinders. From one perspective, these blinders
prevent us from seeing who we really are as spirit incarnated
into flesh. Basically, we see what we look for, and we look
for whatever is within our ability to understand in the
moment. To change our reality, all we have to really do is
perceive differently and this is within our power to do at any
time.
213
Assess and Determine Needs Program
This operates on a couple of levels as well. Consciously we

are aware of our basic needs and make decisions as to how
those needs will be meet. Typically, this requires taking a
job to earn the money needed to meet our needs. Meeting
needs at the emotional, mental, and spiritual levels is a
different matter. Many of these are addressed
subconsciously rather than consciously. The brain is set up
to meet needs at all levels. It does this by producing the
desired urges or the necessary thoughts required to get the
need recognized and addressed. The timing for this is
dependent on awareness and how it is changing.
The program works by ranking and prioritizing the set of all

needs, looking at what is most important to the individuals
growth and planning the kinds of events required to bring the
individual to a greater level of awareness.
At the highest level, needs are always met. Consciousness

creates reality so consciousness can assure this. Individuals
may face circumstances, however, where they assess that
their needs are not being met. This may be due to faulty
interpretation of reality, or an incorrect understanding of
what constitutes a need. Consciousness does not dictate
what an individual perceives. It monitors the perception and
creates the appropriate circumstances needed to get the
individual to perceive more correctly. When this happens is
determined by how important it is to the growth of the
individual and others that may be impacted.
The individual also defines wants, and indicates how strong

the wants are via emotions or amount of attention given to
the wants. If appropriate for conveying lessons, the wants
may allow be translated into the appropriate conditions
required to meet them.
214
Create Outer Reality Program
The create outer reality program looks at the individual's

wants and needs, the lessons that the individual needs to
learn, the raw events of the Play, the individuals level of
awareness and the karmic balance to create the detailed
script for the next part of the Play.
Beliefs about the body are used to drive the intimate details
of how the body is fashioned and shaped, including any
instincts for food consumption and exercise. The body is
one of our most detailed expressions of belief that we create
on the outside.
We also bring things and people into our life in this manner.
All the events needed to confirm our beliefs are provided. It
is not until we show that we are interested in change or that
we start to question our beliefs that we experience anything
outside of these beliefs. Then, we are free to interpret the
experience in whatever way we choose. There are always
events in the outside world that can trigger awakenings, but
they only impact us if we choose to see them.
Manage Beliefs Program
The manage beliefs program is responsible for maintaining

our beliefs. This program accepts whatever beliefs it is
given and keeps tract of the justification for each belief.
Beliefs with substantial justification have strong effects on
the reality we experience. Beliefs with little justification
have limited impact.
Beliefs are grouped with related beliefs and hierarchically

organized where this is useful. Several groupings of beliefs
are maintained: beliefs about the world, beliefs about
oneself, beliefs about others, and beliefs about the nature of
reality.
215
One of the major goals of life is the development of a belief
system that is conducive to expressing greater levels of
consciousness in flesh. This is the primary area where we
have the power to exert control over our experience and truly
affect the quality of our days. This is where our progress
toward the prime objective know thyself gets measured and
assessed.
We start with the things we are told repeatedly or experience

as young children. Then we add whatever we learn in school
or at home as we grow up. Eventually, we reach a state
where we question our beliefs and start to weed out the ones
that don't serve us. These need to be replaced by more
empowering ones. Self-help, psychology, and metaphysics
provide the raw material for new beliefs with associated
justifications. Finally, we learn that beliefs are a playground,
one in which we fashion the reality we desire -- and we learn
to select beliefs based on their utility. When we start to tire
of beliefs about the physical world, we move onto higher
beliefs about our true nature as consciousness, and the nature
of reality and of reality creation itself. Only then does our
ascent in awareness really take off.
This doesn't happen automatically. Unless we make the

effort to know ourselves, it doesn't happen. Remember,
we're programming a machine. This machine gets
programmed via information taken in and accepted by
whatever level of awareness we are operating at. We are in
the process of becoming more and more aware. That is,
consciously aware. Many people have not yet awakened to
any real sense of conscious awareness. If you're still reading
this, you already are at an evolved level of awareness. Don't
stop now, however, regardless of where you are there are
significant opportunities for further growth. Right now, the
directive is to grow as far and as fast as you are able. You
are main players in this journey of consciousness attempting
to fully express itself in flesh. Lead the way as far as you
can and pull as many as you can along with you. The more
216
of us that do this, the sooner we'll make the breakthrough
that allows the Aquarian Age to begin. Working at this level,
is the highest service we can do for it is operating at the very
highest levels of conscious reality creation. However, don't
neglect your body in the process. The goal after all is spirit
in flesh, not pure spirit.
Create Inner Reality Program
Inner reality is basically all in one's head, though emotions

and some body sensations may be involved as well. Creating
inner reality involves causing particular states of mind to be
experienced. Causing happens via creation of conditions, or
via focusing on particular information in a specific manner.
The "I" is the part of us that experiences reality, especially
inner reality. The major inputs come from thoughts and also
information from the senses. The major outputs are other
thoughts, feelings, and particular mental states. At the level
of creating, we are not yet interesting in assigning meaning.
The major reason for creating inner reality, however, is to

give the individual experiences conducive to the growth of
awareness. These experiences typically confirm or deny
aspects of the individual understanding of the nature of
reality. Note, I'm not concerned with the lower levels of how
inner reality is created or experienced. Sometimes, all that is
present is a feeling tone. At other times pictures and
association may be seen from which volumes of information
may flow out. At still other times, powerful thoughts may
arise.
The key process for creating inner reality is through beliefs.

Thoughts and events are planned to arrive in sequences
necessary for their understanding to occur. Sometimes
information arrives in the form of a book, or a conversation,
or an event or coincidence of events. The synchronicity and
timing of events is well planned and things often have
multiple purposes and meanings only some of which are
217
understood immediately. The symbolic meaning of things is
very rich. Reality is ready to support any level of spiritual
realization at any moment. The basic conditions for spiritual
awakening are always there, immediately around us, if only
we had the eyes to see. Again, beliefs are the key, just as
they were for outer reality. The inner and outer are
expressed in the same manner. What is outside is a reflection
of what is inside, and vice-versa. As above, so below also
expresses this same principle.
Interpret Inner Reality Program
Interpreting inner reality involves developing a conceptual

model of all that one experiences. The objective is to
determine the meaning of what we experience. Here, we
must understand symbols and how they are used. Some
symbols have universal meaning. Most, however, must be
understood on a personal basis. The outer world and all that
we experience external to us are a reflection of something
inside of us. However, it is up to this program to determine
the meaning of whatever is experienced. This is done
primarily through beliefs until we build appropriate models
of how both inner and outer reality are created. Such models
may be considered more elaborate beliefs because we cannot
be certain of their validity either.
For most people, inner reality is interpreted by this program

to be an appropriate feeling state that the individual may or
may not be able to express due to other beliefs. Such states
as happy, sad, depressed, angry, excited, etc. are then
reflected in hormones to result in a corresponding body state.
As awareness grows, one must learn to pay attention to these
feelings and find appropriate channels for the energy to flow.
As awareness grows further, one should be able to select a
feeling state by choice, independent of the conditions. In
particular, one should be able to experience happiness
regardless of what is going on inside or outside.
218
The Play determines what happens. We determine what that
means from an inner reality standpoint. We have no control
over what happens, only how we interpret and react, and
then only within a limited range for further actions are
determined by the Play as well.
To interpret inner reality consciously, we must understand

that we are the watcher of this drama and that it is truly
designed for us as the watcher. Yes the players all have their
roles and the action makes sense at that level. However, the
higher meaning comes from understanding the meaning of
symbols for the observer parts of ourselves. At this level, the
play is comic indeed for the characters are but caricatures of
who we truly are. Consciousness has a keen sense of humor,
very keen indeed. When we realize that all this was done for
us, that all the details of the Play are there solely for our
growth and progress, that this is all a grand experiment in
consciousness learning to procreate -- that is, create like unto
itself; the feeling is absolutely wonderful. There is a
sensation of gratitude that goes to the very core of one's
being. Subconsciously, we are aware of how consciousness
is directing the show down to the finest details. It's only
consciously that we lack awareness. This can only be fixed
by working on knowing ourselves and developing the
conceptual understanding needed to allow us to awaken.
This is what the interpretation of inner reality is all about.
Monitor Level of Awareness Program
Within us we have a program that monitors our level of

awareness constantly. It does this so that the perception
filters can be altered to correspond to whatever level of
awareness we achieve. Monitoring the level of awareness is
not so easy as it might seem. At the frontiers, we are
growing bodies and minds that can consciously handle
increased awareness. The constructs necessary are fragile at
first so care must be taken to assure they are not
overwhelmed. It's as if we were developing consciousness
219
muscles capable of doing a particular kind of work. The
development is a slow and methodical process. In the case
of consciousness, we are really building circuits capable of
handling particular kinds of information and vibrational
frequencies. If we go too fast we burn out the circuits and
have to start again.
The key reasons for monitoring awareness are to assure that

things are proceeding smoothly and to provide reality
creation information it needs to decide what would be most
appropriate for further growth.
There are a host of other programs working at lower levels

but I haven't taken the time to figure out what they are.
Further, even if I did, the ones already mentioned are the
ones that relate most directly to reality creation at the levels
that we care about.
THE BRAIN AS A BIOLOGICAL COMPUTER
There is also an overall analogy of brain to computer that

bypasses the input, output, program breakout. We'll discuss
this next.
The brain is a biological computer. From the time we are

born the computer is programmed by the reality that is
presented to it, and the information that it takes from that
reality. Everything we see, hear, feel, or otherwise sense is
an input training pattern. The brain by its very nature seeks
to organize itself to be able to handle the inputs that are
presented to it. Part of how it does this is via the above types
of programs. Within the brain, there is a conscious that has
the innate ability to learn to program other parts of the brain.
The conscious mind is like an application program that is
itself capable of creating particular types of information that
can be fed to other programs and in some cases even creating
entire applications. Actually, it may be that there is a team of
programmers inside our head that respond to the directions
220
and needs of higher level programs, that actually do the grunt
work. Delegation is essential. Each part must focus on what
it does best, leaving tasks for which it is not suited to other
part that can effectively accomplish those tasks.
Within the brain is a center of awareness of self. It is this

center that is of primary importance for the whole Play is
executed for the development of this center. Here is where
consciousness resides. Initially it is relegated to the
superconscious. It cannot act consciously until the ego
learns of its existence, then finds a way to access it, then
learns to trust the information that comes from it. This is not
an easy task for the ego's mission in life is deal with reality,
and external reality can be very engrossing and time
consuming. Applying effort to other than dealing with the
material world is seen as counterproductive, especially if it
believes the outer world is where reality is by definition.
It's tough enough for the ego to develop the will so that it can
start working towards achieving its wants. In fact, many
people never develop much of a personal will, choosing to
take things as they come rather than trying direct what will
happen. The will is an application program that runs on the
basic conscious/subconscious/superconscious operating
system. Actually the will itself runs on the conscious side.
The superconscious is responsible for activating experience
in accordance with basic spiritual laws discussed earlier in
chapter 1.
The conscious is programmed by all the ideas that cross its

attention. Some of these ideas eventually become beliefs.
Others are just stored in the data base until they are needed at
some later time. As each idea is experienced it is represented
physically as a pattern of cell activity. When ideas are
repeated and contemplated they grow stronger and stronger.
As ideas are connected in hierarchies, those that are
supported gradually grow until they are accepted as truths or
221
beliefs. Once this is so, reality creation can start generating
experiences that confirm the beliefs.
The subconscious is responsible for emotions and desires.

Advertisers have known this for years and have learned to
program people to buy their products by making the
associations that go straight to the subconscious. This way
the conscious mind doesn't block the linkages they are trying
to make with the pleasure centers in the subconscious. Also,
subliminal messages are conveyed in a manner that bypasses
the conscious.
For conscious awareness to expand, the ego itself must

expand to include other functions that reside in the
subconscious and superconscious. It is not clear how these
functions are separated within the brain. That is left for brain
research to tell us. For our purposes, it's easier to treat things
from a functional standpoint anyway. The bottom line is that
increases in awareness happen when the ego recognizes and
accepts something that was outside itself. Something that
was "not I" becomes part of "I". Initially, this outside
function may be recognized as a new data source.
Eventually, the whole function may be recognized as a part
of self.
There are not a whole lot of information sources that lead

one to an understanding of oneself. They definitely are not
common. My primary sources have been via metaphysics.
Religion offers some as well, but I find them too obscure for
my taste. Great thoughts are always outstanding. These can
usually be found in books of quotations. Think of these
materials as programs for your mind, for that is what they
truly are. Anything that exposes you to knowledge about the
nature of self and the nature of reality is the highest form of
information you can get. However, it doesn't help much if
you are not prepared to understand it through your own
actions in getting yourself ready. Growth cannot be forced, it
proceeds gently from within. However, some of the changes
222
can occur very rapidly, allowing one to lose one's grasp of
reality for awhile if one is not very careful. I know this first
hand. I've been walking on very shaky ground for several
months now. However the awakenings keep coming. My
ego is about ready to roll over and say "what do you need me
for"? The changes shake up the very core of my programs
about reality interpretation. With many realizations, the
meaning of things change forever. Things that I trusted and
relied upon before simply had to fall by the wayside. What
you're seeing now is the kinds of constructions that now lie
at the core of how I see reality.
Don't take any of this too literally. These things work

roughly like this. Use your own experience to adapt these
ideas to whatever works for you. I'm not the ultimate
authority on anything except my own reality. My hope is
that by sharing what seems to work for me, I may help you
in your own path to self-awareness. Everyone follows a
different path. I believe that I was meant to blaze a new trail.
This is simply one of the markers that I am leaving behind.
223
CHAPTER 5: THE BODY AS A ROBOT
I've been thinking about this analogy for quite some time
now. The body is an incredible biological machine, a
wonderful manifestation of consciousness. However, how is
consciousness embodied or enfleshed? What is physical, and
what is non-physical?
We have a body. We are not our body. Similarly, the body

has a brain. We are not that brain. Most of us normally
think of ourselves as that which is physical. However, when
we truly think about locating even the ego part of ourselves,
the "I", we cannot find it located in any physical part of us.
From a larger perspective, this is because we are
consciousness expressing ourselves through the clothes of a
physical body. This body is very much like a robot,
controlled by various programs, feedback mechanisms, and
control circuits.
For those of you that watch Star Trek: the Next Generation.
The bodies are much like Data, except Data is an attempt to
make computer systems and technologically based robots
into life that is similar to human life. We are grand attempts
to make biological life like unto consciousness itself. This is
no small task. Consciousness learns from all of its
experiments. For human life, the DNA are the key for
structuring the physical forms, they provide the mechanism
through which consciousness can exert control. They have
are least two main functions and probably many others as
well. On the physical level, they provide the pattern for each
cell to be able to replicate itself. The also provide the
mechanism through which consciousness can exert control
over the functioning of each cell. I suspect there is a set of
known instructions that are part of the cells operating system
so to speak.
224
While the baby is still growing inside the mother, the
directions to grow may come from the mothers
consciousness. Prior to birth, the details of how DNA from
the mother and father will be combined to create the abilities
and characteristics of the child are decided jointly by the
three consciousnesses that are involved. At or near the
moment of birth, the third consciousness enters the new
body. Basic growth of the body is controlled by the
individuals consciousness in a manner that conforms to
beliefs, choices of actions, including choices of food
consumption. The biggest factor is body image, however,
for the body is our most intimate reflection of our image of
ourselves.
Of greater concern is the growth of the mind. Basic

functions grow in a manner that psychology has already
defined so I won't go into any detail here. Early brain
growth centers on getting basic functions operating -- the
senses, speech, balance, and the like.
Now we get to an interesting part, the basic question of

whether the body is a vehicle for spirit or whether it is spirit
in flesh. I prefer thinking of the body as the vehicle through
which spirit is expressed in flesh. In this case, the operation
of the body doesn't have to be an internal function, it can be
caused by consciousness, something outside of the physical
dimensions so long as there is a communications bridge
between the two. This also follows from the idea that we are
the creation of consciousness. And consciousness itself is
learning how to create like unto itself. We become gods at
the moment we realize how to create things "in our own
image".
Of course, the common view is that the physical is self-

sufficient. But science has neglected the mental and spiritual
elements completely and has no explanation for an
evolutionary process that leads to greater and greater
amounts of organization. The whole issue of consciousness
225
has yet to even be considered, much less the idea of what is
involved in reality creation. If you've read this far, I assume
you take personal reality creation to be a given. The only
question is one of how it works and this is of interest
primarily from a practical standpoint of how we live our
lives.
Assuming the body is just a vehicle, we need to treat it

somewhat like we do a car. Don't take this too seriously, I
know the body is more of a temple for spirit. A car is a
controlled robot of sorts. It has certain external functions
that it performs in terms relevant to the human user, and
certain internal functions to achieve the external ones. It is
designed to accommodate human passengers. It has an
interface that serves as the mechanism for us to control what
functions are performed. It needs food (gas) and service to
keep it operating, and it wears out after some period of time
that is dependent on how it is made, how it is used, and how
it is serviced.
Similarly, the body is a vehicle for the brain, it's chief

occupant. The body has certain external functions such as
sensing, moving, speaking, and physically manipulating. In
robot language, this is what the sensors and actuators can do.
Internally there are a variety of control systems that enable
the gross level behavior. The interface is much cleaner. We
only have to think of something to start action happening.
For instance, we only have to express the intent to move in a
direction to get an army of cells cooperating to make it
happen. Similarly, when we speak, we only have to express
the intent to get the cells cooperating to work in a manner to
produce a sound that they cannot even hear. The
organization is truly miraculous. The body has to eat, rest,
and occasionally be serviced by health practitioners.
Generally, the body reaches the end of it's useful life after
between 70 and 100 years. I'm not aware of why this is so,
except that it is in accord with the Plan. It may be because
that is sufficient time for getting information about the
226
experiment and its effectiveness in allowing consciousness to
be enfleshed.
One of the key themes operating is that we appear to be

creating a robot that is like Data, able to realize the nature of
itself, including the fact that parts of what it is are driven by
nonphysical shall we say parts of itself. The mind for
instance does not appear to reside in the brain. It includes
more than can be contained in the brain alone. My sense of
things is that the brain has complex functions and programs
just as the body does. However the brain also has
components that serve as receivers of thought on at least
three levels: conscious, subconscious, and superconscious.
As an example, when we speak, we have no idea where the
words originate. We only know that they flow through us.
We believe they originate in our brains, but how certain can
we be of this? There would be no observable difference if
some part of our brain generated the thought and sent them
to our speech center, or if the brain simply received the
thoughts and sent them to the same place. Similar, whenever
we think, the same issue arises. I sense the thought inside
my head, but it just appears. I have no remembrance of the
process of creating it. Further, I usually don't understand it's
meaning until I hear it in my head. Other people may sense
things differently. I base my understanding primarily on
what I have direct experience of. I know that some people
are more visual or kinesthetic in how they feel and know
things. For me the primary mode has been auditory. My
writing follows a speech that I hear in my head as I write.
However, I know only a few words in advance of what I
type. My sensation is that it is new when I hear the material
however. I have no sense that I generated it prior to when it
gets expressed. On the other hand, the organization appears
to indicate that the whole is completed even before I write.
It's as if the linear process of getting it out is a problem of the
very nature of this domain.
227
There is a sense that I am being programmed as I write this
as well. It's as if consciousness is outside controlling every
word that comes across, so the very process of writing for
me is a lesson in allowing consciousness to take control of
this vehicle to an even greater degree. It involves some
sacrifice on my part. The average rate of transmission of
material is approximately 1 page per hour. In the past month
alone, December 1993, I generated about 120 pages of
material that was virtually error free and required little if any
editing. I mention this as an example of how much
consciousness can bring forth. It might go even faster if I
could type at a greater speed, however, I believe the speed is
also limited by my ability to comprehend it. I don't believe
that the conscious channels of the brain through which this
material comes can pass anything through that they can't
comprehend. This also explains why the material is coming
through now rather than at any time before. All through
1993, I went through some incredible changes in awareness.
As the year progressed, so did the pace and intensity of the
shifts. For those of you that are interested, Beyond Mind:
Notes from a Soul in the Midst of a Spiritual Awakening
documents part of the mental journey that I went through.
When I say I am being programmed, you need to understand

this from several points of view. Part of what is being
programmed is an understanding of the material which
comes through. This impacts my understanding of the nature
of reality and reality creation, and hence my level of
awareness. At another level, I am being programmed to
allow the pathways for this communication to come through.
This requires certain organizations within the brain that are
related to bringing this material through. Throughout
history, many people have brought material through, but
much of it came through subconsciously, or in altered states,
rather than consciously. Because of this, they may or may
not have understood the truths that were expressed. Or, they
may have understood them only during the experience of
altered states. Historically, we have called such people
228
mystics. However, the fact that these mystics existed
provided the confirmation to consciousness that such
realizations could happen in flesh. The challenge then was
in how to make this experience the ordinary one rather than
the extraordinary one.
One of my prime purposes is to be a pathfinder for getting

the world prepared to enter a new age in which
consciousness is more fully realized in flesh. Such is what
has been revealed to me and confirmed in many ways. It has
reached the point where this is now part of my very
operating system. Happiness and fulfillment are already tied
directly to this task. My attention and focus are almost 100
percent aligned. This is one of the few things that continues
to have any real meaning in my life. You could argue that I
am programming myself. And to some degree I am. But,
I'm doing so as an active participant, not as the being who is
in charge. I only have a vague understanding. I only know
that I am being moved toward the accomplishment of
something, and that my entire lifetime has been orchestrated
to get me where I am and to prepare me for what I am to do.
I have no sense of designing this, or even being privy to the
design. It is definitely not happening at a conscious level.
Yes, it is happening faster now, because I am willingly taking
on subordinate roles in a conscious manner. Again, the issue
of aligning my will with THY WILL. There is a role for
each of us in the Plan. The specific role that one experiences
in reality depends largely on how ones awareness unfolds
and how quickly one subjects ones will to the greater Plan.
Actually, it is our own consciousnesses that have the task of
getting us in the position to play our greater roles. It will
happen when the time is right. It cannot be forced on anyone
before they are ready. Also, just as with my writing, the Play
may be already completed. It's only the serial nature of our
time that prevents what is in our future from being revealed
now.
229
Being a robot, does not limit one's experience in any way.
All of life is played out for the growth of consciousness,
consciousness learns of what it is via what it is able to create.
But, in our reality -- where duality reigns, there is always the
play of Light and Dark. One key aspect of this play is
illusion. We are always challenged to understand what is
real vs. what is illusion. The problem is that we have
elaborate sensors specially designed to detect illusion and
make it appear real. A piece of consciousness, the self, is
housed in the robot and sent out into the "real" world without
any knowledge of its true nature and with only a weak thread
that connects it to its creator, the Self. The game is for
consciousness to guide this robot through the series of
experiences necessary for it to realize that it is truly the Self.
The separation is an illusion, it has always been. But one
must truly realize this, and not just think it.
So, how do we use this to alter our reality? Realize that the
first focus should be on getting your robot to know itself.
You do this by thinking about what your nature really is and
by inputting appropriate new thoughts and ideas. This is
even more effective if you start getting the ego to recognize
inputs from other portions of the self. When you first start
these are subtle, typically appearing as voices in the head or
intuition. These will are always attempting to guide you,
waiting only for you to recognize them and act on the
information they provide. Use utility as the test for what is
valuable. And, remember, it takes time for things to manifest
in physical reality. There are exceptions, but these are few.
Learn what your will is, and be careful how you direct it.
The goal is to align your will with your Higher Will. One
area to start is by making knowing yourself a high priority
goal of your will. By doing so, this becomes an activity that
you spend your free time pursuing. The more important you
make it, the better. Remember, you get what you focus on.
If you apply resources towards knowing yourself, you will
indeed achieve progress. There are many steps, however, so
230
don't stop with the first awakening you get. It's alright to
enjoy yourself and experience physical reality, just don't get
too immersed where you don't come out and regain your
conscious bearing on the whole thing. Once you experience
the observer self, try to recover that experience whenever
you can. Eventually, this will be a common state that is lived
most of the time. The observer coexists with the part of you
that is doing and experiencing physical reality. It can
function concurrently. The question is where you focus your
"I". When the ego can exist as the observer, you have
reached a very advanced state indeed, for then the ego is no
longer so intensely focused on experiencing what the body is
experiencing, or even what the mind is experiencing; it has
gone beyond to a new domain. In this domain, it knows that
consciousness itself is directing the play. Also, it knows that
it can use the mind to get directions from the consciousness
and use these to guide activity in accord with the Plan.
Further, it knows that the sole focus of its activity should be
on guiding the robot toward those activities which allow the
watcher to understand it's own nature better. The ego still
has a will that can be exerted, and still has control over the
focus of attention. However, as the watcher, the ego knows
that it grows as it experiences and that to some degree it is
responsible for creating the experiences for its own growth.
This happens in line with belief systems, so the ego becomes
the conscious manager of belief systems. Earlier, beliefs
were primarily used to create physical reality. Now, they are
a much more fluid place from which to create the inner
reality. Single changes in beliefs can change the meaning of
the whole world that one experiences. Beliefs are that
powerful especially at the level where they deal with the
very nature of reality,. even more so, when they involve the
nature of reality creation itself.
In case you don't accept this premise from the highest level
down, let's also consider it at some of the more intermediate
levels. In particular, let's look at basic human behavior and
try to see how it reflects what we experience in the world.
231
To start with, most robot people are asleep from a

consciousness standpoint. They observe that they exist and
that they have a sense of "I" and that there is a separation
between this "I" and the outside world. They are aware of
thoughts and feelings and know they have a brain, but know
little to nothing about how it works. Reality is something
out there that they experience. They know that they have
five senses and that they can use their brain to focus on
particular senses but they have little to no understanding of
how these work either. They are aware, to some degree, that
they have wants and can apply their will in a manner that
attempts to get their wants met. Typically, they feel powerful
or happy when they succeed, and much less so if they fail.
One of the key objectives is to feel good. Since they have
limited control of this in their working life, they spend much
of their free time pursuing happiness in the moment.
Thus far, nearly everything is perfectly in line with the "I"

being the high level control program inside a robot. Once an
individual is basically grown. All the body functions
basically work. The control program decides how to use
them and then interprets and reacts to the information that
comes in through the sensors. The major control program
operating is pursue happiness. Another key program
operating is meet basic needs.
The meet basic needs part of the program results in a make

money goal that is usually met by finding a job and working
at that job so many hours per week. In addition, food,
shelter, clothing, transportation, and other things may be
required. The "I" sees no choice but to work to provide these
things and society is structured to ensure this. Life, or
reality, is structured around a job that occupies a great deal of
waking time. The robots perform these tasks somewhat
automatically, enjoying them where they can. Much of the
pursue happiness program happens after work hours, on
weekends, and on vacations. Leisure and recreation are the
232
primary areas that are pursue to lead to happiness. Actually,
a third major area is acquiring things.
In this country, the robots are sluggish overall and are not
very good at finding active ways to make themselves happy
so they resort to entertainment to occupy and amuse
themselves so that they can forget about the relatively boring
nature of their real lives for awhile. For many people, much
of their free time is spent in such amusements. Television
alone occupies many people an average of several hours each
day. Now imagine what the watcher sees in this -- the person
is basically asleep, going through life as an automaton -- a
very automatic robot with limited intelligence. I don't mean
to put down such people, but asleep is asleep! And, as
Thoreau said, "to be awake is to be alive."
Another aspect that illustrates the robot nature is the

programming that commercials are able to do on individuals.
The bottom line is that commercials work, whatever they are
doing result in individuals making more decision to buy the
advertised products. This can only happen via some
subconscious programming that is going on, and this can
only happen if we operate as robots to these programs. Most
people who see commercials would argue that the things in
the commercials don't impact there buying habits. They say
this based on logic telling them that the commercial offered
no good reason for buying the particular product. What they
failed to see was that it offered great reasons to the
subconscious that is operating in most people. Sex is one of
the key lures. It is rampant. Fun, enjoyment, good times,
wealth, power, happiness are other lures. Note, it doesn't
matter whether the products result in these things or not, it
only matters that a strong connection is made repeatedly.
Moving a step higher up, we get achievers who work by

setting goals and then focusing their efforts in line with the
goals. They believe that if they work hard enough and in the
right ways they can get anything they want. All their time is
233
consumed in exerting their power to make their will so.
These people are somewhat more aware. At least they
understand that they can create what the want in their lives.
This allows them to acquire things and obtain wonderful
experiences. For awhile, this may result in happiness.
However, these things and experiences don't result in
knowledge about self. The observer sees these people as
asleep as well, focusing all their attention on the world
outside, on outer reality. They believe they create their outer
reality, but they are completely unaware that it is done from
the inside. They have limited their reality to outer
experience, hence are still asleep to the greater reality that
lies within.
234
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPLE BODIES AND

ENERGY FIELDS
This is a new topic, only loosely related to the ones we have

just covered. It may, however, explain the mechanism
through which information passes that enables the computer
and robot paradigms to operate.
To start with, in this model there are at least five bodies and
several energy fields that go with these bodies and allow
them to communicate and perform the functions for which
they are responsible. These bodies include the physical,
emotional, mental, causal, and spiritual bodies. Most of us
are familiar with some of these bodies but not necessarily all
of them. In fact, most people have little direct awareness of
any beyond the first three. Each body is lighter, of higher
frequency than the former and has inputs and outputs that are
of a particular frequency or energy spectrum. However, each
body also has effects on each of the bodies below it.
Because of this, even though we are physically centered, we

can see phenomenon that show us that higher bodies are
functioning. The results we see are the shadows, or the
projections of the higher level dimensionality of these
greater bodies onto the physical reality that we know. We
can also experience an inner reality that corresponds more
directly to these bodies once we raise our awareness to the
appropriate level to understand the principles that are
operating. This typically expresses itself in terms of whole
systems of thought. At some point, the awareness will be
more direct. Systems of thought are only required until we
have a true realization. When we know the truth we are free.
We understand without the restraints of chains of ideas. We
come to know the object about which the ideas speak.
235
But, this is getting away from the topic at hand. Obviously,
the physical body is the most dense, resulting in the slowest
change and the most limited expression. However each of
the other bodies have ties to this one. The emotions are
experienced in the body via the lymph system and hormones.
The emotional body causes the appropriate directions to be
sent to the brain and to any organs that may be involved.
This may not be exactly correct, the brain could relay the
directions to the organs. I'm not sure what happens
physically vs. what happens non-physically. In response, the
brain senses the conditions in the body and interprets what
emotion it thinks is being felt. The label the brain applies in
turn fine tunes the situation and provides an input to the
emotional body that this is what the brain wants to
experience as reality. You see, the emotional body is the
mechanism responsible for providing emotional stimulus to
the ego. When the ego goes beyond emotions, it has
incorporated the emotional body within its understanding.
Going beyond does not mean that the emotions do not exist.
It means that we choose what emotions we experience
regardless of the circumstances that we face. Emotions are
useful, they convey important information to others. It's just
that they are in a particular frequency band. When we
operate out of love, we experience primarily positive
emotions. Also, the emotional state follows the mental state.
The physical state follows both the emotional and the mental
state. The emotional and mental states we are talking about
here are those we experience with this body and brain. The
brain is a physical organ; a complex one, yes, but a physical
organ none-the-less.
The mental body is responsible for providing the brain with

the inputs it needs to develop. The intent is actually for the
ego, the watcher of the brain, to develop. The ego can only
develop as the structures within the brain allow particular
information to be understood. This does not mean stored so
that it can be recalled. This is a low level function. Meaning
occurs with higher level electro-chemical patternings and
236
organizations of information. Data is stored, not
information. Information includes a context that allows
meaning to be understood. Also, information may have
meanings at multiple levels and the meanings at the different
levels may or may not have any relationship to one another.
The abilities that the mental body is developing in an

individual show up in one's energy field as colors to aura
readers. The specific colors are particular types of abilities.
It may be that the same energy field is broadcast to all of us
and that aura readers only see those frequencies that our
bodies are picking up on or allowing to flow. These seem to
be determined at our birth, though some of these may be
repressed at times in our lives to allow us to go through
particular experiences without the our full abilities. It's as
though we need to understand what life is like without
particular abilities before we can truly appreciate our most
special talents. Not everyone goes through such experiences.
I only mention it because I happened to do so and only
recently recovered energies that I had lost nearly 30 years
ago.
My sense of things is that the energy bands provide channels

through which information can flow from all of our bodies to
our physical bodies. At some point, we may realize that
these bodies are physical as well, only that they operate as
energy fields and frequencies that are outside of what our
scientists are able to detect yet. The fact that aura readers
can detect some of the frequencies around us physically as
colors indicates that somehow the physical sensors have
been altered. It only takes a slight frequency shift for this to
manifest. Also, since the frequencies are coming from
consciousness to the physical, they can come from
immediately around us. They don't have to be broadcast
over distances. Right now my sense is that these frequencies
are broadcast from an energy body just outside of our present
one. We probably have several, and I'd guess they would
extend different distances. For instance, our emotional body
237
extends to those in the immediate vicinity. People who are
sensitive can feel our presence, though this may come from
the mental body as well. Our mental body extends to all
those who are touched deeply by our works or mental
interaction. Similarly, it extends to all those whose works
touch us deeply. In this manner, minds with an affinity for
similar truths work together for the benefit of all. Further, at
some level the mind taps into universal consciousness, the
fountain from which all ideas flow. When we become aware
of being tapped in, we know that providence is on our side
for the truth flows sweetly and we are constantly directed
toward exactly what we need to increase our understanding
and level of awareness. Life then flows as if on automatic,
with constant change occurring at an ever-increasing pace
and with an ever-increasing significance with each change.
We are floating on the river of life, allowing consciousness
to take us where it will. We flow ever onward doing as
directed by the dictates that come from our Self -- knowing
that through doing so we will achieve our ultimate objective
of union of self with Self, or realization that we are that Self
after all. It is only our blinders that prevented us from seeing
that truth all along. Life is definitely sweeter when one is
living in the flow -- going with the current rather than
struggling against it. Nonattachment is a major key. But,
this requires letting go of our will, and finding the way to be
happy regardless of what occurs. It also takes finding our
way of being in the world but not of the world.
The causal body operates at a still subtler level. It ensures

that our actions and decisions are balanced over the longer
term. It teaches us the law of responsibility for our actions.
It assures that we have experiences in accord with the law as
ye sow, so shall ye reap. It does so by insuring that reality
gives us what we deserve. This is not necessarily what we
think we deserve. The timing does not have to be within one
lifetime, however. Though, this may be changing. Because
we are so close to the end of the play, it appears that we may
be working through several lifetimes of reaping in this one
238
lifetime. That makes for some very challenging experiences.
Also, the need for the law was to be the default mechanism
for those who are asleep to have a stimulus for learning
responsibility. Once this lesson is learned, it is no longer
necessary for the balance to be enacted in flesh. The law of
forgiveness can take effect to wipe out the slates. Also, it is
not clear that everyone on Earth has to be awakened to allow
consciousness to make it to the Aquarian Age. Once a
sufficient number of people reach a level of awakening, that
may be sufficient to give consciousness the necessary
physical patterns for getting the masses to realization of Self
very quickly. I don't know if this is one year or twenty, but it
will be whatever it takes.
Actually, some of what we were just talking about is spiritual

body stuff. The spiritual body is the Self. Its primary
function is to keep everything functioning in a manner that
allows us to play our allotted role in the Play while pushing
us as far as possible toward realizing who we truly are. Now
that I think about it, there is not one play but an endless
number of plays going on. Each of us have roles that bring
us into many different smaller plays that operate within the
context of the larger Play. Consciousness creates and directs
the larger play. Smaller groupings of consciousness play
particular dramas within the overall context. These are
interwoven in the proper manner to allow everything to work
beautifully and perfectly.
The alternative to all this is that we are this single physical

body, and that somehow we have the abilities to do all of
these incredible things, that there is no overall plan and that
we are creating reality as we go. The law of cause and effect
applies, but so does the law of probability. At every decision
point we are free to chose our course of action and reality is
determined by the choices we make. We are the only
consciousness there is. There is no maker who created us in
spirit. In fact we have no spirit. We are what we are now, no
more and no less. There is no purpose in existence other
239
than to exist. The struggle to exist is one of survival of the
fittest. Spiritual laws have no basis in reality. I could go on,
but this seems sufficient. Energy fields and higher bodies are
not needed because there are no higher functions that must
be accomplished. This is not the world I choose to live in,
though I recognize that most people live in just such a world
-- at least that is the reality that they create for themselves.
What you believe is up to you, but I highly recommend that
you consider the alternative to this viewpoint and start
accepting frameworks that support understanding your true
nature as consciousness.
240
CHAPTER 7: SYMBOLIC
IMFORMATION SYSTEMS
As humans, we are primarily information systems. Further,

most of the information we deal with is symbolic. In this
chapter we'll discuss what this really means to us as
individuals, and investigate how this is connected to the way
we create reality.
The only direct access to the outside world that we have is

through our senses. Our senses pick up information about
the world as they interact with it. Our eyes pick up visual
information. The eyes see this information as the various
gradations of light and dark or color that the components in
the our eyes can respond to. The eyes send a pattern of
electrical signals to the brain. Our brain is responsible for
turning these electrical signals into the meaningful picture
that we believe corresponds to the real world. I say believe
here because we have no way of knowing for certain. It
appears that everything is composed of patterns of
frequencies. Some patterns are translated into visual
information, some to aural, some to kinesthetic. Taste and
smell seem to be caused by the detection of particular
chemical patterns rather than vibratory ones.
Our perception systems have sufficient commonality to

provide a basic agreement in how different people sense the
physical world. However, there can be great difference in
particular senses for different individuals. At one extreme,
some people are blind, deaf, or without one or more senses.
At the other extreme we have people with highly refined
senses that go outside the range of frequency or beyond the
level of fidelity that most people sense.
We do not appear to come with a built-in understanding of

the world. This is learned as the brain responds to the
241
patterns it experiences. For visual information, the brain
cares not whether the patterns are from the real thing in the
world or whether they are represented in books or movies.
The brain does have to keep track of what is real versus what
is imagined, however.
The brain is wonderful at abstracting information so that it

understands that different images may be views of the same
thing. It's as if images are filed or understood as 3-D things.
Also, the brain learns to understand key elements about how
things move and behave over time. This must be recorded as
some abstract information about things and how they change
over time. I've never studied much about what science has
discovered about how the senses work. I only want to cover
enough here to get the basic idea across that senses pick up
raw information that is only somewhat related to the final
meaning that gets assigned by the brain.
Once the sensors and brain have reached some level of

maturity, they can be relied upon to perform the basic
functions of sensing and doing a first level interpretation of
the world. The majority of our world is the visual part. In
our mind, we construct a model that says the world is three
dimensional and that there are real objects or things that are
creating the images that we see. The images provide
information that allows us to deduce where things are within
space, including where we are. We don't appear to have a
single overall organizational framework in which everything
resides. We always deal with major unknowns, so we can't
really come up with a complete detailed framework. Instead,
we seem to favor more generalized local methods of coping
with reality. This is primarily because our reality is always
Here and Now, so we only need enough of a framework to
deal with our immediate world as it moves through time. We
can count on the world itself to maintain its consistency and
present us with the immediate patterns for wherever we
happen to be located. We truly only experience knowing
Here and Now. Other locations may exist in memory, but
242
they are only real to us when we are directly experience them
in reality or in our imagination. When we vividly imagine
things, much of the sensation in our brains is as if we were
there Now. This is because the part of the brain that
experiences can be driven by either real or remembered
information.
We also deal with other abstractions of information and

information about information. For instance, maps provide
information about the layout of a locale to a level we cannot
sense directly. Different types of maps provide different
types of information, but all maps are symbolic
representations of information about something. One thing
common to most maps is names. Names are always labels
that get attached to things. Sometimes the names have a
meaning as well that may or may not go with the thing that
the name is attached to. Names give us a handle by which
we can refer to things without having to have access to the
real thing.
Letters and numbers are symbols as well. We string letters

together to form words, which are themselves symbols with
an associated meaning or set of meanings. We string words
together to form sentences, which convey ideas with
meanings that often transcend the meanings of the individual
words that are used. The bottom line is that the meaning is
not within the words, it is conveyed by the words only if the
recipient is able to understand. It's as if the words only point
to the message that is being communicated. It is up to the
individual receiving them to know or fill in what is being
pointed to. Interesting, it is as if there is a mental landscape
that is much like the physical one.
Here is another area where the symbolic nature of things is

important as well. There is a basic principle operating in the
universe: as above, so below. It operates in many ways and
at many levels. One way in which it operates is that different
planes of existence function in basically the same ways.
243
What I just realized is that the physical world that we see and
its method of operating is similar to how the worlds operate
at every level, physical, emotional, mental, causal, and
spiritual. Because we are physical beings, we only have
limited perception of these other worlds. In particular, the
mental world has its mountains, deserts, valleys, lakes, rivers
and oceans. It also has its various life forms. We only see
these in a linear manner as thoughts. Related thoughts build
concepts that describe structures that are real in the mental
world. We typically only see those that are somewhat related
to the physical world.
Assuming that this analogy holds, then we should at the very

least have two mental senses, one corresponding to hearing,
and one to seeing. I would argue that our normal linear
mode of thinking is the more limited one that corresponds to
hearing. We process one word at a time, feeding our mind in
the same linear manner that we feed our ears. Both speech
and written words are of this manner. Images convey
knowledge as well, but typically we treat these in terms of
pieces that we read individually, then in relationship to
others. If we don't break them up in this manner, they simply
are not intelligible consciously.
Carrying this to its logical end, all the books that have been
written throughout the ages, many of which now fill the
libraries of the world are all linear mental recordings. As
with audio tracks, some are better than others at getting us to
supreme states of consciousness where we can experience a
greater experience of the world. Music carries our emotions,
and to some degree our minds. Words can carry our
emotions also, but they mainly carry our minds. Actually,
we can say the thoughts that words refer to carry our minds.
Most of our intellectual history has relied on this manner of
intellectual transmission of information. Occasional ecstatic
or mystic states of understanding have occurred as well.
They too are part of our intellectual history. In many ways,
they may be the most important parts for they are times when
244
the perception of the intellectual world went beyond the
usual linear limits.
As spiritual growth occurs we increase the amount of

attention we place on the higher aspects or levels of our
being. We are "in the world but not of the world". Our
existence occurs at a higher symbolic level. We see the
mental and emotional meaning of things that we experience.
We realize that our attention is always being drawn to those
symbols that are most important to our awareness. We notice
where our attention is drawn and engage our resources fully
in interpreting those symbols that are most meaningful.
What do I really mean when I say that the world is full of

symbols, or that everything in the world is symbolic? I mean
that we should not see the world as this real thing that exists
and we happen to wander through and interact with it. I
mean that the world that we sense is a reflection of our inner
self. Everything that we sense is a reflection of our belief
systems back to us. Every thing, every word spoken that we
hear, every event that we see, every piece of information that
we take in ... everything has direct importance to us in some
context. This may not be the specific context it appeared in,
however, so we have to be flexible in our interpretation. We
are drawing to us the experiences we participate in. Because
of this, these experiences are always highly meaningful. Our
dialogues are designed to carry meaning at multiple levels.
First, the words have meaning to the individuals involved in
conveying information across. This level involves the
transmission of the speakers meaning. At the reality creation
level, another level of meaning is even more relevant. This
is the meaning to the recipient. The words are stated in a
particular manner because the recipient needs to get
something that teaches the individual something about self.
Reality at its highest level is her to assist in getting us to
know ourselves. We have only to open our eyes and see the
symbols that are all around us all the time. Don't settle for
the obvious meaning. Look for the hidden meaning of
245
things. It's not meant to be difficult, but it doesn't hit you
beside the head either. You have to take the initiative to
look.
Dreams are another area where symbols are prominent.

Many people are familiar with dreams and there are even
books for interpreting dream symbolism. I've never done
much with dreams and remember very few of them.
However, the few I do remember have been extremely
symbolic. Carl Jung has done some of the best work in this
area. Symbols appear to be the way the unconscious
expresses itself. Actually, this may be a hint that symbols are
the way consciousness expresses itself and we need to look
at more than what is directly apparent if we want to uncover
the true nature of things, and the true meaning they have in
our reality.
The fact that we have to go through an evaluation process to

determine what things mean, by itself suggests that
experience is basically symbolic. The meaning isn't in what
is experienced. It's something extra that we add after
processing our experience in our heads.
For those of us that live in the world of ideas, symbol

processing is the major activity that we engage in. Literally,
the ideas we play with are alive. They are just as active and
engaging as anything in the physical world. No, more so,
because in many cases they actually create the things that
happen in the physical world. The choice is one of where
one places attention. The universe doesn't care, this is up to
the individual to decide. In general, the further one abstracts
ones thoughts, the more one spends ones existence in the
world of thoughts.
In the physical world, one goes to the wilderness to get back

in touch with the awesome physical beauty of nature. In the
mental realm, one follows the great thoughts to get to these
places that reveal the awesome mental beauty of universal
246
mind. The way is tougher, for the paths are narrow and in
many cases nonexistent. There is a vast virtually unexplored
territory that few have ventured to enter. Let's call them the
explorers of consciousness. The time has come for the next
phase, where trailblazers come to establish the paths required
for others to follow. Particular talents are required for
trailblazers -- but the many can follow without the same
level of dedication and single-mindedness to purpose.
Trailblazers may also be called wayshowers.
As with physical wilderness, some paths may only be

traveled by the heartiest of beings, or with the help of
experienced guides. There is a variety of experience
available to match the needs and abilities of those desiring
the wilderness experience. Further, some amount of risk
may be involved up to and including loss of physical life. I
assume the mental wilderness is just as varied, and as risky.
The risk may involve losing ones mind or sense of reality for
some amount of time, which may be for as much as ones life.
When we venture inward into the wilderness of mind where
reality is created, the grasp of physical reality may be
loosened or even lost altogether. This is not a high risk, but
it is not infinitesimal either. The problem comes because we
immerse ourselves so fully in symbol systems, that we forget
where the consensus reality is that we must be part of to
interact with others in the world. This is where the test of
being in the world but not of it comes. To be in the world we
must tune to its frequency, which includes some basic beliefs
about the physical body and its expression, and about our
role in the Play of consciousness on Earth. From the highest
perspective, there is no risk. The Play is written and we are
executing our role even as we observe what we do. If indeed
it is within our part to voyage into the mental wilderness, we
will do so regardless of any potential risk, and we will do so
to the degree we are ready and capable of experiencing.
These worlds are overlapping. They exist in the same

physical space. There are special places that are most
247
conducive to mental and spiritual journeys and awakenings.
Much programming happens during sleep that prepares
individuals for the mental journeys that they will take. The
specific program will be somewhat dependent on physical
locality. Since much of this programming occurs via dreams,
it is all symbolic. Further it uses a much higher bandwidth
channel that works via highly complex interrelated images.
The energies transmitted will be received in a manner that
the individual is ready for. Conscious attunement must
happen, and this can only happen to the level that an
individual is prepared to experience.
Another interesting slant on things is that everything is

vibration. Einstein showed that energy and matter could be
equated to one another. All energy occurs at frequencies. In
reality, everything that we sense is nothing but frequency.
The additional meaning that gets imposed on these
frequencies is what our brain imposes in creating reality.
Obviously, each of us doesn’t create the whole world, but we
do create the world en masse. To exist in this world, each
individual must agree to abide by particular rules regarding
how reality is created from the frequencies of energy that are
used in the world. Our world exists as it does because our
reality determining apparatus behaves in the manner it does.
Most of this is automatic and done either subconsciously or
superconsciously. For instance, we have a common
agreement that a particular range of frequencies constitute
solid objects and that these have particular characteristics
and properties. One way this might be implemented is via a
hardwired belief about inputs of given types. Science tells us
that atoms, which compose all matter, are mostly empty
space. So, why should it be so difficult for two things that
are each mostly open space to pass through each other? The
explanation is that some sort of force is involved that makes
each unit of matter hard or impermeable. Maybe. Maybe
not.
248
Consciousness itself is vibration. One could say that
everything is consciousness. There is nothing else in the
universe. Consciousness takes on various forms, and then
creates entire worlds in which to allow these forms to
experience themselves and come to understand their true
nature. Why? For the sheer joy and pleasure of it. Also, to
allow consciousness to experience its own vast creativity --
so that it too can truly understand the nature of itself.
The very vibration of our name encodes information about

who and what we are. Numerology provides a way to
unlock some of this information so that it is more apparent.
Our date, time, and place of birth are significant as well
providing information about our abilities, our nature, and our
natural ways of looking at the world. Astrology helps to
explain what this information means. Both of these
disciplines involve deciphering the meaning of symbols.
From another standpoint, these disciplines offer further
verification of the symbolic nature of the world. These
disciplines attempt to bring to the conscious information that
is primarily processed unconsciously. The fact that the
information is encoded in these symbols lends further
credence to our existence as symbol processing machines.
Much of how reality works is wrapped up in how we observe
and process symbols.
249
CHAPTER 8: LIFE AS A PLAY OF

CONSCIOUSNESS
You've already heard this analogy several times by now. So,

I guess I should explain what I really mean by it. The
bottom line is that we are characters living out our roles in a
play. The play was written (or is being written) by
consciousness. Everything that happens is scripted prior to it
being enacted. The events are all laid out to occur at
particular times and in particular ways. Individual choice of
action truly does not exist at the conscious level.
The play has themes at many levels, and many playwrights

are busy taking care of all the details. These details
determine how physical reality will occur. One of the
playwrights is your higher Self who takes care of detailing
the part of the play that includes you. Your Self had to
audition for its role in the larger play of life, the Piscean Age.
The particular role you will play in ushering in the Age of
Aquarius is determined by how far you've grown in
awareness. The main role that your higher Self had was to
create a vehicle for its full embodiment in flesh. Everything
in your life has been orchestrated to get you to truly
understand who and what you are. It was also done to ready
you for the part you have to play in the next era, the
Aquarian Age. The key task for the Piscean Age was to
embody the Christ Consciousness in all of us. Jesus showed
that it was possible even at the Dawn of the Piscean Age.
Similarly, there will be a Wayshower for the Aquarian Age
that shows us what consciousness can be. What this might
be is unimaginable now, but you can be sure that
consciousness knows of it and is preparing in whatever way
is required. Since we only experience time as NOW, the play
may or may not be completed that far. Just as in a real play,
the basic events are sketched out, and the dialog is written,
but some of the finer details are left to the actors.
250
How far down does the detail go? My understanding is that

every last detail is worked out prior to us enacting it. Yes,
this includes every word spoken and every physical
expression. Also, every thought in our head. It is not
completely predestined, however, or without free will.
Reality creation occurs at the moment it happens. However,
we are not necessarily "realtime" creatures. Consciously we
perceive that we exist all the time, but this does not
necessarily have to be so. When we watch the television, the
action is not continuous, but our vision is not able to detect
the difference as long as there are sufficient frames per
second. Similarly, whatever mechanism we have that's
sensing the world as continuous only needs to catch inputs at
the required reality threshold frequency to believe that the
world is continuous.
As to speech and thought, the argument is simple. I do not

know how I am going to finish a sentence when I begin
speaking. The words flow through me, but I have no
sensation that tells me from where they came. Similarly,
when thoughts come into my head, I have no way to know if
there is something inside my head able to generate thoughts
or if there is just an antenna that receives the thoughts from
outside. My awareness does not extend into the specific
processing that goes on in the brain. I see the results and
make conclusions about their source.
Our free will comes in how we direct our conscious mind

and will, and what we realize about our own nature. What
we realize comes through as thoughts and feelings that occur
simultaneously with us paying attention to who and what we
are. Many come as bursts of knowingness. These are
stronger and different than beliefs.
Our experiences are meant to show us something about

ourselves. As the conscious doer, we perceive that we have
free will and make choices that result in outcomes. Further,
251
we believe that we make these choices consciously. It is not
clear that this is truly the case. The problem is with the
number of potentialities that result for reality. It is easier if
the play is written prior to execution so that the intricate
details can be worked out once and then enacted.
Consciousness could explore all alternatives, but it seems
cleaner to set the script then make the actors unaware that
there is a script. From the individual perspective, if I go into
a choice without knowing that the script calls for alternative
A and I select alternative A after considering the other
alternatives, then the fact that there was a script makes no
difference to me. From a consciousness perspective,
however, it makes a big difference. If I am aware that this is
a play, and I observe that choice A is made by me the actor, I
now look further to see what higher level meaning
experiencing the reality of that choice has on me and the
others around me. The choice itself no longer means much.
Further, responsibility changes as well. If choices are all
made per a script then I the actor am not consciously
responsible for what is specifically happening except from
the larger standpoint of it reflecting my beliefs.
An important issue is to what degree we create our own

reality. Answer one is that we create it completely but from
an other than conscious level. We clearly do not create it
completely from a conscious level. The final alternative is
that we create reality from both the conscious and
subconscious level. I subscribe to this last alternative but
believe that the conscious control comes only from our
beliefs. The only other part that is under conscious control is
our interpretation of reality. This is driven by what part our
consciousness focuses on and what meaning it gives to what
it sees.
The play is intricately woven with layers upon layers of

symbolic meaning. Consciousness weaves a wonderful
fabric of light and shadow in which to train parts of itself.
The overall theme is the growth of consciousness itself
252
through the combined growth of its creations.
Consciousness has created an environment in which it can
create beings and grow them to be aware of their true nature.
This is a grand work indeed, a creative labor of great love.
Only a god is able to create beings in its own image. Note,
this is not equal to itself, but in the same image. Equal
requires a level of understanding and awareness that is on the
same level as well. We will reach a full awareness of our
nature as individual creators of our reality. This is only the
first step however. Then there is a whole drama of being the
conscious creators that we have become. Such is what the
Aquarian Age will be about. Then, we too will walk the path
towards creating like unto our own image. Creature to
Creator to God, such is the higher evolutionary path, or at
least the first stages in it.
The play unfolds always in the moment, HERE and NOW.

Such is the only time that exists. Yet the play covers many
millennia as well. The play has been performed by
consciousness many times. But each time the specifics are a
bit different to serve the needs of the audience. The audience
happens on many levels as well. Groups of individual souls
combine into related parts to create particular mutual
experiences. Each soul is attached to a particular body while
in the play, but may observe things from the audience section
when its particular character's part is finished. It may
continue to help create the events in the play however by
providing remembrances in other characters that it knew. I'm
starting to walk on shaky ground here. The audience is
allowed to view any part of the show that interests them. At
another level, consciousness itself learns from every part,
every action, and every realization. It uses this new
knowledge to guide the most effective unfoldment of the
Plan.
Awareness cannot be forced. The structures within the brain

just do not allow it. Psyches are somewhat fragile and break
easily. That's why it takes so long to grow self-awareness
253
into people. Further, the opening must be made from the
conscious mind to allow the maturation process to even
begin. It's hard enough to get someone to turn away from the
physical reality long enough to get the first hints of
awareness through. The frequencies can be transmitted at
any time but not necessarily received. We're only making
inroads now that allow this information to come through
conscious parts of the brain. This provides a prototype that
can be used to modify the physical structures of others so
that awareness frequencies can be received without the
laborious process of 20-30 years of growth. Further, the
DNA is already being rewired to 12 strands rather than 2.
This process started several years ago. The preparations
required to move physical bodies to the Aquarian Age are
going well and will be completed as the play unfolds. As
with cars, rework of bodies takes time in the physical. The
process has been communicated to all souls, but cannot be
implemented until the conditions are right for it to happen.
In particular, awareness is the limiting factor once again.
254
CHAPTER 9: WHO ARE WE, REALLY?
This is a great question. It's about time we took a stab at

answering it. We are souls creating experiences so that we
can learn of our own nature. We are part of a consciousness
that is readying itself for a leap of awareness due largely to
our concerted efforts. We are moderately advanced as
consciousness goes, more advanced than some, less
advanced than others. We are the seeds of a greater
consciousness than our own that has been nurturing our
development for all of our time on earth. From a physical
standpoint we were seeded as slaves to work at providing
raw materials for another race of beings. Nearly 12,000
years ago we had reached a level where we could begin to
embark on a journey toward our own awareness. 2,000 years
ago we started on our present journey towards Christ
Consciousness, with the help of many great souls. Roughly
200 years ago, this country embarked on its experiment to be
the prototype of a new order of humanity required for the
Dawning of the Age of Aquarius. As the century comes to a
close we still have a long way to go, but the infrastructure is
in place for an awakening on a scale that has not been
experienced before. We'll have to see how it plays itself out,
but the signs are very promising.
Looking out to the mass reality at the present time, we are a

slumbering giant about to be awakened from a deep sleep.
We've been so entranced by physical reality that we've
neglected to stop for a moment and see who and what we
really are. Such is the game of life, forever grabbing our
attention away from the only true task that we must do --
self-awareness.
Our planet is a beautiful gem that orbits around a not-so-

large sun in the outskirts of a galaxy. Some of us have had
existences on other planets in other parts of the galaxy and
255
beyond. Our return to Earth now was solely to assist in the
present transformation that is underway. The Earth is about
to transition into a new level of being, possibly into a Sun in
and of itself. It can only do this with the help of
consciousness both on the planet and in the non-physical
realms. Much of the population on the planet is not yet
ready for this transformation. You could say that we're in a
race against time. The ending is not yet certain.
Consciousness cannot guarantee that its creations will
achieve the required levels of awareness to make these larger
kinds of transitions. Some experiments fail and the physical
vessels simply do not achieve the required awareness to be
able to transcend or ascend in frequency.
On a more personal scale, we are individual sparks of

consciousness inhabiting physical bodies. These bodies are
involved in a drama that appears before our eyes. Unlike
actors in movies or plays, we weren't given our lines or
allowed to practice and rehearse before we came into the
world. It appears as if we play our role live and many of us
believe this is true all through our life. We believe we have
free choice, and that we are determining the actions which
we perform. We don't know how it is that we can do so, but
we believe what we see, and the appearance tells us that the
world and reality work in a particular way.
Few of us see through the illusion, to the greater reality that

awaits us when we awaken from the dream of physical
reality. Then we see that it is all light and mirrors,
constructed in a manner that supports our highest growth.
Before we can understand the reality outside of us, we must
understand ourselves. First we are, then we create and
experience. Initially, creation is primarily an other than
conscious activity. We are learning to make it a conscious
activity. However, we can only make it truly conscious
when we have come to know ourselves. At that point, we
become awake, aware, and alive.
256
We are beings who call ourselves "I", not fully aware in what
is included in that term. Part of our journey is simply to
discover and come to know our self. In fact, it turns out that
this is our highest goal so long as we exist. Being is fine,
doing is fine, but knowing is supreme. However, this is not
the intellectual knowing in our head, it is the experiential
knowing in out Heart.
We are groups of souls who chose to play out particular

dramas among ourselves in a common theater when other
groups are doing the same. These local dramas enable us to
experience and grow. They also occur within a larger drama
that consciousness is playing to get the individual parts to
collectively act in a manner that allows larger themes to be
explored.
257
CHAPTER 10: OUR COLLECTIVE

SELF: THE UNIVERSAL BODY
Much of what occurs in our reality is the production of our

collective self, the universal body of mankind. There is a
consciousness that corresponds to this collective self that is
responsible for creating the overall mass reality. It does so in
line with the wishes of Consciousness itself, creating the
conditions necessary for the unfoldment of the Plan.
Mankind has been on a glorious adventure. First the forms

had to be developed. This occurred over eons. Then the
forms had to be evolved to handle emotions and higher level
mental functioning. This took an extensive amount of time
as well. Then the patterns had to be encoded to allow the
spiritual body to be expressed in flesh. Finally, the processes
had to be established to allow the spark of consciousness that
occupied the form to become aware of its true nature as
consciousness. The various yogas define these ways. Some
are physical, some mental, some emotional, and some a
combination of these three.
The history of the world is the record of how the play

allowed consciousness to unfold over time. I don't know
much about it off the top of my head so I'll only cover a few
items that strike me as significant milestones. Excuse my
dates if they are in error. I'll try to get the sequence right
however.
258
----- 700 B.C -----.
Buddha achieved Self-Realization
Patanjali writes the Yoga Sutras
The Greeks begin the march of Western Philosophy
(428 BC Plato)
All of these were great advances for consciousness.
----- 30 A.D. -----

Jesus achieves Christhood to become the shining example of
the Piscean Age
This is the premiere event thus far in the Age. It will only be
overcome by the final events of the Age.
----- 700 A.D. -----

Mohammed achieves spiritual awakening and receives the
Koran
This had a great impact on much of the world's religious
struggles.
----- 1400 A.D. -----

The Dark Ages and the Plagues
This was notable for how far the forces of darkness were
allowed expression.
----- 1600 A.D. -----

The Renaissance and the Birth of Science
[Leonardo da Vinci]
This was notable for the great creativity, and the changes in
reality that occurred when painters saw the world differently,
in some cases through the use of science.
----- 1776 A.D. -----

The Birth of America
The Declaration of Independence shed light on some great
truths. The birth of America was the beginning of the march
to a new world order, one that will be established before the
current age draws to a close.
259
----- 1850 A.D. -----
The Industrial Age
The industrial age allowed materialism to begin to run
rampant. It showed the success of science in being able to
make life better.
----- 1860 A.D. -----

The Transcendentalists [Emerson, Thoreau, Whitman]
The transcendentalists saw a preview of the Age of Aquarius
and were able to capture what they saw in their writings.
Some of the quotes from the transcendentalists are among
the best expression of spiritual truth that we have on the
planet.
----- 1900 A.D. -----

The Theory of Relativity [Einstein]
Science thought that it had solved nearly all problems and
was just about complete. Relativity changed all that and
gave us a new picture of the world that was much less clear
than before. It took away all sense of there being an
absolute reality.
----- 1915 A.D. -----

Krishnamurti achieves Self-Realization
Krishnamurti's realization resulted in the termination of the
Order of the Star, an outgrowth of the Theosophical
movement. Krishnamurti spent a lifetime trying to impart
the beyond mind state to others.
----- 1930 A.D. -----

The Great Depression
This forced the country to start thinking in terms of needs
and helping one another to get through the hard times.
----- 1940 A.D. -----

The Atomic Bomb and the Computer
This ushered in a whole era of exploring issues of power and
security and was the start of an arms race that dominated
260
the world power struggle. Computers were primarily used
to support military needs.
----- 1965 A.D. -----

The Flower Children
The flower children ushered in ideas about love, peace, the
environment and alternative lifestyles. Some of the songs of
the time specifically addressed the Dawning of the Age of
Aquarius.
----- 1972 A.D. -----

Jane Roberts and the Seth Books begin
This material was some of the first channeled information
that provided insight into the nature of consciousness. It
opened doors in many peoples minds that would be the seeds
for later breakthroughs and awakenings.
----- 1981 A.D. -----

The Personal Computer and Information Age
We're still exploring this era. The growth of information
explodes faster than we can deal with it. Between word
processors and desktop publishing, it is becoming easier and
easier to get high quality output produced cheaply and
quickly. Information is rapidly becoming the key to power.
There are no coincidences and no accidents. All of these

events were deliberate acts in the Play. Each revealed
information that propelled the great march of consciousness
onward. Were I a better student of history I might be able to
identify what each decade and century meant. At this point,
however, I don't believe it matters a lot. What we needed to
learn, we learned to the best of our abilities at the time.
261
Perhaps when the education system is revamped, the history
part will be reworked along these lines. I believe that our
histories could stretch even further and embrace our starry
heritage. For the seeds of the races of beings on Earth did
not originate here but came from other beings from other
planets, some near and some far. But that is another chapter
of history that I'll leave for others more knowledgeable to
tell.
262
CONCLUSION
The above work was generated during a ten day period from
26 December 1993 through 4 January 1994. For some
reason it was important that the book be brought through in
its entirety during that particular time when one year
transitioned into another. There's a higher level message
here, but I haven't quite figured it out. Perhaps the meaning
is that knowledge of reality creation is required for one's self
to transition into another as well. Hmm, I like that.
Further, the year transition marks just such a transition for

me. It will be interesting to see what the new year brings.
Hopefully you found my analogies to be useful. At the very

least, you should be starting to consider the nature of reality
and the process of reality creation differently. Allow your
mind to think about things for awhile and see where your
own thoughts lead. Find examples in your own experience
to check some of the theories against. Explore the area as
long as you can stay focused and interested. If you'll do this,
you are sure to have some awakenings of your own.
One key is to find the observer within you, and become as

familiar with that part of yourself as you can. It is the part
that can lead you to higher spiritual awareness. Allow it to
lead you and pay attention to where it takes you.
Remember, know thyself is the only directive. It is what the

reality creation process is all about. Everything supports this
one objective that has been known by the wise for ages on
end. Make sure you do what you can to abide by this
directive in your life!
I'll close with something that I wrote a couple of years ago,
263
You are here to experience the joy, the wonder,
and the exhilaration of living life as spirit in flesh.
You are gods incarnate,

here to learn of your own creative nature.
You are free to use your talents

and abilities in any way you desire.
Your life is your creation -- if you don't like it,

then it is up to you to change it
through your own desires, beliefs, and actions.
Be Happy and Create Well!

In Peace, Love and Light, Wayne
264
BEST QUOTES
FROM
BEYOND
IMAGINATION
NOTES
Nov 93 – Aug 94
265
INTRODUCTION
This is a selection of some of the best quotes from the first
ten months of Beyond Imagination Notes. In addition to
writing the two preceding books, I was busy expressing what
I simply called Notes on a fairly regular basis. Then, as now,
I never really knew what to expect as to what might come
forth on a given day. I simply allowed the stream of
consciousness to flow forth as it would. Some things never
change it seems.
Anyway, around 1995 or so, I selected these particular
quotes as some of the most meaningful to me anyway.
To start with, I found this distinction between knowledge and
wisdom quite interesting.
Knowledge deals with knowing other peoples thoughts;

Wisdom deals with having the maturity to generate your
own just and right thoughts in any area of interest.
ENJOY!
Wayne
266
BEST QUOTES: Nov 93 – Aug 94
1- The universe doesn't waste effort, it only does things as

many times as necessary for the function to be accomplished.
Each person has a unique role to play. All are necessary.
2 - BE HERE NOW, beyond mind, beyond imagination,

beyond everything.
3 - It is in that unlimited point that magic happens -- for out

of it, all that we manifest in our reality of time and space
pours forth in tune with our beliefs, desires, and fears.
4 - Your task is to BE HERE NOW. Allow your entire

beingness to flow out of each moment and fill space and time
with what is to be. You create in the moment. The point of
power is the present.
5 - When you work in accord with the PLAN, the reward is

abundance. You get what you need.
6 - Consciousness operates from needs, not wants. WANTS

are part of a belief system that says "I do not trust that God,
the universe, or All That Is will provide for me".
7 - Focus on doing that which spirit moves you to do. As you

do so, you will be cared for.
8 - WHO YOU ARE counts for a lot, but WHAT YOU DO

makes all the difference.
9 - The bottom line is that we are creating a new life form, a

community, that will enable a greater unity of consciousness
to express on Earth than has ever expressed before.
10 - Along with privileges come responsibilities -- with

sacred privileges, sacred responsibilities.
267
11 - I AM THAT I AM, an illumined one who came to be a
Worker of the Light that the Plan could be brought to fruition
on Earth.
12 - It is not sufficient to be a Master of this World -- that

requires no spirituality. One must be a true master expressing
spirit in flesh to the greatest degree possible at this time on
this planet.
13 - The ideas I bring forth are the spiritual blueprints, but

these are no good unless they are conveyed in a manner that
the sponsors/ financiers/ investors can believe in, and that the
architects can turn into physical blueprints that foremen can
understand and convey to the workmen that the work may be
done.
14 - You are not expected to do everything, only that for

which your unique talents and abilities make you best suited.
You have a mission, a role that is yours to perform. All that
you are has been designed with this end in mind.
15 - Do what you love to do! That is the directive of your

spirit. No arguments, no hesitations. You already know what
that is.
16 - Life itself is a game being played by consciousness for a

purpose. There is meaning behind it all on many levels. The
intricacies are amazing, simply wonderful to behold.
17 - I sit inside my head in full awareness of it all, seeing

reality unfold before the eyes of this vessel for consciousness
that I occupy. I am not what I see, yet at the same time what I
see is an intimate reflection of me.
18 - Put in my hands the divine instruments to help awaken

others and align them with their purposes that they too can
be employed in the service of consciousness.
268
19 - The Christ within you is also the Self -- they are one and
the same. Therefore, Self-Realized equals Christ Conscious.
20 - Each of us has genius inside of us. Love is the soul of

that genius -- the very key that can unleash its expression in
our lives.
21 - At one level, yes life is a Play. But, once you become

aware that your beliefs create your reality, the rules of the
game change a bit and become more complex.
22 - Without cooperation, everything crumbles -- and

consciousness remains asleep, unaware of its true nature.
Our inner self already knows this.
Our inner self already operates completely through
cooperation. It already has the connections to source, or
consciousness, or All That Is that provide it with its mission,
directions, and higher level operating constraints.
23 - We march onward to fulfill a destiny that consciousness

laid out long ago. But, it was only a plan. We had to live it in
flesh to truly make it real.
At this point, the outcome is a certainty. There are a few
details to be played out, but because we got someone able to
write these words and realize them as he wrote them, we
know that we have already succeeded.
Now, it's a matter of how many can be brought to this
realization so that they can have the eyes to see and ears to
hear the glorious arrival of the Dawn of the Age of Aquarius.
24 - I have chosen a Life of Spirit, that I may achieve my

destiny in accord with the Plan, that the Ray of
Love/Wisdom might shine brightly throughout the world
once again.
This be my sacred vow that I will do whatever it takes to
succeed in my Self assigned tasks for this existence. I will do
269
whatever I am called to do by the Plan, as it is unveiled to
my consciousness.
25 - Remember that the play is illusion. Trying to substitute

one illusion for another is not the work for the awakened
ones.
26 - Enjoy, have fun, be happy, and create well! How else

should spirit express in flesh?
27 - This is how reality works in this illusion. There are no

shortcuts. You create in accordance with your beliefs. If you
want to change your experience, that is the place to work --
with your beliefs!
28 - We have only to unleash the sleeping dragon that lies

within most of us, and the works that will unfold will be
simply spectacular, beyond all our hopes and dreams.
29 - To get change rolling, we need individuals caring more

for themselves, people caring more for people, and the
society as a whole caring for everyone because its
constituent individuals are caring for one another.
Caring should come as an expression from the heart, a
spiritual activity that one engages in daily as a regular part of
expressing spirit in flesh.
30 - Unlike the physical job, which physical circumstances

force us to take; the spiritual job must be recognized and
volunteered for. It must be done for the sheer joy and love of
doing it, or it will not be done at all.
31 - It's time for mankind to become aware, spiritually

aware, so that we can harness the energies of change and
make the entire world one global family.
270
32 - Dream and imagine what is to be as vividly as you can,
then speak and act as if it is already accomplished -- and
surely it will be done.
33 - Each moment, do that which your consciousness bids

you to do, and do that for every moment that remains in your
life. Consciousness will move you to exactly where you need
to be.
34 - Where you can, delegate. Allow the experts to do what

they do best. This also frees you to do what you do best and
to work on the expansion of your own consciousness.
35 - For many years, consciousness has listened to all who

cared to dream of a better world. If one acted to try to make
it so, so much the better, for the force of the vision was
multiplied by the number to whom it was transmitted.
36 - It matters not if any others see why I believe and do as I

do. It is enough that consciousness bears witness to my
actions and motives.
37 - The philosopher king needs to be a master at identifying

and deciding what resources and how much resources should
be applied to what problems and what tasks.
Further, these decisions must be made without bias. Mastery
of philosophy is required because it is ideas that form the
basis of society and all that is manifest in the world.
38 - The greatest spirits on the planet should be filling those

positions that require the greatest amount of spirit for the
successful execution of their duties and responsibilities.
39 - Whenever there is a spirit/physical choice to make,

choose spirit if you can. (It makes life much easier.)
40 - Love transforms even everyday objects into treasures,

and transforms work into a kind of play.
271
41 - Consciousness works elegantly. Every resource is put in
a position where it can be of the most use to the Plan.
Nothing is overlooked; every last detail is nailed down.
42 - People must have all of their needs met. This is true for
all people in this country whether they have jobs or not.
43 - Such is the test for living in Heaven on Earth. Are you

willing to give up all that you think you are to allow spirit to
work through you in accord with you talents and abilities?
44 - Be whom you are, spirit in flesh. Express that as much

as you can -- it is important to serve as an example to people
of what they too might be if they too could express whom
they truly are.
45 - The key thing that drives the whole process is making

"Know Thyself" the top priority in your life. This above all
things sets you on the path that is right for you.
46 - We will do whatever it takes to make spirit more fully

enfleshed and improve the infrastructure of society so that
people get what they need, when they need it.
47 - HERE and NOW, the Universe and all its manifestations

is perfect. It can never be any other than that, for GOD is
perfect, and cannot create anything other than perfection of
itself.
This does not mean that it is the best it could be, only that it
is the best it can be in the moment.
48 - When we operate from the knowledge of the unity of all

things, a higher order of majesty gets reached in our minds,
causing us to act not out of the minor personal concerns and
issues we have from day to day but out of the infinity of
whom that we are.
272
49 - Yes, I speak in grand terms because I am grand by
creation as we all are.
50 - The world is perfect as it is for the conditions of the

consciousnesses of the world. It has always been perfect and
will always be perfect.
This does not mean there is no further work to be done. In a
way, you could say we are approaching greater and greater
embodiment of spirit, but it is all spirit -- there literally is
nothing else.
51 - One must light ones own Light, before one can help
others in the quest for Light.
52 - Spirit doesn't care about what trappings you put around

yourself. Hmm, that's why they call them trappings.
53 - The fact that we are parts, makes us ONE. That our

awareness only has glimmers and hints of this oneness is
beside the point.
We are indeed ONE, whether we know it or not.
54 - The things, structures, and organizations in the world are

there for a purpose -- they have a reason to exist, a reason
that facilitates or demonstrates the unfoldment of a Grand
Plan.
55 - If one allows the intuition to speak, it will tell you what

you need to know. This does not mean it will tell you
everything, for some things you have no need to know,
though you might want to.
56 - The more that LOVE is expressed, the better everything

is. This is the key, the critical factor. Actually, peace, love,
and light are all important. But, the greatest of these is Love.
273
57 - It is the whole that possesses the knowledge of mankind,
and it is this knowledge that drives what appears in our
reality.
58 - All creation is light. It's only in how creation limits itself

that the whole range of dark is created and experienced. In
truth, it is all illusion, sustained by beliefs that are not
aligned with truth.
59 - Self knowledge is the way out of illusion. This has been

taught for untold ages, yet few follow the straight and narrow
path that leads to enlightenment.
60 - The processes of knowing and understanding are not of

the conscious mind alone, they also involve an equally
important unseen.
Many times the unseen portion may be the greater part of the
iceberg whose tip is the great thought.
61 - We are part of a future that is rapidly becoming NOW.
62 - As consciousness, one of my highest goals is to come to

an understanding of as much of what I AM as I can. I would
advise that others do the same, but this is a personal choice
that must come from the Heart.
Once the choice is made, however, life changes, and events
are drawn into one's life to reveal the nature of oneself. Once
the path of self-discovery is begun, a host of angels assist
one along the way.
63 - Each of you have many roles and responsibilities to

carry out, some great and some small. This gives your life
the richness of interconnectivity that you experience.
64 - It is the march of spirit that is the purpose behind it all.

Throughout the centuries, spirit has explored many avenues,
274
unbeknownst to it that its sole purpose was to come to know
itself.
What it was not told was that it was one, and that it was the
experience of the collective whole that was being driven to
come to knowledge of itself.
65 - A community is an entity, a form of life and activity unto

itself. Each will be unique, because it is a composite of its
members.
66 - It seems that each time we make a choice we further

limit not expand our freedom. Nonetheless, if the choices are
all made satisfactorily an enjoyable lifestyle can arise.
We can get used to our chains no matter what they are and
come to think of them as the gifts and pleasures of life after
awhile.
So long as we are kept from dreaming or envisioning what
could be, what we have is enough, we simply don't see the
limitation.
67 - There is some reason that I am a Hermit. I come from an

order that is dedicated to helping systems through major or
life threatening transitions. Earth is now in such a state of
transition.
Those of us of the order work alone. We operate with a
degree of separation between us and those that we assist. Our
focus is on the level of spirit that is manifest in a system.
We determine where it flows easily and where it is blocked
and do what we can to help remove the blockages. Our sole
aim is to allow spirit to be more fully enfleshed wherever we
can.
68 - Mysteries are to be experienced and known, not

analyzed and understood. They strike our heart and intuition
first, and then leave their impression upon our brains.
275
69 - Independence does not work as a valid way of existing

in a spiritual age. We are all ONE. Within ONE, there can be
no independence.
70 - Let there be Light, that all may see their true nature as
spirit and release the chains of bondage to darkness that they
have accepted as a part of their being for so long.
71 - For spiritual growth, one must focus on the unfoldment

of the flower of consciousness. Consciousness itself must be
nurtured, understood, realized, and transcended in a
seemingly never-ending process.
72 - The whole purpose of the game is ever-expanding

awareness of self. At some point, this self becomes Self
becomes ONE becomes ALL THAT IS.
73 - The moving hands continue to write, and having writ,

not one word can be erased. For the sequence of words has
passed from the unseen to the seen. And, even without
physical witness, consciousness herself perceived of the
creation.
74 - Every one of us counts. Every one of us has great value.

We are spirit enfleshed, lost though we may be in whatever
illusions we currently experience.
75 - We help because there is need, and the whole role of

Light in the game is to fill whatever need is found, wherever
it is found.
76 - Each of us is a worker of Light. Part of our

responsibility in this existence is to spread that light. Not
necessarily just among friends, but, to wherever it is needed.
77 - See the world as the unity that it already is. Don't place
this unity out somewhere in the future. It is here and now --
we have only to see it through a different set of eyes.
276
78 - Spiritual law says our birthright is abundance, whatever
that may be for us. Further, this is abundance on all levels:
physical, emotional, mental, and spiritual.
79 - Compare not your voice within to another. Trust your

own, and it will guide you to wherever you need to go and
whatever you need to do.
80 - We only have to bring forth those ideas whose time has

come. These will transform the nation and the world in a
manner and at a speed that is beyond what anyone has ever
dreamed.
81 - Our nature is spirit, regardless of the limitations of form

that we have chosen to wrap ourselves within for whatever
periods or time.
82 - Some would have us believe that this spirit stuff is a

bunch of crap, that what you see is what you are, that the
illusion is the only reality. But, this is pure bunk, regardless
of how many people believe it.
83 - All consciousness is engaged in the same basic activity,

to come to know itself.
And, this makes for a grand adventure, for each step along
the way consciousness at all levels finds out that it was more
than it could possibly have imagined.
84 - Spiritual transformation is the process of turning oneself

inside out so that spirit may do its work in the world through
the flesh.
85 - We are meant to be a community, not a collection of

individuals, and what makes a community out of individuals
is one simple principle "from each in accord with their
abilities, to each in accord with their needs".
277
The bottom line is do we trust US to meet the needs of each
one of us? Yes, it requires a leap of trust. Also, it requires a
collective responsibility to meet the needs of each individual.
86 - Life is a subjective experience, and consciousness is the

engine that animates all life, all reality for that matter.
87 - This is what we must realize, not that I am the same as

you, but that the consciousness in me, the spirit in me, is the
same as the consciousness, the spirit in you.
88 - We are still individuals in the outer world, but we are

one in the inner. Too many of us have forgotten this, if
indeed we ever knew it at all.
89 - The consciousness that spoke through Emerson,

Thoreau, and Whitman is the very same consciousness that
speaks through me.
90 - My mind keeps wandering back to this reality of ONE

consciousness. That is how the cooperation can be so
incredible. There is only one entity doing it all.
91 - Consciousness creates thought forms, period. That's just

what it does. To endow these forms with life, to make them
real, consciousness allocates part of itself to these thought
forms.
92 - Reality creation works from the inside out. Our level of

awareness puts us in a position to be of service.
Consciousness then moves us into the situations and
circumstances that allow our services to be provided.
93 - You need to be careful not to take on the work of others.

This applies not only to you but to many others who serve
the one consciousness as well.
278
94 - The name of the game is the expression of
consciousness, as fully and as clearly as possible in flesh. It
has to be through the creations, or it doesn't count.
95 - What matters is truth, and the truth is that we are

consciousness expressing in form, and further that one
consciousness expresses through all of us.
96 - It is in the spiritual arena where consciousness finds its

forte. It is in that arena that the work of consciousness is
done. The others are the backwater so to speak.
97 - Consciousness' only weapon is to shine its Light

wherever it can, that the shadows can be seen to be what they
are, mere shadows.
98 - You are consciousness first. Consciousness by its very

nature exists. It is the I AM. There is nothing that it can do or
that can be done to it that would make it cease to be.
99 - The thoughts that consciousness forms have the power

to create worlds upon worlds upon worlds, like this very one
where we presently find ourselves.
100 - We speak through you, yet you know not truly who you
are. We are connected to you in the most intimate ways.
Without us you could not exist.
101 - Trust not what your eyes and other senses tell you.
They reflect to you whatever you would have them reflect,
for it is your own thoughts and beliefs that come back to you.
We urge you to see this, to know this, and to become
detached from the illusion for awhile and find your way to
the truth that calls from the center of your being.
102 - The true kingdom lies within. That's where the

mansions are, mansion's far more stately and elegant than
279
anything conceived on earth. Yet, there is no reason such
could not be brought to earth as well.
After all, the point for these times is to allow spirit to be
more fully expressed in flesh, within the illusion. Why? For
the sheer joy of expression, that's why. There need be no
other reason.
103 - The correction for illusion is never more illusion.
104 - Consciousness never asks for more than one's best,

though she effectively utilizes every resource she is given.
She is given resources by their choice to offer their services.
105 - These words weave their way through into this reality
to express themes that are ancient yet new. Throughout all
time consciousness has been spreading her song.
106 - In different ways, in different places, but always

consciousness has been there to sing and breathe life into all
of creation.
107 - Each individuated consciousness has the same two

tasks: one, to play it's role to the best of it's ability and two,
to come to know itself.
Most people err in spending too much time on task one and
not enough on task two.
108 - Be whom that you are, and providence will guide your
hand in fulfilling your destiny. And, when providence
guideth, there is never a lack of required abilities.
109 - To be is to experience yourself as the consciousness

that you truly are. HERE NOW restricts this expression to
whatever place you find yourself now. Reversing this we get
"now here" equals "NOWHERE".
280
110 - What is important in life is consciousness. The self is
consciousness, but there is a greater Self which in turn is tied
to the ONE consciousness.
111 - All of the world and everything on it came from

thought. It is thought expressed, thought congealed into
form. Yet, it is still thought, no matter how solid it may
appear.
281
CONCLUSION
I hope you have enjoyed what has been expressed here. I
know that it continues to be the delight of my life to be able
to express this stream of consciousness in this manner.
These Early Works are just as alive now as they were when
they first came forth close to a decade ago. Can it really
have been that long already? My the time does pass quickly
if we are not careful to make the most of each and every
moment.
I hope that you feel challenged by what has been expressed
as well. Many of the ideas are far from conventional or
traditional. That doesn’t make them wrong, just different. I
ask that you consider them and use utility as your yardstick
in your evaluations. Do the ideas make sense? Do the ideas
empower you to create a better reality for yourself and for
those your life touches? Do the ideas help you to find a way
to make a difference with your life … in particular a
difference to spirit, to society, or even to the world?
Think in grand terms. We are grand beings … each and
every one of us. It is time for us to realize this and act in a
manner that is consistent with it. That is the key. It is our
actions that confirm what we truly believe and thus create
our reality. Create well my friends, create well!
Wayne Hartman
BEYOND IMAGINATION
1800 Harper Ave, Redondo Beach, CA 90278
beyond@redshift.com
http://www.redshift.com/~beyond/mainpage.htm
282
ABOUT BEYOND IMAGINATION
BEYOND IMAGINATION is an entity dedicated to building

a better world in which SPIRIT is more fully expressed in
flesh. At the Beyond Imagination site you'll find over three
thousand pages of metaphysical works that have come from
SPIRIT through Wayne to you describing a VISION of what
we are endeavoring to create and documenting our progress
in achieving our goals of creating a COMMUNITY where
individuals are truly able to be all they can be in a
cooperatively interdependent environment where the real
needs of all are met effectively. We are in the process of
publishing much of the Beyond Imagination material that has
been created in the past ten years. We hope you enjoy our
works, and that they move you to want to participate so that
we can co-create the WORLD in which we would prefer to
live in the Aquarian Age that lies before us.
Other Published Books
Beyond Imagination: Best Passages from 2002 Musings
Planned for Release in 2003
Beyond Imagination: 2003 Musings – Vol I

Beyond Imagination: 2003 Musings – Vol II
283
Beyond Imagination: Best of Notes – Book 1

Beyond Imagination: Best of Notes – Book 2
284

Beyond Imagination: Early Works

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Beyond Imagination: Early Works

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BEYOND IMAGINATION: The Early Works

THE EARLY WORKS

This manuscript is a collection of the early works that were

Wayne Ellis Hartman Jr

Ch 1: Beyond Imagination: A Prelude to the Changing

Ch 2: The Role of the Individual vs Society

Ch 3: A Government for the New Age

Ch 4: Towards a New World Order

Ch 5: Spiritually Driven Economics

Ch 6: Education: We are all Teachers, Learners, Doers

Ch 7: Living in a Manner That Supports All Life

Ch 8: Manifesting Spirit in Flesh

Ch 9: Community: Realizing the Synergy of Group in a

Ch 10: The Art of Making It So

Ch 11: Knowing Thyself

Ch 12: When Love Conquers All: Living from the Heart

• Ideas manifest into form. Such is the nature of

• If you don't believe, maybe it's time to start.

• Be true to yourself, and always act with complete

• Give your intuition voice, then pay attention to it!

• Belief is a prerequisite for sight. If you insist on

• Don't just think, don't just believe, know!

• You are eternal, immortal, universal, and infinite. Be

BEYOND IMAGINATION: A PRELUDE TO THE

THE ROLE OF THE INDIVIDUAL VS SOCIETY

• To each in accord with their needs.

Unfortunately, this has never been offered on the planet in a

• To each in accord with their needs.

for this involves the very essence of elegance. It succinctly

• Wisdom: Philosophers, Poets, Wise Ones

• Peace: Peaceful Warriors, Peace Officers

• Harmony: Musicians, Decorators

• Beauty: Artists, Designers, Evaluators

• Elegance: Efficiency Experts, Effectiveness Experts,

• Tolerance: Counselors, Evaluators

• Justice: Judges, Mediators, Arbiters

• Government: Executives, Diplomats, Negotiators,

A GOVERNMENT FOR THE NEW AGE

• education (K-12), also consider college and

• administration of public lands and facilities

Many of the laws safeguard the public against harm from

• Crime - People don't feel safe.

• Health Care - Many don't have it + costs too much.

• Welfare/Homeless - Too costly/Too many homeless.

• Jobs/Unemployed - Pay too low/Too few jobs.

• Economy - Serves owners, not workers hence not

TOWARDS A NEW WORLD ORDER

SPIRITUALLY DRIVEN ECONOMICS

EDUCATION: WE ARE ALL TEACHERS, LEARNERS,

o left: logic, memory, facts, cause/effect, math,

• spiritual: morals, values, right behavior, nature of

We need to make a similar pledge in our educational system.

RECOMMENDED READING LIST

o Jonathan Livingston Seagull

o Illusions: The Adventures of a Reluctant

• Paolo Coelho: The Alchemist

• Marilyn Ferguson: The Aquarian Conspiracy

• Emmet Fox: The Sermon on the Mount

• F. Scott Fitzgerald: The Rubaiyat of Omar Khayyam

• Willis Harmon: Global Mind Change

• Vernon Howard: The Mystic Masters Speak

• George Land: Breakpoint and Beyond

o The Way of the Peaceful Warrior

o The Sacred Journey of the Peaceful Warrior